all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos | labels |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
HT-G700 Manual UC2 IM 20191008rev1 | Users Manual | 4.04 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
HT-G700 Manual new 20191118 Part01 | Users Manual | 4.67 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
HT-G700 Manual new 20191118 Part02 | Users Manual | 3.36 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
HT-G700-Active Speaker System-Int Photo---Part 01 | Internal Photos | 3.51 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
HT-G700-Active Speaker System-Int Photo---Part 02 | Internal Photos | 2.97 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
HT-G700-Active Speaker System-Ext Photo | External Photos | 305.77 KiB | ||||
1 |
|
SA-G700 UC2 label position and size Rev01 1120 | ID Label/Location Info | 155.56 KiB | ||||
1 |
|
SA-G700 UC2-BAR- Label Rev01 1120 | ID Label/Location Info | 121.69 KiB | ||||
1 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 | Test Report | |||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 |
|
HT-G700 Autorization letter Kobayashi 1119 | Cover Letter(s) | 323.51 KiB | ||||
1 | HT-G700 AMP SCH | Schematics | November 22 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 |
|
HT-G700 FCC ID Authorization Letter BAR | Cover Letter(s) | 85.54 KiB | ||||
1 |
|
HT-G700 FCC ID Confidentiality Request Letter BAR | Cover Letter(s) | 77.98 KiB | ||||
1 | HT-G700 HDMI SCH | Schematics | November 22 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 | HT-G700 Soundbar PSU SCH-20190813 | Schematics | November 22 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 | HT-G700 Touch and OLED SCH | Schematics | November 22 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 | SA-G700-BAR- Block Diagram 191120 | Block Diagram | November 22 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 | SA-G700-BT module-Block Diagram 1122 | Block Diagram | November 22 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 | SA-G700 generic 2.4G wireless module-Block Diagram 1122 | Block Diagram | November 22 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 | SA-G700 product description 20191120 | Operational Description | November 22 2019 | confidential |
1 | HT-G700 Manual UC2 IM 20191008rev1 | Users Manual | 4.04 MiB |
C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\FY20_SB1_conditional\01US-
HTZ9FUC2\010COV.fm 010COV.fm Page 1 Monday, September 2, 2019 9:38 AM masterpage:
Right Sound Bar Operating Instructions HT-G700 HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\020REG.fm masterpage: Left 020REG.fm Page 2 Thursday, September 19, 2019 8:55 PM Owners Record The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom of the bar speaker. Record the serial numbers in the space provided below. Refer to them whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding the Sound Bar. Model No. HT-G700 Serial No. WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this system to rain or moisture. The system is not disconnected from the mains as long as it is connected to the AC outlet, even if the system itself has been turned off. To reduce the risk of fire, do not cover the ventilation opening of the system with newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, etc. Do not expose the system to naked flame sources (for example, lighted candles). To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this system to dripping or splashing, and do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the system. As the main plug is used to disconnect the system from the mains, connect the system to an easily accessible AC outlet. Should you notice an abnormality in the system, disconnect the main plug from the AC outlet immediately. Do not install the system in a confined space, such as a bookcase or built-in cabinet. 2US CAUTION Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not expose batteries or appliances with battery-installed to excessive heat, such as sunshine and fire. Do not place this product close to medical devices. This product (including accessories) has magnet(s) which may interfere with pacemakers, programmable shunt valves for hydrocephalus treatment, or other medical devices. Do not place this product close to persons who use such medical devices. Consult your doctor before using this product if you use any such medical device. Indoor use only. For the bar speaker The nameplate is located on the bottom of the bar speaker. For the customers in the U.S.A. NOTE:
This system has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This system generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this system does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the system off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\020REG.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 3 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the system and receiver. Connect the system into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connection to host computers and/or peripherals in order to meet FCC emission limits. If you have any questions about this Sound Bar:
Visit: www.sony.com/support Contact: Sony Customer Information Service Center at 1-800-222-SONY
(7669) Write: Sony Customer Information Service Center 12451 Gateway Blvd., Fort Myers, FL 33913 Suppliers Declaration of Conformity Trade Name: SONY Model No.: HT-G700 Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc. Address: 16535 Via Esprillo, San Diego, CA 92127 USA Telephone No.: 858-942-2230 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this system. US This system must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This system complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This system should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from persons body. For the customers in Canada Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connection to host computers and/or peripherals. This system contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas license-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This system may not cause interference; and
(2) This system must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the system. This system complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This system should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from persons body. 3US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\010COVTOC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 4 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Table of Contents About These Operating Instructions ............................. 5 Whats in the Box .......................... 6 What You Can Do with the System .....................................7 Guide to Parts and Controls ......... 8 Installing the System Installing the Bar Speaker and Subwoofer Startup Guide
(separate document) Mounting the Bar Speaker on a Wall ........................................ 13 Connecting the Subwoofer .......... 15 When the TV Remote Control does not Work ................................16 Connecting to a TV or AV Device Connecting to a TV or AV Device with the HDMI Cable Startup Guide
(separate document) Connecting Sony TV with the BLUETOOTH Function Wirelessly ............................... 17 Connecting a 4K TV and 4K Devices .................................. 20 Listening to Music/Sound Listening to a TV and Other Devices ...................................22 Adjusting the Volume ..................23 Enjoying Multiplex Broadcast Sound
(AUDIO) ..................................23 Listening to Music/Sound with the BLUETOOTH Function ......... 24 4US Adjusting the Sound Quality Enjoying Immersive Surround Experience
(IMMERSIVE AE) ......................27 Setting the Sound Effect that is Tailored to Sound Sources
(Sound Mode) ....................... 28 Making Dialogs Clearer
(VOICE) .................................. 29 Enjoying Clear Sound with Low Volume at Midnight
(NIGHT) .................................. 29 Checking the Current Sound Settings ................................. 30 Using the Control for HDMI Function Using the Control for HDMI Function ................................. 31 Using the BRAVIA Sync Function .................................33 Changing the Settings Using the Setting Menu .............. 34 Changing the Brightness of the Front Panel Display and Indicators (DIMMER) ............. 39 Saving Power in Standby Mode ..................................... 40 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting ...........................41 Resetting the system .................. 47 Additional Information Specifications .............................. 48 Supported Input Audio Formats ................................. 50 Supported HDMI Video Formats .................................. 51 On BLUETOOTH Communication .................... 53 HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\010COVTOC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 5 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ..........................54 Precautions ..................................58 Index ............................................ 61 About These Operating Instructions The instructions in these Operating Instructions describe the controls on the remote control. Some illustrations are presented as conceptual drawings, and may be different from the actual products. The default settings are underlined on each feature description. Characters in brackets [ ] appear on the front panel display. 5US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 6 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Whats in the Box Bar speaker (1) WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE (1) Subwoofer (1) Startup Guide Remote control (1)/
R03 (size AAA) battery (2) Operating Instructions (this document) HDMI cable (supports the specification equal to Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet) (1) AC power cord (mains lead) (2) 6US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 7 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM What You Can Do with the System The system supports object-based audio formats such as Dolby Atmos and DTS:X as well as HDR video formats such as HDR10, HLG, and Dolby Vision. Listening to a TV and Other Devices (page 22) Blu-ray Disc player, cable box, satellite box, etc. Basic connection: Refer to Startup Guide (separate document). Other connections: See Connecting to a TV or AV Device (page 17). Connecting Sony TV with the BLUETOOTH Function Wirelessly
(page 17) Using the Control for HDMI Function (page 31) Using the BRAVIA Sync Function (page 33) Listening to Music/Sound with the BLUETOOTH Function (page 24) Connecting the Subwoofer
(page 15) 7US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 8 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Guide to Parts and Controls Details are omitted from the illustrations. Bar Speaker (Main Unit) Front
(power) button BLUETOOTH indicator Turns on the system or sets it to standby mode.
(input select) button Selects the input for playback on the system. BLUETOOTH button (page 24)
+/ (volume) buttons Lights in blue: BLUETOOTH connection has been established. Flashes slowly in blue repeatedly:
BLUETOOTH connection is being attempted. Flashes twice in blue repeatedly:
During pairing standby status. Front panel display Remote control sensor Point the remote control at the remote control sensor to operate the system. 8US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 9 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Rear Input Audio Formats (page 50). For specifications and notes on connections, see Supported HDMI Video Formats (page 51). AC inlet IR repeater (page 16) Transmits the remote signal of the TV remote control to the TV. TV IN (OPT) jack HDMI IN jack For specifications and notes on connections, see Supported HDMI Video Formats (page 51). UPDATE port (page 38) Connect the USB memory when updating the system. HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack Connect a TV that has an HDMI input jack with an HDMI cable. The system is compatible with eARC and ARC. ARC is the function that sends TV sound to an AV device such as the system from the TVs HDMI jack. eARC is an extension of ARC and enables transmission of the object audio and multi-channel LPCM content that cannot be transmitted with ARC. For details of eARC, see
[EARC] (page 36). For supported audio formats, see Supported 9US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 10 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Subwoofer Power indicator Flashes quickly in green: The subwoofer is attempting to connect to the system with the manual connection. Flashes slowly in green: The subwoofer is attempting to connect to the system. Lights in green: The subwoofer is connected to the system. Flashes in amber: The software is Lights in red: The subwoofer is in updating. standby mode. Turns off: The subwoofer is turned off.
(power) button Turns on or off the subwoofer. LINK button (page 15) AC inlet 10US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 11 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Remote Control INPUT (page 22) Selects the playback source. Each time you press INPUT, the selected input appears in the front panel display cyclically as follows.
[TV] [HDMI] [BT]
IMMERSIVE AE (page 27) Turns on/off the vertical surround function. AUTO SOUND (page 28) CINEMA (page 28)
(volume) +*/ (page 23) Adjusts the volume. SW (subwoofer volume) +/
(page 23) Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer. MENU (page 34) Turns on/off the setting menu in the front panel display.
/ (page 34) Selects the menu items. ENTER (page 34) Enters the selection. BACK (page 34) Returns to the previous display. VOICE (page 29)
(power) Turns on the system or sets it to standby mode. DISPLAY (page 30) Displays the settings of the sound mode, IMMERSIVE AE, voice mode, night mode, and current stream information. STANDARD (page 28) MUSIC (page 28) 11US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 12 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM
(muting) Turns off the sound temporarily. DIMMER (page 39) AUDIO* (page 23) NIGHT (page 29)
* The AUDIO and + buttons have a tactile dot. Use it as a guide during operation. About the replacement of batteries for the remote control When the system does not respond by operating with the remote control, replace two batteries with new batteries. Use R03 (size AAA) manganese batteries for replacement. 12US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\040PRE.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 13 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Installing the System Installing the Bar Speaker and Subwoofer Refer to Startup Guide (separate document). Mounting the Bar Speaker on a Wall You can mount the bar speaker on a wall. 1 Prepare two screws (not supplied) that are suitable for the wall mount holes on the rear of the bar speaker. 4 mm (3/16 in) More than 30 mm (1 3/16 in)
======
5.1 mm
(13/64 in)
========
5 mm
(7/32 in) 10 mm
======
(13/32 in)
========
9 mm
(3/8 in) Hole on the rear of the bar speaker 2 Stick WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE
(supplied) on a wall. Center of the TV Notes Prepare screws (not supplied) that are suitable for the wall material and strength. As a plasterboard wall is especially fragile, attach the screws securely in the wall beam. Install the speakers horizontally, hung by screws in studs in a continuous flat section of the wall. Have the installation done by a Sony dealer or licensed contractor and pay special attention to safety during the installation. Sony shall not be held responsible for accidents or damage caused by improper installation, insufficient wall strength, improper screw installation or natural disaster, etc. Adhesive tape, etc. WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE 1 Align TV CENTER LINE () of WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE with the center line of your TV. 2 Align TV BOTTOM LINE () of WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE with the bottom of your TV, then stick WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE on a wall by using a commercially available adhesive tape, etc. 13US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\040PRE.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 14 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM 3 Fasten the screws into the marks
() on SCREW LINE () of WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE as in the illustration below. 368.5 mm
(14 1/2 in) 368.5 mm
(14 1/2 in) Notes When sticking WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE, smooth it out fully. When you do not use WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE, install the bar speaker apart from the TV by 70 mm (2 3/4 in) or more. Screws Marks () 10.5 mm to 11.5 mm
(approx. 7/16 in) 4 Remove WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE. 5 Hang the bar speaker on the screws. Align the holes of the rear of the bar speaker with the screws, then hang the bar speaker on the two screws. 14US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\040PRE.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 15 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Connecting the Subwoofer Connecting the Subwoofer Automatically The subwoofer is connected to the system automatically when they are turned on. For details, refer to Startup Guide
(separate document) for the subwoofer connection. Connecting the Subwoofer Manually If you cannot connect the subwoofer to the system, or you use multiple wireless products and want to specify the wireless connection to link the system to the subwoofer, perform the manual connection. LINK Power indicator
/
MENU ENTER 1 Press MENU. The setting menu appears in the front panel display. 2 Press / to select [SPEAKER], then press ENTER. 3 Press / to select [LINK], then press ENTER. 4 Press / to select [START], then press ENTER.
[LINK] flashes in the front panel display. To cancel the manual link, select
[CANCEL]. 5 Press LINK on the subwoofer. The manual link starts. The power indicator of the subwoofer flashes quickly in green. 6 When [DONE] appears in the front panel display, press MENU. The link is established and the power indicator of the subwoofer lights in green. Note If [ERROR] flashes twice in the front panel display, the connection of the subwoofer is not established. Perform the manual connection again. 15US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\040PRE.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 16 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Even if [IR REPEATER] is set to [ON], this function may not work depending on your TV. Also, the remote controls of other devices such as an air conditioner may not work correctly. In this case, change the installation position of the system or TV. When the TV Remote Control does not Work When the bar speaker obstructs the remote control sensor of the TV, the TV remote control may not work. In that case, enable the IR repeater function of the system. You can control the TV with the TV remote control by sending the remote signal from the rear of the bar speaker.
/
MENU ENTER 1 Press MENU. The setting menu appears in the front panel display. 2 Press / to select [SYSTEM], then press ENTER. 3 Press / to select [IR REPEATER], then press ENTER. 4 Select [ON]. Notes Be sure to check that the TV remote control cannot control the TV, and then set [IR REPEATER] to [ON]. If it is set to
[ON] when the remote control can control the TV, appropriate operation may not be obtained because of the interference between the direct command from the remote control and command via the bar speaker. 16US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 17 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Connecting to a TV or AV Device Connecting to a TV or AV Device with the HDMI Cable To connect a 4K TV or 4K devices See Connecting a 4K TV and 4K Devices (page 20). To connect a TV compatible with eARC For the connection, refer to Startup Guide (separate document). For the settings, see [EARC] (page 36). To connect to a TV other than the above, refer to Startup Guide (separate document). Connecting Sony TV with the BLUETOOTH Function Wirelessly When using Sony TV* with the BLUETOOTH function, you can listen to sound of the TV or device that is connected to the TV by connecting the system and TV wirelessly.
* The TV needs to be compatible with A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the BLUETOOTH profile. Blu-ray Disc player, cable box, satellite box, etc. Listening to TV Sound by Connecting the System and TV Wirelessly To connect the system and TV wirelessly, you need to perform pairing of the system and TV by using the BLUETOOTH function. Pairing is the process required to mutually register the information on BLUETOOTH devices to be connected wirelessly in advance. 17US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 18 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM INPUT BLUETOOTH button 1 Turn on the TV. 2 Turn on the system. 3 Press and hold the BLUETOOTH button on the bar speaker and INPUT on the remote control simultaneously for 5 seconds. The system enters the pairing mode, [PAIRING] appears in the front panel display, and the BLUETOOTH indicator flashes twice repeatedly. 18US 4 On the TV, search the system by performing the pairing operation. The list of the BLUETOOTH devices that are searched appears on the TV screen. For the operation method to pair the BLUETOOTH device to the TV, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. 5 Pair the system and TV by selecting HT-G700 from the list on the TV screen. 6 Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker lights in blue and [TV-BT] appears in the front panel display. A connection between the system and TV has been established. 7 Select the program or input of the device by using the TV remote control. The sound of the displayed image on the TV screen is output from the system. 8 Adjust the volume of the system by using the TV remote control. When pressing the muting button on the TV remote control, the sound is muted temporarily. Notes If the TV sound is not output from the system, select the TV input by pressing INPUT and check the status of the front panel display and indicators on the bar speaker.
[TV-BT] appears in the front panel display: The system and TV are connected and TV sound is output from the system. The BLUETOOTH indicator flashes twice repeatedly and [PAIRING] appears in the front panel display: Perform pairing on the TV.
[TV] appears in the front panel display:
Perform steps from the start. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 19 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM When you connect the system and TV with the HDMI cable (supplied), the BLUETOOTH connection is canceled. To connect the system and TV with the BLUETOOTH function again, disconnect the HDMI cable, then perform the connecting operation from the start. While the system is connecting the TV with the BLUETOOTH function and [AUTO SOUND] is selected for the sound mode,
[STANDARD] is selected for the sound mode. Listening to Sound of the Paired TV You can turn the system on/off, adjust the volume, and mute the sound by using the TV remote control when connecting the TV to the system wirelessly. 1 Turn on the TV with the TV remote control. The system is turned on by interlocking with the TV power, and TV sound is output from the system. 2 Select the program or input of the device by using the TV remote control. The sound of the displayed image on the TV screen is output from the system. 3 Adjust the volume of the system by using the TV remote control. When pressing the muting button on the TV remote control, the sound is muted temporarily. Note If you select the input other than TV on the remote control supplied with the system, the TV sound is not output from the system. To output the TV sound, select the TV input by pressing INPUT. Tip When the TV is turned off, the system is also turned off by interlocking with the TV power. 19US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 20 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Connecting a 4K TV and 4K Devices All HDMI jacks on the system support 4K video format, HDCP2.2, and HDCP2.3
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 2.2 and 2.3). To watch 4K video content, connect the 4K TV and 4K devices to the system via an HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-compatible HDMI jack on each device. You can only view 4K video content through the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-compatible HDMI jack connection. HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI jack TV HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI jack Blu-ray Disc player, cable box, satellite box, etc. 20US HDMI cable (supplied) HDMI cable (not supplied) Use an HDMI cable which supports the 4K video format that you want to watch. For details, see Supported HDMI Video Formats (page 51). Optical digital cable (not supplied) 1 Check which HDMI IN jack on your TV is compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3. Refer to the operating instructions of the TV. 2 Connect the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI IN jack on the TV and HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack on the system with the HDMI cable (supplied). If the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI IN jack on the TV supports eARC or ARC, TV connection is complete. Go to step 4. 3 If the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI IN jack on the TV does not support eARC or ARC, connect the optical digital output jack on the TV and the TV IN (OPT) jack on the system with an optical digital cable (not supplied). When connecting the TV and system with the HDMI cable
(supplied) only, the TV sound is not output from the system. Connect an optical digital cable (not supplied). TV connection is complete. 4 Connect the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI OUT jack of the 4K device and HDMI IN jack of the system with an HDMI cable (not supplied). Refer to the operating instructions of the 4K device to check that the HDMI OUT jack of the 4K device is compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3. 4K device connection is complete. 5 Turn on the TV. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 21 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM If the picture is not displayed while
[FORMAT] is set to [ENHANCED], set it to
[STANDARD]. 6 Turn on the system. Tip 4K content can be watched by a device compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3 even though devices with different versions (ex. TV compatible with HDCP2.2 and 4K device compatible with HDCP2.3) are connected. Setting the HDMI Signal Format to Watch 4K Video Content To watch 4K video content, select the appropriate setting for the connected 4K TV and 4K device. 1 Press MENU. The setting menu appears in the front panel display. 2 Press / to select [HDMI], then press ENTER. 3 Press / to select [FORMAT], then press ENTER. 4 Press / repeatedly to select the setting you want.
[ENHANCED]: Select when both the connected TV and devices support high bandwidth video formats such as 4K 60p 4:4:4, etc.
[STANDARD]: Select when the connected TV and devices support standard bandwidth video formats. For the relation of this setting, supported video format signals, and HDMI cables to be used, see Supported HDMI Video Formats
(page 51). Notes Depending on the TV, the TV setting for HDMI output may be required. Refer to the operating instructions of the TV. 21US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 22 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Listening to Music/Sound Listening to a TV and Other Devices INPUT BT input BLUETOOTH device that supports A2DP For details, see Listening to Music/
Sound with the BLUETOOTH Function
(page 24). 2 Adjust the volume (page 23). Tip You can also select the input by pressing on the bar speaker. 1 Press INPUT repeatedly. Each time you press INPUT, the selected input appears in the front panel display cyclically as follows.
[TV] [HDMI] [BT]
TV input TV that is connected to the TV IN (OPT) jack on the system TV compatible with the eARC or ARC function that is connected to the HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack on the system When you connect the TV to both the HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) and TV IN
(OPT) jacks, the input of the HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) jack has priority if the TV audio signal is input with the ARC or eARC function. HDMI input Device that is connected to the HDMI IN jack on the bar speaker 22US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 23 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Adjusting the Volume Enjoying Multiplex Broadcast Sound (AUDIO) You can enjoy multiplex broadcast sound when the system receives a Dolby Digital multiplex broadcast signal.
+/
SW +/
AUDIO To adjust the system volume Press +/. The volume level appears in the front panel display. To adjust the subwoofer volume Press SW (subwoofer volume) +/. The volume level appears in the front panel display. The subwoofer is designed for playback of bass or low frequency sound. Notes When the input source does not contain much bass sound, such as in TV programs, the bass sound from the subwoofer may be difficult to hear. SW +/ does not work when the subwoofer is not connected. 1 Press AUDIO. The audio signal appears in the front panel display. 2 Press the button repeatedly to select the desired audio signal. Audio signal
[MAIN]
[SUB]
[M/S]
Explanation Sound of the main language will be output. Sound of the sub language will be output. Mixed sound of both the main and sub languages will be output. Notes To receive a Dolby Digital signal, you need to connect the TV that is compatible with eARC or ARC (page 32) to the HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack with the HDMI cable (supplied), or other devices to the 23US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 24 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM HDMI IN jack with an HDMI cable (not supplied). If your TVs HDMI IN jack is not compatible with eARC or ARC (page 32), connect the TV to the TV IN (OPT) jack with an optical digital cable (not supplied) to receive a Dolby Digital signal. 24US Listening to Music/
Sound with the BLUETOOTH Function You can listen to music stored on a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet via a wireless connection by connecting the system and mobile device with the BLUETOOTH function. When connecting to the mobile device with the BLUETOOTH function, you can operate by simply using the supplied remote control without turning the TV on. Listening to Music by Pairing the Mobile Device that is Connected for the First Time To use the BLUETOOTH function, you need to perform pairing of the system and mobile device in advance. BLUETOOTH button 1 Press and hold the BLUETOOTH button on the bar speaker for 2 seconds. The system enters the pairing mode, [PAIRING] appears in the front panel display, and the BLUETOOTH indicator flashes twice repeatedly. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 25 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM 2 On the mobile device, search the system by performing the pairing operation. The list of the BLUETOOTH devices that are searched appears on the screen of the mobile device. For the operation method to pair the BLUETOOTH device to the mobile device, refer to the operating instructions of the mobile device. 3 Pair the system and mobile device by selecting HT-G700 from the list on the screen of the mobile device. If a Passkey is requested, enter 0000. 4 Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker lights in blue. A connection between the system and mobile device has been established. 5 Start audio playback with the music app on the connected mobile device. Sound is output from the system. 6 Adjust the volume (page 23). To check the connection status of the BLUETOOTH function Status During pairing standby status Connection is being attempted Connection has been established BLUETOOTH indicator Flashes twice in blue repeatedly Flashes slowly in blue repeatedly Lights in blue Note You can pair the BLUETOOTH devices up to the following number. Mobile devices: 9 Sony TV with the BLUETOOTH function:
1 If a new device is paired after pairing the above number of devices, the oldest connected device will be replaced by the new one. Tips If there is no mobile device that has been paired (ex. immediately after the purchase of the system), the system goes into pairing mode simply by changing the input to the BT input. Perform pairing for the second and subsequent mobile devices. 25US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 26 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Listening to Music from the Paired Device Tip When the connection is not established, select HT-G700 on the mobile device. INPUT 1 Turn the BLUETOOTH function of the mobile device to on. 2 Press INPUT repeatedly to select
[BT]. The system automatically reconnects to the mobile device it was most recently connected to. 3 Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker lights in blue. A connection between the system and mobile device has been established. 4 Start audio playback with the music app on the connected mobile device. Sound is output from the system. 5 Adjust the volume (page 23). To disconnect the mobile device Perform any of the following items. Disable the BLUETOOTH function on the mobile device. Set [BT] - [POWER] to [OFF] (page 37). Turn off the system or mobile device. 26US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\070SOU.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 27 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM 1 Press IMMERSIVE AE. The vertical surround setting appears in the front panel display. 2 Press the button repeatedly to select the setting. Mode
[IAE.ON]
[IAE.OFF]
Explanation Activates the vertical surround function. Deactivates the vertical surround function. Notes The surround effect from all directions differs depending on the sound source. The vertical surround setting does not appear on the TV screen while the TV input is selected. A time gap between the sound and picture may occur depending on the sound source. If your TV has a function that delays the image, use it for adjustment. Adjusting the Sound Quality Enjoying Immersive Surround Experience
(IMMERSIVE AE) You can feel immersed by the sound from not only the horizontal direction, but also from the upward direction by using Vertical Surround Engine*
effectively for sound modes (page 28). This function also works for the 2.0 channel signal such as a TV program.
* Vertical Surround Engine is a highly precise digital sound field processing technology developed by Sony that produces the sound field in the height direction virtually in addition to a sound field in the horizontal direction by only using front speakers and without using top speakers. You do not need to install speakers on a ceiling and you can enjoy the sound with rich presence regardless of the ceiling height. Also, this function is hardly affected by the shape of a room because it does not use the sound reflected from a wall and enables improved surround playback. IMMERSIVE AE 27US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\070SOU.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 28 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Setting the Sound Effect that is Tailored to Sound Sources (Sound Mode) You can easily enjoy pre-programmed sound effects that are tailored to different kinds of sound sources. STANDARD AUTO SOUND MUSIC CINEMA 1 Press AUTO SOUND, STANDARD, CINEMA, or MUSIC to select the sound mode. The selected sound mode appears in the front panel display. Sound mode
[AUTO SOUND]
[STANDARD]
Explanation The appropriate sound setting is automatically selected for the sound source. The sound of a TV program can be heard clearly. 28US Sound mode
[CINEMA]
[MUSIC]
Explanation You feel immersed by the sound that travels behind you and surrounds your entire body. This mode is suitable for watching movies. Vividness and glossiness of the sound are expressed in detail. This mode is suitable for enjoying music in a way that moves you. Notes The sound mode function is disabled when the [AUDIO] - [EFFECT] setting is set to a setting other than [SOUND MODE ON]
(page 35). The sound mode does not appear on the TV screen while the TV input is selected. A time gap between the sound and picture may occur depending on the sound source. If your TV has a function that delays the image, use it for adjustment. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\070SOU.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 29 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Making Dialogs Clearer
(VOICE) Enjoying Clear Sound with Low Volume at Midnight (NIGHT) VOICE 1 Press VOICE. The voice mode appears in the front panel display. 2 Press the button repeatedly to select the voice mode. Mode
[Vo.ON]
[Vo.OFF]
Explanation Dialog is easily heard by enhancing dialog range. Standard NIGHT 1 Press NIGHT. The night mode appears in the front panel display. 2 Press the button repeatedly to select the night mode. Mode
[N.ON]
[N.OFF]
Explanation Outputs the sound at low volume with minimum loss of fidelity and clarity of dialog. Standard Note When you turn the system off, this setting is set to [N.OFF] automatically. 29US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\070SOU.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 30 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Checking the Current Sound Settings You can check the current settings of the sound mode, IMMERSIVE AE, voice mode, night mode, and current stream information. DISPLAY
/
1 Press DISPLAY. The current setting appears in the front panel display. 2 Press repeatedly to select the item you want. The current setting appears in the following order. Sound mode IMMERSIVE AE Voice mode Night mode Stream information The current setting appears in the reverse order by pressing . 30US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\080HDM.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 31 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Using the Control for HDMI Function Using the Control for HDMI Function Tip If you enable the Control for HDMI
(BRAVIA sync) function when using a TV manufactured by Sony, the Control for HDMI function of the system is also enabled automatically. When the Control for HDMI settings are changed to on, [DONE] appears in the front panel display. Connecting a device such as a TV or Blu-
ray Disc player compatible with the Control for HDMI function* using an HDMI cable enables you to easily operate the device by a TV remote control. The following functions can be used with the Control for HDMI function. System Power Off Function When you turn off the TV, the system will turn off automatically. Note The connected device may not turn off depending on the status of the device. System Power Off function System Audio Control function eARC/ARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel/Audio Return Channel) One-Touch Play function HDMI Standby Through power saving setting Note These functions may work with devices other than those manufactured by Sony, but operation is not guaranteed.
* Control for HDMI is a standard used by CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) for allowing HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) devices to control each other. Preparing to Use the Control for HDMI Function Set [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] is set to [ON] (page 36). The default setting is
[ON]. Enable the Control for HDMI function settings for the TV and other device connected to the system. System Audio Control Function If you turn on the system while you are watching the TV, the TV sound will be output from the speakers of the system. The volume of the system can be adjusted using the TV remote control. When you turn on the TV, the system is turned on automatically and the TV sound is output from the speakers of the system. Operations can also be made by the TVs menu. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Notes The number for the systems volume level is displayed on the TV screen depending on the TV. The volume number displayed on the TV may differ from the number on the front panel display of the system. Depending on the settings of the TV, the System Audio Control function may not be available. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Depending on the TV, if the TV sound was output from the speakers of the TV the previous time you watched the TV, the system may not turn on by interlocking 31US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\080HDM.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 32 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM with the TV power even if the TV is turned on. eARC/ARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel/Audio Return Channel) If the system is connected to a TVs HDMI IN jack compatible with eARC or ARC, you can listen to TV sound from the speakers of the system without connecting an optical digital cable. On the system, set [HDMI] - [EARC] to
[ON] (page 36). The default setting is
[ON]. Notes Enable the eARC or ARC function of the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. If the TV is not compatible with eARC or ARC, an optical digital cable (not supplied) needs to be connected (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). One-Touch Play Function When you play content on a device (Blu-
ray Disc player, PlayStation4, etc.) connected to the system, the system and TV are turned on automatically, the input of the system is switched to the HDMI input, and sound is output from the speakers of the system. Notes If [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] is set to
[ON] or [AUTO] and the TV sound was output from the speakers of the TV the previous time you watched the TV, the system may not turn on and the sound and picture may be output from the TV even if device content is played (page 36). Depending on the TV, the beginning part of content being played may not play correctly. 32US HDMI Standby Through Power Saving Setting HDMI Standby Through is a function that allows you to enjoy the sound and picture of a connected device without turning on the system. You can reduce system standby power consumption by setting [HDMI] -
[STANDBY THROUGH] to [AUTO]
(page 36). The default setting is [AUTO]. Note If the picture of a device connected to the system is not displayed on the TV, set
[HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] to [ON]. If you connect a TV other than those manufactured by Sony, we recommend you to select this setting. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\080HDM.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 33 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Using the BRAVIA Sync Function In addition to the Control for HDMI function, you can also use the BRAVIA sync function such as the Sound mode/
Scene Select function. Note This function is proprietary functions of Sony. This function cannot operate with products other than those manufactured by Sony. Sound mode/Scene Select Function The sound mode of the system is automatically switched according to the setting of the TVs Scene Select function or sound mode. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Set the sound mode to [AUTO SOUND]
(page 28). 33US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 34 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Changing the Settings Using the Setting Menu You can set the following items with the setting menu. Your settings are retained even if you disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead). 1 Press MENU to turn on the setting menu in the front panel display. 2 Press / repeatedly to select the item, then press ENTER. You can select the following items.
[SPEAKER] (Speaker settings) (page 34)
[AUDIO] (Audio settings) (page 35)
[HDMI] (HDMI settings) (page 36)
[BT] (BLUETOOTH settings) (page 37)
[SYSTEM] (System settings) (page 37)
[RESET] (Resetting the system) (page 37)
[UPDATE] (Updating the system) (page 38) 3 Press / repeatedly to select the setting, then press ENTER. To return to the upper layer, press BACK. 4 Press MENU to turn off the setting menu. Setting menu items Items
[SPEAKER]
(Speaker settings)
[LINK]
(Link mode)
[SUBWOOFER INFO]
(Subwoofer version information) 34US Function
[START]: Performs the manual connection of the subwoofer to the system. For details, see Connecting the Subwoofer (page 15).
[CANCEL]: Cancel the manual connection of the subwoofer. Shows the version information of the subwoofer.
[LATEST]: The subwoofer is the latest version.
[PLEASE UPDATE]: The subwoofer is not the latest version.
[NOT CONNECTED]: The subwoofer is not connected to the system. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 35 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Items
[AUDIO]
(Audio settings)
[DRC]
(Audio DRC)
[SYNC]
(A/V Sync)
[DIALOG]
(DTS Dialog Control)
[EFFECT]
(Sound Effect) Function You can compress the dynamic range of the sound track.
[AUTO]: Automatically compresses sound encoded in Dolby TrueHD.
[ON]: Reproduces the dolby and DTS sound track with the kind of dynamic range that the recording engineer intended.
[OFF]: No compression of dynamic range. When the sound does not match the pictures on the TV screen, you can adjust the delay between the picture and sound. You can adjust from 0 msec to 120 msec in 40 msec increments. The default setting is [0ms]. By adjusting the dialog volume, you can easily listen to dialog since it stands out from the ambient noise. This function works while playing content that is compatible with the DTS:X dialog control function. You can adjust from 0 dB to 6 dB in 1 dB increments. The default setting is [0dB]. You can select sound effects such as the sound mode.
[SOUND MODE ON]: Vertical Surround Engine enhances the surround and height speaker channels to create an immersive and enveloping virtual surround effect such as sound mode (page 28) and vertical surround (page 27).
[DOLBY SPEAKER VIRTUALIZER]: Dolby Speaker Virtualizer enhances the surround and height speaker channels to create an immersive and enveloping virtual surround effect when you play Dolby format. Disables sound effects other than Dolby format.
[DTS VITRUAL:X]: DTS Virtual:X is enabled. DTS Virtual:X Technology in the system puts you in the middle of multi speaker.
[OFF]: Disables the sound effects. Select this when you do not want to set the upper limit of sampling frequency. 35US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 36 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Items
[HDMI]
(HDMI settings)
[CONTROL FOR HDMI]
[STANDBY THROUGH]
[TV AUDIO]
[EARC]
[FORMAT]
(HDMI Signal Format) Function
[ON]: The Control for HDMI function is enabled. Devices connected with an HDMI cable can control each other.
[OFF]: Off This function is available when you set [CONTROL FOR HDMI]
to [ON].
[AUTO]: Signals are output from the systems HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) jack when the TV is turned on while the system is not turned on. The system standby power consumption can be reduced more than when set to [ON]
by turning off the connected TV.
[ON]: Signals are always output from the systems HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack when the system is not turned on. If you connect a TV other than those manufactured by Sony, we recommend that you select this setting.
[OFF]: Signals are not output from the systems HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) jack when the system is not turned on. Turn on the system to enjoy on the TV content of a device connected to the system. The system standby power consumption can be reduced more than when set to [ON]. You can set the playback sound that is input from whether an HDMI cable or optical digital cable.
[AUTO]: Plays the sound by selecting the cable for the TV input automatically depending on which audio signal is input first when you connect both an HDMI cable and optical digital cable. When you connect either HDMI cable or optical digital cable, the system plays by selecting the connected cable for the TV input.
[OPTICAL]: Plays the sound from the TV IN (OPT) jack for the TV input. You can transfer the signals of the object audio content, such as Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD and DTS:X, or multi-
channel LPCM content using an HDMI cable by connecting the system and TV compatible with eARC.
[ON]: Enables the eARC function. Use this setting when the system is connected to a TV compatible with eARC.
[OFF]: Use this setting when the system is not connected to a TV compatible with eARC. Note When [EARC] is set to [ON], make sure of the eARC setting of the connected TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. You can select the HDMI signal format for the input signal. For details, see Setting the HDMI Signal Format to Watch 4K Video Content (page 21). 36US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 37 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Items
[BT]
(BLUETOOTH settings)
[POWER]
(BLUETOOTH Power)
[STANDBY]
[AAC CODEC]
[SYSTEM]
(System settings)
[IR REPEATER]
[AUTO STANDBY]
[VERSION]
(Version information)
[ALL RESET]
[RESET]
(Resetting the system) Function You can turn the BLUETOOTH function on or off.
[ON]: Turns the BLUETOOTH function on.
[OFF]: Turns the BLUETOOTH function off. Note When the BLUETOOTH function is set to off, the BLUETOOTH input is skipped while selecting input by pressing INPUT. When the system has pairing information, you can turn the system on and listen to music from a BLUETOOTH device, even when the system is in standby mode, by setting the BLUETOOTH standby mode to on.
[ON]: BLUETOOTH standby mode is enabled.
[OFF]: BLUETOOTH standby mode is disabled. Note While the BLUETOOTH standby mode is on, standby power consumption increases. You can enjoy high-quality sound if AAC is enabled and your device supports AAC.
[ON]: Enables AAC codec.
[OFF]: Disables AAC codec.
[ON]: Remote signals for the TV are sent from the rear of the bar speaker.
[OFF]: Turns off the function. For details, see When the TV Remote Control does not Work (page 16).
[ON]: Turns on the auto standby function. When you do not operate the system for about 20 minutes, the system enters standby mode automatically.
[OFF]: Off. The current firmware version information of the system appears in the front panel display. You can reset the system settings to the factory default. For details, see Resetting the system (page 47). 37US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 38 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Items
[UPDATE]
(Updating the system)
[START]
[CANCEL]
Function Select this to start the software update after connecting the USB memory on which the software update file is stored to the system. For information about the software update, visit the following website:
https://www.sony.com/am/support Notes Before updating, make sure that the subwoofer is turned on and connected to the system. You can update the software of the system by pressing and holding and the BLUETOOTH button on the bar speaker for 7 seconds. If the USB device is not recognized Try the following:
Turn the system off. Remove and reconnect the USB device. Turn the system on. Make sure that the USB device is securely connected to the UPDATE port. Check to see if the USB device or a cable is damaged. Cancels the software update. 38US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 39 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM about 10 seconds. However, in some cases, the front panel display may not turn off. In this case, the brightness of the front panel display is same as [DARK]. Changing the Brightness of the Front Panel Display and Indicators
(DIMMER) You can change the brightness of the followings. Front panel display BLUETOOTH indicator Power indicator on the subwoofer. DIMMER 1 Press DIMMER. The display mode appears in the front panel display. 2 Press the button repeatedly to select the desired display mode. Mode
[BRIGHT]
[DARK]
[OFF]
Explanation The front panel display and BLUETOOTH indicator light brightly. The front panel display and BLUETOOTH indicator light darkly. The front panel display is turned off. Note The front panel display is turned off when
[OFF] is selected. It turns on automatically when you press any button, then turns off again if you do not operate the system for 39US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 40 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Saving Power in Standby Mode Check that you have made the following settings:
[SYSTEM] - [AUTO STANDBY] is set to
[OFF] (page 37). (The default setting is
[OFF].)
[BT] - [STANDBY] is set to [OFF]
(page 37). (The default setting is [ON].) 40US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 41 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If the system does not work properly, handle it in the following order. 1 Search for the cause and solution of the issue using this troubleshooting. 2 Reset the system. All the settings of the system return to their initial status. For details, see Resetting the system (page 47). Should any problems persist, consult your nearest Sony dealer. Be sure to bring your bar speaker and subwoofer, even if it seems as though only one has a problem, when you request to repair. Power The system does not power up. Check that the AC power cord (mains lead) is connected securely. Disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains), and then reconnect after several minutes. The system is turned off automatically. The auto standby function is working. Set [SYSTEM] - [AUTO STANDBY] to
[OFF] (page 37). The system does not turn on even when the TV is turned on. Set [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] to
[ON] (page 36). The TV must support the Control for HDMI function. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Check the speaker settings of the TV. The system power syncs with the speaker settings of the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Depending on the TV, if the sound was output from the speakers of the TV the previous time, the system may not turn on by interlocking with the TV power even when the TV is turned on. The system turns off when the TV is turned off. Check the setting of [HDMI] -
[CONTROL FOR HDMI] (page 36). When the Control for HDMI function is set to on and the input of the system is the TV or HDMI input, the system turns off automatically when you turn off the TV. The system does not turn off even when the TV is turned off. Check the setting of [HDMI] -
[CONTROL FOR HDMI] (page 36). To turn the system off automatically by interlocking with the TV power, set the Control for HDMI function to on. This function works only if the input of the system is the TV or HDMI input. The system does not turn off automatically while selecting the BLUETOOTH input. The TV must support the Control for HDMI function. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. The system cannot be turned off. The system may be in demo mode. To cancel demo mode, reset the system. Press and hold (power) and
(volume) on the bar speaker for more than 5 seconds (page 47). Picture There is no picture or the picture is not output correctly. Select the appropriate input
(page 22). When there is no picture while the TV input is selected, select the TV 41US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 42 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM channel that you want using the TV remote control. When there is no picture while the HDMI input is selected, press the playback button of the connected device. Disconnect the HDMI cable, then connect it again. Make sure that the cable is firmly inserted. When there is no picture from the connected device or the picture from the connected device is not output correctly, set [HDMI] - [FORMAT] to
[STANDARD] (page 36). Some pictures of an old type device may not displayed correctly while [HDMI] -
[FORMAT] is set to [ENHANCED]. If no picture appears while connecting the device with the HDMI cable, make sure that the device is connected to the HDMI IN jack and the TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) jack. The system is connected to an input device that is not HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection) compliant. In this case, check the specifications of the connected device. 3D content from the HDMI IN jack does not appear on the TV screen. Depending on the TV or video device, 3D content may not appear. Check the supported HDMI video format
(page 51). 4K video content from the HDMI IN jack does not appear on the TV screen. Depending on the TV or the video device, 4K video content may not appear. Check the video capability and settings of your TV and video device. The picture may not be displayed properly if [HDMI] - [FORMAT] is set to
[ENHANCED]. In this case, set it to
[STANDARD] (page 36). Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet that supports 18 42US Gbps or High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet (page 51). If the system is connected to the HDMI jack that is not compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3, [ERROR: TV DOES NOT SUPPORT HDCP2.2 or 2.3]
appears in the front panel display. Connect to the HDMI jack compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3 of the 4K TV or 4K device. An image is not displayed on the entire TV screen. The aspect ratio on the media is fixed. Picture and sound of the device that is connected to the system are not output from the TV when the system is not turned on. Set [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] to
[AUTO] or [ON] (page 36). Turn on the system, and then switch the input for the device playing. HDR contents cannot show as high-
dynamic range. Check the settings of the TV and connected device. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV and the connected device. Some devices may convert HDR contents to SDR if the bandwidth is not enough. In that case, be sure that
[HDMI] - [FORMAT] is set to
[ENHANCED] (page 36) if the TV and the connected device support a bandwidth of up to 18 Gbps. When
[ENHANCED] is set, be sure to use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet that supports 18 Gbps
(page 51). Sound The system cannot connect to a TV with the BLUETOOTH function. When you connect the system and TV with the HDMI cable (supplied), the BLUETOOTH connection is canceled. Disconnect the HDMI cable, then HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 43 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM perform the connecting operation from the start (page 17). No TV sound is output from the system. Check the type and connection of the HDMI cable or optical digital cable that is connected to the system and the TV (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). Disconnect the cables that are connected between the TV and the system, then connect them firmly again. Disconnect the AC power cords
(mains leads) of the TV and the system from the AC outlets (mains), then connect them again. When the system and TV are connected with the HDMI cable only, check the following. The HDMI jack of the connected TV is labeled with eARC or ARC. The Control for HDMI function of the TV is set to on. The eARC or ARC function of the TV is enabled.
[HDMI] - [EARC] is set to [ON]
(page 36).
[HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] is set to [ON] (page 36). If your TV is not compatible with eARC, set [HDMI] - [EARC] to [OFF]
(page 36). If your TV is not compatible with eARC or ARC, connect an optical digital cable (not supplied) (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). If the TV is not compatible with eARC or ARC, TV sound will not be output from the system even if the system is connected to the TVs HDMI IN jack. Press INPUT repeatedly to select the TV input (page 22). Increase the volume on the system or cancel muting. If sound of a cable box/satellite box connected to the TV is not output, connect the device to a HDMI IN jack of the system and switch input of the system to HDMI (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). Depending on the order in which you turn on the TV and system, the system may be muted and [MUTED]
appears in the front panel display. If this happens, turn on the TV first, then the system. Set the speakers setting of the TV
(BRAVIA) to Audio System. Refer to the operating instructions of your TV regarding how to set the TV. Picture and sound of the device that is connected to the system are not output from the TV when the system is not turned on. Set [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] to
[AUTO] or [ON] (page 36). Turn on the system, and then switch the input for the device playing. The sound is output from both the system and TV. Mute the sound of the system or TV. The output sound of the system is not the same level as that of the TV even though the values of the volume level on the system and TV are set to the same value. If the Control for HDMI function is set to on, the value of the volume level on the system may appear on your TV as the TV volume. The output sound levels of the system and TV differ even though the values of the volume level on the system and TV are set to the same value. The output sound levels of the system and TV differ depending on the sound processing characteristics of each, and it is not a malfunction. The sound is interrupted while watching a TV program or content on a Blu-ray Disc, etc. Check the sound mode setting
(page 28). If the sound mode is set to
[AUTO SOUND], the sound may be interrupted when the sound mode is changed automatically according to the information of the program that is 43US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 44 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM being played. If you do not want to change the sound mode automatically, set the sound mode to a setting other than [AUTO SOUND]. The TV sound from the system lags behind the image. Set [AUDIO] - [SYNC] to [0ms] if it is set to the range between 40 msec and 120 msec (page 35). A time gap between the sound and picture may occur depending on the sound source. If your TV has a function that delays the image, use it for adjustment. No sound or only a very low-level sound of the device connected to the system is heard. Press + on the remote control and check the volume level (page 11). Press or + on the remote control to cancel the muting function
(page 11). Make sure the input source is selected correctly. You should try other input sources by pressing INPUT repeatedly (page 22). Check that all the cables and cords of the system and connected device are firmly inserted. When you play content compatible with copyright protection technology
(HDCP), it may not be output from the system. Set [HDMI] - [FORMAT] to
[STANDARD] (page 36). The surround effect cannot be obtained. Depending on the input signal and the sound mode setting, surround sound processing may not work effectively. The surround effect may be subtle, depending on the program or disc. To play multi-channel audio, check the digital audio output setting on the device connected to the system. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device. 44US Subwoofer No sound or only a very low-level sound is heard from the subwoofer. Press SW + on the remote control to increase the subwoofer volume
(page 11). Make sure that the power indicator on the subwoofer is lit in green. If the power indicator on the subwoofer does not light, try the following. Make sure the AC power cord
(mains lead) of the subwoofer is connected properly. Press (power) of the subwoofer to turn on the power. If the power indicator on the subwoofer flashes slowly in green, or lights in red, try the following. Move the subwoofer to a location near the bar speaker so that the power indicator on the subwoofer lights in green. Follow the steps in Connecting the Subwoofer (page 15). If the power indicator on the subwoofer flashes in red, press
(power) of the subwoofer to turn off the power and check whether the ventilation holes of the subwoofer is blocked or not. The subwoofer is designed for playback of bass or low frequency sound. If the input sources contain very little bass sound components
(i.e., a TV broadcast), the sound from the subwoofer may be difficult to hear. Play the built-in demonstration music by following the steps below and check that the sound is output from the subwoofer. Press and hold on the bar speaker for 5 seconds. The built-in demonstration music is played. Press again. The built-in demonstration music HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 45 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM is canceled and the system returns to the previous status. Set the night mode to off (page 29). Sound skips or has noise. If there is a device nearby that generates electromagnetic waves, such as a wireless LAN or a microwave oven in use, locate the system apart from it. If there is an obstacle between the bar speaker and the subwoofer, move or remove it. Do not cover the top of the bar speaker with metal objects such as TV frame, etc. Wireless functions may become unstable. Locate the bar speaker and the subwoofer as close as possible. Switch the wireless LAN frequency of any nearby wireless LAN router or PC to 5 GHz range. Switch the network connection of the TV or Blu-ray Disc player from wireless to wired. Mobile Device Connection Pairing cannot be achieved. Bring the system and the BLUETOOTH device closer together. Make sure the system is not receiving interference from a wireless LAN device, other 2.4 GHz wireless devices, or a microwave oven. If a device that generates electromagnetic radiation is nearby, move the device away from the system. BLUETOOTH connection cannot be completed. Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker is lit
(page 24). Make sure the BLUETOOTH device to be connected with is turned on and the BLUETOOTH function is enabled. Bring the system and the BLUETOOTH device closer together. Pair the system and BLUETOOTH device again. You may need to cancel the pairing with the system using your BLUETOOTH device first. Pairing information may be deleted. Perform pairing operation again
(page 24). Sound of the connected BLUETOOTH mobile device is not output from the system. Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker is lit
(page 24). Bring the system and the BLUETOOTH device closer together. If a device that generates electromagnetic radiation, such as a wireless LAN device, other BLUETOOTH devices, or a microwave oven is nearby, move the device away from the system. Remove any obstacle between the system and the BLUETOOTH device or move the system away from the obstacle. Reposition the connected BLUETOOTH device. Switch the wireless LAN frequency of any nearby wireless LAN router or PC to 5 GHz range. Increase the volume on the connected BLUETOOTH device. Remote Control The remote control of the system does not function. Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the bar speaker (page 11). Remove any obstacles in the path between the remote control and the system. Replace both batteries in the remote control with new ones, if they are weak. Make sure you are pressing the correct button on the remote control. 45US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 46 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM TV remote control does not work. This problem might be solved by setting [SYSTEM] - [IR REPEATER] to
[ON] (page 37). Others The Control for HDMI function does not work properly. Check the connection with the system (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). Enable the Control for HDMI function on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Wait a while, and then try again. If you unplug the system, it will take a while before operations can be made. Wait for 15 seconds or longer, and then try again. Make sure the devices connected to the system support the Control for HDMI function. Enable the Control for HDMI function on the devices connected to the system. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your device. The type and number of devices that can be controlled by the Control for HDMI function is restricted by the HDMI CEC standard as follows:
Recording devices (Blu-ray Disc recorder, DVD recorder, etc.): up to 3 devices Playback devices (Blu-ray Disc player, DVD player, etc.): up to 3 devices Tuner-related devices: up to 4 devices Audio system (receiver/
headphones): up to 1 device (used by the system)
[PROTECT] flashes in the front panel display and the system is turned off. Disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) and make sure nothing is 46US obstructing the ventilation holes of the system. Sensors of the TV do not work properly. The system may block some sensors
(such as the brightness sensor), the remote control receiver of your TV or the emitter for 3D glasses (infrared transmission) of a 3D TV that supports the infrared 3D glass system, or wireless communication. Move the system away from the TV within a range that allows those parts to operate properly. For the locations of the sensors and remote control receiver, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV. Wireless function (the BLUETOOTH function or subwoofer) is unstable. Do not place metal objects other than a TV around the system. Music that you are not familiar with suddenly plays. The pre-installed sample music may on the have been played. Press bar speaker to stop playback. The system does not work properly. The system may be in demo mode. To cancel demo mode, reset the system. Press and hold (power) and
(volume) on the bar speaker for more than 5 seconds (page 47). HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 47 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Resetting the system If the system still does not operate properly, reset the system as follows. 1 Press MENU. The setting menu appears in the front panel display. 2 Press / to select [RESET], then press ENTER. 3 Press / to select [ALL RESET], then press ENTER. 4 Press / to select [START], then press ENTER. All the settings return to their initial status. To cancel resetting Select [CANCEL] in step 4. If You Cannot Perform Resetting Using the Setting Menu Press and hold (power) and
(volume) on the bar speaker for more than 5 seconds. The settings return to their initial status. Note By resetting, the link with the subwoofer may be lost. In this case, perform Connecting the Subwoofer (page 15). 47US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 48 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Additional Information Specifications Bar Speaker (SA-G700) Amplifier section U.S. models:
POWER OUTPUT AND TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION:
(FTC) 35 W ====
Front L + Front R:
With 4 ohms loads, both channels driven, from 200 - 20,000 Hz; rated XX W per channel minimum RMS power, with no more than 1% total harmonic distortion from 250 mW to rated output. POWER OUTPUT (reference) Front L/Front R/Center speaker: 100 W
(per channel at 4 ohms, 1 kHz) Canadian models:
POWER OUTPUT (rated) Front L + Front R: 60 W + 60 W
(at 4 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD) POWER OUTPUT (reference) Front L/Front R/Center speaker: 100 W
(per channel at 4 ohms, 1 kHz) Inputs HDMI IN*
TV IN (OPT) Outputs HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC)*
* HDMI IN and HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jacks support HDCP2.2 and HDCP2.3 protocol. HDCP2.2 and HDCP2.3 are newly enhanced copyright protection technology that is used to protect content such as 4K movies. HDMI Section Connector Type A (19pin) 48US BLUETOOTH section Communication system BLUETOOTH Specification version 4.2 Output BLUETOOTH Specification Power Class 1 Maximum communication range Line of sight approx. 30 m1) Maximum number of devices to be registered 10 devices Frequency band 2.4 GHz band (2.4000 GHz -
2.4835 GHz) Modulation method FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum) Compatible BLUETOOTH profiles2) A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) Supported Codecs3) SBC4), AAC5) Transmission range (A2DP) 20 Hz - 20,000 Hz (Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz) 1) The actual range will vary depending on factors such as obstacles between devices, magnetic fields around a microwave oven, static electricity, cordless phone use, reception sensitivity, the operating system, software applications, etc. 2) BLUETOOTH standard profiles indicate the purpose of BLUETOOTH communication between devices. 3) Codec: Audio signal compression and conversion format 4) Abbreviation for Subband Codec 5) Abbreviation for Advanced Audio Coding Front L/Front R/Center speaker block section Speaker system 3 speaker system, Acoustic suspension Speaker 45 mm 100 mm (1 13/16 in 4 in) cone type HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 49 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM General Power requirements 120 V AC, 60 Hz Power consumption 45 W
===-
On: XX W Standby mode: 0.5 W or less (Power Saving mode)
(When [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI]
and [BT] - [STANDBY] are set to [OFF]) Standby mode: 2 W or less*
(When [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI]
and [BT] - [STANDBY] are set to [ON])
* The system will automatically enter Power saving mode when there is no HDMI connection and no BLUETOOTH pairing history. Dimensions* (approx.) (w/h/d) 980 mm 64 mm 108 mm (38 5/8 in 2 5/8 in 4 3/8 in)
* Not including projection portion Mass (approx.) 3.5 kg (7 lb 12 oz) Subwoofer (SA-WG700) POWER OUTPUT (reference) 100 W (at 4 ohms, 100 Hz) Speaker system Subwoofer speaker system, Bass reflex Speaker 160 mm (6 3/8 in.) cone type Power requirements 120 V AC, 60 Hz Power consumption 20 W
====
On: XX W Standby mode: 0.5 W or less Dimensions (approx.) (w/h/d) 192 mm 387 mm 406 mm (7 5/8 in 15 1/4 in 16 in)
* Not including projection portion Mass (approx.) XX kg (XX lb XX oz)
===============
7.5 kg (16 lb 9 oz) Wireless Transmitter/
Receiver Section Frequency band
(2.404 GHz - 2.476 GHz) 2.4 GHz (2.4000 GHz - 2.4835 GHz)
=====================
Modulation method FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum)
================================ GFSK Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. 49US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 50 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Supported Input Audio Formats Audio formats supported by this system are as follows. Format LPCM 2ch LPCM 5.1ch LPCM 7.1ch Dolby Digital Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD Dolby Atmos - Dolby Digital Plus DTS DTS-ES Discrete 6.1, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 DTS 96/24 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD LBR DTS:X
: Supported format.
: Unsupported format. Function
[HDMI]
[TV]
(eARC)
[TV]
(ARC)
[TV]
(OPT) Note The HDMI IN jack do not support audio format that contains copy protections, such as Super Audio CD or DVD-Audio. 50US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 51 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Supported HDMI Video Formats Video formats supported by this system are as follows. Resolution Frame Rate 3D Color Space Color Depth
[HDMI] - [FORMAT]
setting 4K 4096 2160p 3840 2160p 4K 4096 2160p 3840 2160p 1920 1080p 1920 1080i 1280 720p 720 480p 720 576p 640 480p 50/59.94/60 Hz 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 Hz 50/59.94/60 Hz 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 Hz 25/29.97/30/50/
59.94/60 Hz 23.98/24 Hz 50/59.94/60 Hz 50/59.94/60 Hz 23.98/24/29.97/30 Hz 59.94/60 Hz 50 Hz 59.94/60 Hz
[ENHANCED]1) RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 YCbCr 4:2:0 RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:0 RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 8 bit 8/10/12 bit 10/12 bit 10/12 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8/10/12 bit
[STANDARD]2) RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 8/10/12 bit RGB 4:4:4
: Compatible with 3D signal in Side-by-Side (Half) format
: Compatible with 3D signal in Frame packing and Over-Under (Top-and-Bottom) format 1) Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet that supports 18 Gbps. 2) Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet or Sony High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet with the Cable Type Logo. Notes on HDMI Jack and HDMI Connections Use an HDMI-authorized cable. We do not recommend using an HDMI-DVI conversion cable. Audio signals (sampling frequency, bit length, etc.) transmitted from an HDMI jack may be suppressed by the connected device. Sound may be interrupted when the sampling frequency or the number of channels of audio output signals from the playback device is switched. When the TV input is selected, video signals via the HDMI IN jack are output from the HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack. This system supports TRILUMINOS. 51US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 52 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM HDMI IN and HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jacks support bandwidth up to 18 Gbps, HDCP2.2 and HDCP2.31), BT.2020 wide color spaces2), and HDR (High Dynamic Range)3) contents pass-through. When connecting to a TV with a resolution that is different from that of the system, the system may restart to reset the picture output setting. 1) HDCP2.2 and HDCP2.3 are newly enhanced copyright protection technology that is used to protect content such as 4K movies. 2) BT.2020 color space is new wider color standard that is defined for ultra-high definition television systems. 3) HDR is an emerging video format that can display a wider range of brightness levels. The system is compatible with HDR10, HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma), and Dolby Vision. 52US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 53 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM during communication using BLUETOOTH technology. However, this security may be insufficient depending on the setting content and other factors, so always be careful when performing communication using BLUETOOTH technology. Sony cannot be held liable in any way for damages or other loss resulting from information leaks during communication using BLUETOOTH technology. BLUETOOTH communication is not necessarily guaranteed with all BLUETOOTH devices that have the same profile as this system. BLUETOOTH devices connected with this system must comply with the BLUETOOTH specification prescribed by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and must be certified to comply. However, even when a device complies with the BLUETOOTH specification, there may be cases where the characteristics or specifications of the BLUETOOTH device make it impossible to connect, or may result in different control methods, display or operation. Noise may occur or the audio may cut off depending on the BLUETOOTH device connected with this system, the communications environment, or surrounding conditions. If you have any questions or problems concerning your system, please consult your nearest Sony dealer. On BLUETOOTH Communication BLUETOOTH devices should be used within approximately 10 meters (33 feet)
(unobstructed distance) of each other. The effective communication range may become shorter under the following conditions. When a person, metal object, wall or other obstruction is between the devices with a BLUETOOTH connection Locations where a wireless LAN is installed Around microwave ovens that are in use Locations where other electromagnetic waves occur BLUETOOTH devices and wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11 b/g/n) use the same frequency band (2.4 GHz). When using your BLUETOOTH device near a device with wireless LAN capability, electromagnetic interference may occur. This could result in lower data transfer rates, noise, or inability to connect. If this happens, try the following remedies:
Use this system at least 10 meters
(33 feet) away from the wireless LAN device. Turn off the power to the wireless LAN device when using your BLUETOOTH device within 10 meters (33 feet). Install this system and BLUETOOTH device as closer to each other as possible. The radio waves broadcast by this system may interfere with the operation of some medical devices. Since this interference may result in malfunction, always turn off the power on this system and BLUETOOTH device in the following locations:
In hospitals, on trains, in airplanes, at gas stations, and any place where flammable gasses may be present Near automatic doors or fire alarms This system supports security functions that comply with the BLUETOOTH specification to ensure secure connection 53US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 54 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT:
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE, PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE THE SOFTWARE. This EULA is a legal agreement between you and Sony Electronics Inc. (SONY). This EULA governs your rights and obligations regarding the SONY software of SONY and/or its third party licensors (including SONYs affiliates) and their respective affiliates
(collectively, the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS), together with any updates/upgrades provided by SONY, any printed, on-line or other electronic documentation for such software, and any data files created by operation of such software (collectively, the SOFTWARE). Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in the SOFTWARE having a separate end user license agreement
(including, but not limited to, GNU General Public license and Lesser/
Library General Public License) shall be covered by such applicable separate end user license agreement in lieu of the terms of this EULA to the extent required by such separate end user license agreement (EXCLUDED SOFTWARE). SOFTWARE LICENSE The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The SOFTWARE is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and international treaties. 54US COPYRIGHT All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE (including, but not limited to, any images, photographs, animation, video, audio, music, text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE) is owned by SONY or one or more of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS. GRANT OF LICENSE SONY grants you a limited license to use the SOFTWARE solely in connection with your compatible device (DEVICE) and only for your individual, non-
commercial use. SONY and the THIRD-
PARTY SUPPLIERS expressly reserve all rights, title and interest (including, but not limited to, all intellectual property rights) in and to the SOFTWARE that this EULA does not specifically grant to you. REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, attempt to derive source code, modify, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble any of the SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in part, or create any derivative works from or of the SOFTWARE unless such derivative works are intentionally facilitated by the SOFTWARE. You may not modify or tamper with any digital rights management functionality of the SOFTWARE. You may not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent any of the functions or protections of the SOFTWARE or any mechanisms operatively linked to the SOFTWARE. You may not separate any individual component of the SOFTWARE for use on more than one DEVICE unless expressly authorized to do so by SONY. You may not remove, alter, cover or deface any trademarks or notices on the SOFTWARE. You may not share, distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign, transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 55 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM The software, network services or other products other than SOFTWARE upon which the SOFTWARES performance depends might be interrupted or discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers (software suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY). SONY and such suppliers do not warrant that the SOFTWARE, network services, contents or other products will continue to be available, or will operate without interruption or modification. USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used by you to view, store, process and/or use content created by you and/or third parties. Such content may be protected by copyright, other intellectual property laws, and/or agreements. You agree to use the SOFTWARE only in compliance with all such laws and agreements that apply to such content. You acknowledge and agree that SONY may take appropriate measures to protect the copyright of content stored, processed or used by the SOFTWARE. Such measures include, but are not limited to, counting the frequency of your backup and restoration through certain SOFTWARE features, refusal to accept your request to enable restoration of data, and termination of this EULA in the event of your illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE. CONTENT SERVICE PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY BE DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE THROUGH ONE OR MORE CONTENT SERVICES (CONTENT SERVICE). USE OF THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS OF SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU DECLINE TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS, YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that certain content and services available through the SOFTWARE may be provided by third parties over which SONY has no control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME. INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY SERVICES You acknowledge and agree that access to certain SOFTWARE features may require an Internet connection for which you are solely responsible. Further, you are solely responsible for payment of any third party fees associated with your Internet connection, including but not limited to Internet service provider or airtime charges. Operation of the SOFTWARE may be limited or restricted depending on the capabilities, bandwidth or technical limitations of your Internet connection and service. The provision, quality and security of such Internet connectivity are the sole responsibility of the third party providing such service. EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS You agree to comply with all applicable export and re-export restrictions and regulations of the area or country in which you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize the transfer, of the SOFTWARE to a prohibited country or otherwise in violation of any such restrictions or regulations. HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic 55US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 56 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the SOFTWARE could lead to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES). SONY, each of the THIRD-
PARTY SUPPLIERS, and each of their respective affiliates specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty, duty or condition of fitness for HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES. EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk and that you are responsible for use of the SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided AS IS, without warranty, duty or condition of any kind. SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as SONY) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY CONDITIONS OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL BE UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY DEFECTS WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES (INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARES PERFORMANCE DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE AVAILABLE, UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND 56US
(E) REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR CONDITION OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as SONY) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USERS TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, EACH AND ALL OF THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 57 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-
PARTY SUPPLIERS may automatically update or otherwise modify the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, for purposes of enhancement of security functions, error correction and improvement of functions, at such time as you interact with SONYs or third parties servers, or otherwise. Such updates or modifications may delete or change the nature of features or other aspects of the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, functions you may rely upon. You acknowledge and agree that such activities may occur at SONYs sole discretion and that SONY may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE upon your complete installation or acceptance of such update or modifications. Any updates/
modifications shall be deemed to be, and shall constitute part of, the SOFTWARE for purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of this EULA, you consent to such update/modification. ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY This EULA and SONYs privacy policy, each as amended and modified from time to time, together constitute the entire agreement between you and SONY with respect to the SOFTWARE. The failure of SONY to exercise or enforce any right or provision of this EULA shall not constitute a waiver of such right or provision. If any part of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to maintain the intent of this EULA, and the other parts will remain in full force and effect. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this EULA. This EULA shall be governed by the laws of Japan, without regards to conflict of laws provisions. Any dispute arising out of this EULA shall be subject to the exclusive venue of the Tokyo District Court in Japan, and the parties hereby consent to the venue and jurisdiction of such courts. EQUITABLE REMEDIES Notwithstanding anything contained in this EULA to the contrary, you acknowledge and agree that any violation of or non-compliance with this EULA by you will cause irreparable harm to SONY, for which monetary damages would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY obtaining any injunctive or equitable relief that SONY deems necessary or appropriate in such circumstances. SONY may also take any legal and technical remedies to prevent violation of and/or to enforce this EULA, including, but not limited to, immediate termination of your use of the SOFTWARE, if SONY believes in its sole discretion that you are violating or intend to violate this EULA. These remedies are in addition to any other remedies SONY may have at law, in equity or under contract. TERMINATION Without prejudice to any of its other rights, SONY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with any of its terms. In case of such termination, you must cease all use, and destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE. AMENDMENT SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND ANY OF THE TERMS OF THIS EULA AT ITS 57US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 58 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY EMAIL NOTIFICATION TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS PROVIDED BY YOU, BY PROVIDING NOTICE AS PART OF THE PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN UPGRADES/UPDATES OR BY ANY OTHER LEGALLY RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF NOTICE. If you do not agree to the amendment, you should promptly contact SONY for instructions. Your continued use of the SOFTWARE after the effective date of any such notice shall be deemed your agreement to be bound by such amendment. THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express intended third-party beneficiary of, and shall have the right to enforce, each provision of this EULA with respect to the SOFTWARE of such party. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, you may contact SONY by writing to SONY at applicable contact address of each area or country. Copyright 2018 Sony Electronics Inc. All rights reserved. 58US Precautions On safety Should any solid object or liquid fall into the system, unplug the system and have it checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further. Do not climb on the bar speaker and subwoofer, as you may fall down and injure yourself, or system damage may result. On power sources Before operating the system, check that the operating voltage is identical to your local power supply. The operating voltage is indicated on the nameplate at the bottom of the bar speaker. If you are not going to use the system for a long time, be sure to disconnect the system from the wall outlet (mains). To disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead), grasp the plug itself; never pull the cord. One blade of the plug is wider than the other for the purpose of safety and will fit into the wall outlet (mains) only one way. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, contact your dealer. AC power cord (mains lead) must be changed only at a qualified service shop. On heat buildup Although the system heats up during operation, this is not a malfunction. If you continuously use this system at high volume, the system temperature at the rear and bottom rises considerably. To avoid burning yourself, do not touch the system. On placement Do not place the system near heat sources or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust, or mechanical shock. Do not place anything at the rear of the bar speaker and subwoofer that might HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 59 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM On cleaning Clean the system with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine. If you have any question or problem concerning your system, please consult your nearest Sony dealer. block the ventilation holes and cause malfunctions. Do not place metal objects other than a TV around the system. Wireless functions may be unstable. If the system is being used in combination with a TV, VCR, or tape deck, noise may result and picture quality may suffer. In such a case, place the system away from the TV, VCR, or tape deck. Use caution when placing the system on a surface that has been specially treated
(with wax, oil, polish, etc.), as staining or discoloration of the surface may result. Take care to avoid any possible injury from the corners of the bar speaker and subwoofer. Keep 3 cm or more space under the bar speaker when you hang it on a wall. The speakers of this system are not of magnetically shielded type. Do not place magnetic cards on the system or near it. On handling the subwoofer Do not place your hand into the slit of the subwoofer when lifting it. The speaker driver may be damaged. When lifting it, hold the bottom of the subwoofer. On operation Before connecting other devices, be sure to turn off and unplug the system. If you encounter color irregularity on a nearby TV screen Color irregularities may be observed on certain types of TV sets. If color irregularity is observed... Turn off the TV set, then turn it on again after 15 to 30 minutes. If color irregularity is observed again... Place the system further away from the TV set. 59US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 110OTH.fm Page 60 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 3:58 PM Copyrights and Trademarks prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary. This product contains software that is subject to the GNU General Public License
(GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). These establish that customers have the right to acquire, modify, and redistribute the source code of said software in accordance with the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. Please note that Sony cannot answer or respond to any inquiries regarding the content of this source code. TRILUMINOS and TRILUMINOS logo are a registered trademark of Sony Corporation. All other trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners. This system incorporates Dolby* Digital and the DTS** Digital Surround System.
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
**For DTS patents, see https://
patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together, DTS:X, Virtual:X, the DTS:X logo, and the DTS Virtual:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The BLUETOOTH word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Sony Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. BRAVIA logo is a trademark of Sony Corporation. PlayStation is a registered trademark or trademark of Sony Interactive Entertainment Inc. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology and patents licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is 60US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\ANKI\UC2\01US-HTZ9FUC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 61 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 1:58 PM Index A ARC (Audio Return Channel) 9, 32 AUTO STANDBY 37 B BT.2020 52 C Control for HDMI 31 D DIMMER 39 E eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) 9, 32, 36 H HDCP2.2 and HDCP2.3 52 HDR 52 I IMMERSIVE AE 27 M Multiplex broadcast sound 23 N NIGHT 29 P PROTECT 46 R Remote control 11 Resetting 47 S Setting menu 34 Sound Mode 28 Standby Through 32 Subwoofer 15, 23, 44 V VOICE 29 61US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\FY20_SB1_conditional\00COV-
HTZ9FUC2\170BCO.fm 170BCO.fm Page 36 Wednesday, September 18, 2019 11:27 AM masterpage: Left Support pages Find information on software updates:
Pages dassistance Trouvez des informations sur les mises jour de logiciel :
Pginas de soporte Encuentre informacin sobre las actualizaciones de software:
http://www.sony.com/soundbarsupport Smartphone app Support by Sony app - Find information and get notication about your product:
Appli de tlphone intelligent Appli Support by Sony- Trouvez des informations et obtenez des notifications au sujet de votre produit:
Aplicacin para smartphone Aplicacin Support by Sony -
Encuentre informacin y reciba notificaciones de su producto:
News & Alerts / Nouvelles & Alertes / Noticias y alertas Software updates / Mises jour de logiciel / Actualizaciones de software Tutorials / Tutoriels / Tutoriales Tips & Tricks / Trucs & Conseils / Sugerencias y trucos https://sony.net/SBS 2020 Sony Corporation Printed in China 5-013-058-11(1) HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1)
1 | HT-G700 Manual new 20191118 Part01 | Users Manual | 4.67 MiB |
Support pages Find information on software updates:
Pages dassistance Trouvez des informations sur les mises jour de logiciel :
Pginas de soporte Encuentre informacin sobre las actualizaciones de software:
https://www.sony.com/electronics/support Smartphone app Support by Sony app - Find information and get notication about your product:
Appli de tlphone intelligent Appli Support by Sony- Trouvez des informations et obtenez des notifications au sujet de votre produit:
Aplicacin para smartphone Aplicacin Support by Sony -
Encuentre informacin y reciba notificaciones de su producto:
News & Alerts / Nouvelles & Alertes / Noticias y alertas Software updates / Mises jour de logiciel / Actualizaciones de software Tutorials / Tutoriels / Tutoriales Tips & Tricks / Trucs & Conseils / Sugerencias y trucos https://sony.net/SBS Sound Bar S o u n d B a r Operating Instructions US Manuel dinstructions FR Manual de instrucciones ES 2020 Sony Corporation Printed in China 5-013-058-11(1) HT-G700 HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) Owners Record The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom of the bar speaker. Record the serial numbers in the space provided below. Refer to them whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding the Sound Bar. Model No. HT-G700 Serial No. WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this system to rain or moisture. The system is not disconnected from the mains as long as it is connected to the AC outlet, even if the system itself has been turned off. To reduce the risk of fire, do not cover the ventilation opening of the system with newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, etc. Do not expose the system to naked flame sources (for example, lighted candles). To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this system to dripping or splashing, and do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the system. As the main plug is used to disconnect the system from the mains, connect the system to an easily accessible AC outlet. Should you notice an abnormality in the system, disconnect the main plug from the AC outlet immediately. Do not install the system in a confined space, such as a bookcase or built-in cabinet. 2US CAUTION Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not expose batteries or appliances with battery-installed to excessive heat, such as sunshine and fire. Do not place this product close to medical devices. This product (including accessories) has magnet(s) which may interfere with pacemakers, programmable shunt valves for hydrocephalus treatment, or other medical devices. Do not place this product close to persons who use such medical devices. Consult your doctor before using this product if you use any such medical device. Indoor use only. For the bar speaker The nameplate is located on the bottom of the bar speaker. For the customers in the U.S.A. NOTE:
This system has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This system generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this system does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the system off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\020REG.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 3 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the system and receiver. Connect the system into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connection to host computers and/or peripherals in order to meet FCC emission limits. If you have any questions about this Sound Bar:
Visit: www.sony.com/support Contact: Sony Customer Information Service Center at 1-800-222-SONY
(7669) Write: Sony Customer Information Service Center 12451 Gateway Blvd., Fort Myers, FL 33913 Suppliers Declaration of Conformity Trade Name: SONY Model No.: HT-G700 Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc. Address: 16535 Via Esprillo, San Diego, CA 92127 USA Telephone No.: 858-942-2230 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this system. US This system must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This system complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This system should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from persons body. For the customers in Canada Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connection to host computers and/or peripherals. This system contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas license-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This system may not cause interference; and
(2) This system must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the system. This system complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This system should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from persons body. 3US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\010COVTOC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 4 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Table of Contents About These Operating Instructions ............................. 5 Whats in the Box .......................... 6 What You Can Do with the System .....................................7 Guide to Parts and Controls ......... 8 Installing the System Installing the Bar Speaker and Subwoofer Startup Guide
(separate document) Mounting the Bar Speaker on a Wall ........................................ 13 Connecting the Subwoofer .......... 15 When the TV Remote Control does not Work ................................16 Connecting to a TV or AV Device Connecting to a TV or AV Device with the HDMI Cable Startup Guide
(separate document) Connecting Sony TV with the BLUETOOTH Function Wirelessly ............................... 17 Connecting a 4K TV and 4K Devices .................................. 20 Listening to Music/Sound Listening to a TV and Other Devices ...................................22 Adjusting the Volume ..................23 Enjoying Multiplex Broadcast Sound
(AUDIO) ..................................23 Listening to Music/Sound with the BLUETOOTH Function ......... 24 4US Adjusting the Sound Quality Enjoying Immersive Surround Experience
(IMMERSIVE AE) ......................27 Setting the Sound Effect that is Tailored to Sound Sources
(Sound Mode) ....................... 28 Making Dialogs Clearer
(VOICE) .................................. 29 Enjoying Clear Sound with Low Volume at Midnight
(NIGHT) .................................. 29 Checking the Current Sound Settings (DISPLAY) ................ 30 Using the Control for HDMI Function Using the Control for HDMI Function ................................. 31 Using the BRAVIA Sync Function .................................33 Changing the Settings Using the Setting Menu .............. 34 Changing the Brightness of the Front Panel Display and Indicators (DIMMER) ............. 38 Saving Power in Standby Mode ..................................... 38 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting .......................... 39 Resetting the System .................. 45 HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\010COVTOC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 5 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Additional Information Specifications ..............................46 Supported Input Audio Formats ..................................48 Supported HDMI Video Formats ..................................49 On BLUETOOTH Communication ..................... 51 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT .......................... 52 Precautions ..................................56 Index ............................................59 About These Operating Instructions The instructions in these Operating Instructions describe the controls on the remote control. Some illustrations are presented as conceptual drawings, and may be different from the actual products. The default settings are underlined on each feature description. Characters in brackets [ ] appear on the front panel display. 5US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 030PAC.fm Page 6 Thursday, October 24, 2019 7:56 AM Whats in the Box Bar speaker (1) WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE (1) Subwoofer (1) Startup Guide Remote control (1)/
R03 (size AAA) battery (2) Operating Instructions (this document) HDMI cable (supports the specification equal to Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet) (1) AC power cord (mains lead) (2) 6US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 7 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM What You Can Do with the System The system supports object-based audio formats such as Dolby Atmos and DTS:X as well as HDR video formats such as HDR10, HLG, and Dolby Vision. Listening to a TV and Other Devices (page 22) Blu-ray Disc player, cable box, satellite box, etc. Basic connection: Refer to Startup Guide (separate document). Other connections: See Connecting to a TV or AV Device (page 17). Using the Control for HDMI Function (page 31) Using the BRAVIA Sync Function (page 33) Connecting Sony TV with the BLUETOOTH Function Wirelessly
(page 17) Listening to Music/Sound with the BLUETOOTH Function (page 24) Connecting the Subwoofer
(page 15) 7US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 8 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Guide to Parts and Controls Details are omitted from the illustrations. Bar Speaker (Main Unit) Front
(power) button BLUETOOTH indicator Turns on the system or sets it to standby mode.
(input select) button Selects the input for playback on the system. BLUETOOTH button (page 24)
+/ (volume) buttons Lights in blue: BLUETOOTH connection has been established. Flashes slowly in blue repeatedly:
BLUETOOTH connection is being attempted. Flashes twice in blue repeatedly:
During pairing standby status. Front panel display Remote control sensor Point the remote control at the remote control sensor to operate the system. 8US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 9 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Rear Input Audio Formats (page 48). For specifications and notes on connections, see Supported HDMI Video Formats (page 49). AC inlet IR repeater (page 16) Transmits the remote signal of the TV remote control to the TV. TV IN (OPT) jack HDMI IN jack For specifications and notes on connections, see Supported HDMI Video Formats (page 49). UPDATE port (page 37) Connect the USB memory when updating the system. HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack Connect a TV that has an HDMI input jack with an HDMI cable. The system is compatible with eARC and ARC. ARC is the function that sends TV sound to an AV device such as the system from the TVs HDMI jack. eARC is an extension of ARC and enables transmission of the object audio and multi-channel LPCM content that cannot be transmitted with ARC. For details of eARC, see
[EARC] (page 36). For supported audio formats, see Supported 9US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 030PAC.fm Page 10 Thursday, October 24, 2019 9:54 AM Subwoofer Power indicator Lights in green: The subwoofer is connected to the system. Lights in red: The subwoofer is in standby mode. Lights in amber: The subwoofer is connected to the system with the manual connection. Flashes slowly in green: The subwoofer is attempting to connect to the system. Flashes slowly in amber: The subwoofer is attempting to connect to the system with the manual connection./The software is updating. Flashes quickly in amber: The subwoofer is in pairing standby status with the manual connection. Turns off: The subwoofer is turned off.
(power) button Turns on or off the subwoofer. LINK button (page 15) AC inlet 10US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 11 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Remote Control INPUT (page 22) Selects the playback source. Each time you press INPUT, the selected input appears in the front panel display cyclically as follows.
[TV] [HDMI] [BT]
IMMERSIVE AE (page 27) Turns on/off the vertical surround function. AUTO SOUND (page 28) CINEMA (page 28)
(volume) +*/ (page 23) Adjusts the volume. SW (subwoofer volume) +/
(page 23) Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer. MENU (page 34) Enters/exits the setting menu mode.
/ (page 34) Selects the setting menu items. ENTER (page 34) Enters the selection. BACK (page 34) Returns to the previous display. VOICE (page 29)
(power) Turns on the system or sets it to standby mode. DISPLAY (page 30) Displays the settings of the sound mode, IMMERSIVE AE, voice mode, night mode, and current stream information. STANDARD (page 28) MUSIC (page 28) 11US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 12 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM
(muting) Turns off the sound temporarily. DIMMER (page 38) AUDIO* (page 23) NIGHT (page 29)
* The AUDIO and + buttons have a tactile dot. Use it as a guide during operation. About the replacement of batteries for the remote control When the system does not respond by operating with the remote control, replace two batteries with new batteries. Use R03 (size AAA) manganese batteries for replacement. 12US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 13 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Installing the System Installing the Bar Speaker and Subwoofer Refer to Startup Guide (separate document). Mounting the Bar Speaker on a Wall You can mount the bar speaker on a wall. 1 Prepare two screws (not supplied) that are suitable for the wall mount holes on the rear of the bar speaker. 4 mm (3/16 in) More than 30 mm (1 3/16 in) 5 mm
(7/32 in) 9 mm
(3/8 in) Hole on the rear of the bar speaker 2 Stick WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE
(supplied) on a wall. Center of the TV Notes Prepare screws (not supplied) that are suitable for the wall material and strength. As a plasterboard wall is especially fragile, attach the screws securely in the wall beam. Install the speakers horizontally, hung by screws in studs in a continuous flat section of the wall. Have the installation done by a Sony dealer or licensed contractor and pay special attention to safety during the installation. Sony shall not be held responsible for accidents or damage caused by improper installation, insufficient wall strength, improper screw installation or natural disaster, etc. Adhesive tape, etc. WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE 1 Align TV CENTER LINE () of WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE with the center line of your TV. 2 Align TV BOTTOM LINE () of WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE with the bottom of your TV, then stick WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE on a wall by using a commercially available adhesive tape, etc. 13US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 14 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM 3 Fasten the screws into the marks
() on SCREW LINE () of WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE as in the illustration below. 368.5 mm
(14 1/2 in) 368.5 mm
(14 1/2 in) Notes When sticking WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE, smooth it out fully. Install the bar speaker apart from the TV by 70 mm (2 7/8 in) or more. Screws Marks () 10.5 mm to 11.5 mm
(approx. 7/16 in) 4 Remove WALL MOUNT TEMPLATE. 5 Hang the bar speaker on the screws. Align the holes of the rear of the bar speaker with the screws, then hang the bar speaker on the two screws. 14US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 15 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Connecting the Subwoofer Connecting the Subwoofer Automatically The subwoofer is connected to the system automatically when they are turned on. For details, refer to Startup Guide
(separate document) for the subwoofer connection. Connecting the Subwoofer Manually If you cannot connect the subwoofer to the system, or you use multiple wireless products and want to specify the wireless connection to link the system to the subwoofer, perform the manual connection. LINK Power indicator
/
MENU ENTER 1 Press MENU.
[SPEAKER] appears in the front panel display. 2 Press / to select [SPEAKER], then press ENTER. 3 Press / to select [LINK], then press ENTER. 4 Press / to select [START], then press ENTER.
[LINK] flashes in the front panel display. To cancel the manual connection, press BACK. 5 Press LINK on the subwoofer. The manual link starts. The power indicator of the subwoofer flashes in amber. 6 When [DONE] appears in the front panel display, press MENU. The link is established and the power indicator of the subwoofer lights in amber. Note If [ERROR] appears in the front panel display, the connection of the subwoofer has not been established. Perform the manual connection again. 15US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 16 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Even if [IR REPEATER] is set to [ON], this function may not work depending on your TV. Also, the remote controls of other devices such as an air conditioner may not work correctly. In this case, change the installation position of the system or TV. When the TV Remote Control does not Work When the bar speaker obstructs the remote control sensor of the TV, the TV remote control may not work. In that case, enable the IR repeater function of the system. You can control the TV with the TV remote control by sending the remote signal from the rear of the bar speaker.
/
MENU ENTER 1 Press MENU.
[SPEAKER] appears in the front panel display. 2 Press / to select [SYSTEM], then press ENTER. 3 Press / to select [IR REPEATER], then press ENTER. 4 Select [ON]. Notes Be sure to check that the TV remote control cannot control the TV, and then set [IR REPEATER] to [ON]. If it is set to
[ON] when the remote control can control the TV, appropriate operation may not be obtained because of the interference between the direct command from the remote control and command via the bar speaker. 16US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 17 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Connecting to a TV or AV Device Connecting to a TV or AV Device with the HDMI Cable To connect a 4K TV or 4K devices See Connecting a 4K TV and 4K Devices (page 20). To connect a TV compatible with eARC For the connection, refer to Startup Guide (separate document). For the settings, see [EARC] (page 36). To connect to a TV other than the above, refer to Startup Guide (separate document). Connecting Sony TV with the BLUETOOTH Function Wirelessly When using Sony TV* with the BLUETOOTH function, you can listen to sound of the TV or device that is connected to the TV by connecting the system and TV wirelessly.
* The TV needs to be compatible with A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the BLUETOOTH profile. Blu-ray Disc player, cable box, satellite box, etc. Listening to TV Sound by Connecting the System and TV Wirelessly To connect the system and TV wirelessly, you need to perform pairing of the system and TV by using the BLUETOOTH function. Pairing is the process required to mutually register the information on BLUETOOTH devices to be connected wirelessly in advance. 17US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 18 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM INPUT BLUETOOTH button 1 Turn on the TV. 2 Turn on the system. 3 Press and hold the BLUETOOTH button on the bar speaker and INPUT on the remote control simultaneously for 5 seconds. The system enters the pairing mode, [PAIRING] appears in the front panel display, and the BLUETOOTH indicator flashes twice repeatedly. 18US 4 On the TV, search the system by performing the pairing operation. The list of the BLUETOOTH devices that are searched appears on the TV screen. For the operation method to pair the BLUETOOTH device to the TV, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. 5 Pair the system and TV by selecting HT-G700 from the list on the TV screen. 6 Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker lights in blue and [TV-BT] appears in the front panel display. A connection between the system and TV has been established. 7 Select the program or input of the device by using the TV remote control. The sound of the displayed image on the TV screen is output from the system. 8 Adjust the volume of the system by using the TV remote control. When pressing the muting button on the TV remote control, the sound is muted temporarily. Notes If the TV sound is not output from the system, select the TV input by pressing INPUT and check the status of the front panel display and indicators on the bar speaker.
[TV-BT] appears in the front panel display: The system and TV are connected and TV sound is output from the system. The BLUETOOTH indicator flashes twice repeatedly and [PAIRING] appears in the front panel display: Perform pairing on the TV.
[TV] appears in the front panel display:
Perform steps from the start. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 19 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM When you connect the system and TV with the HDMI cable (supplied), the BLUETOOTH connection is canceled. To connect the system and TV with the BLUETOOTH function again, disconnect the HDMI cable, then perform the connecting operation from the start. While the system is connecting the TV with the BLUETOOTH function and [AUTO SOUND] is selected for the sound mode,
[STANDARD] is selected for the sound mode. Listening to Sound of the Paired TV You can turn the system on/off, adjust the volume, and mute the sound by using the TV remote control when connecting the TV to the system wirelessly. 1 Turn on the TV with the TV remote control. The system is turned on by interlocking with the TV power, and TV sound is output from the system. 2 Select the program or input of the device by using the TV remote control. The sound of the displayed image on the TV screen is output from the system. 3 Adjust the volume of the system by using the TV remote control. When pressing the muting button on the TV remote control, the sound is muted temporarily. Note If you select the input other than TV on the remote control supplied with the system, the TV sound is not output from the system. To output the TV sound, select the TV input by pressing INPUT. Tip When the TV is turned off, the system is also turned off by interlocking with the TV power. 19US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 20 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Connecting a 4K TV and 4K Devices All HDMI jacks on the system support 4K video format, HDCP2.2, and HDCP2.3
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 2.2 and 2.3). To watch 4K video content, connect the 4K TV and 4K devices to the system via an HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-compatible HDMI jack on each device. You can only view 4K video content through the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-compatible HDMI jack connection. HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI jack TV HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI jack Blu-ray Disc player, cable box, satellite box, etc. 20US HDMI cable (supplied) HDMI cable (not supplied) Use an HDMI cable which supports the 4K video format that you want to watch. For details, see Supported HDMI Video Formats (page 49). Optical digital cable (not supplied) 1 Check which HDMI IN jack on your TV is compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3. Refer to the operating instructions of the TV. 2 Connect the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI IN jack on the TV and HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack on the system with the HDMI cable (supplied). If the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI IN jack on the TV supports eARC or ARC, TV connection is complete. Go to step 4. 3 If the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI IN jack on the TV does not support eARC or ARC, connect the optical digital output jack on the TV and the TV IN (OPT) jack on the system with an optical digital cable (not supplied). When connecting the TV and system with the HDMI cable
(supplied) only, the TV sound is not output from the system. Connect an optical digital cable (not supplied). TV connection is complete. 4 Connect the HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3-
compatible HDMI OUT jack of the 4K device and HDMI IN jack of the system with an HDMI cable (not supplied). Refer to the operating instructions of the 4K device to check that the HDMI OUT jack of the 4K device is compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3. 4K device connection is complete. 5 Turn on the TV. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 21 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM If the picture is not displayed while
[FORMAT] is set to [ENHANCED], set it to
[STANDARD]. 6 Turn on the system. Tip 4K content can be watched by a device compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3 even though devices with different versions (ex. TV compatible with HDCP2.2 and 4K device compatible with HDCP2.3) are connected. Setting the HDMI Signal Format to Watch 4K Video Content To watch 4K video content, select the appropriate setting for the connected 4K TV and 4K device. 1 Press MENU.
[SPEAKER] appears in the front panel display. 2 Press / to select [HDMI], then press ENTER. 3 Press / to select [FORMAT], then press ENTER. 4 Press / repeatedly to select the setting you want.
[ENHANCED]: Select when both the connected TV and devices support high bandwidth video formats such as 4K 60p 4:4:4, etc.
[STANDARD]: Select when the connected TV and devices support standard bandwidth video formats. For the relation of this setting, supported video format signals, and HDMI cables to be used, see Supported HDMI Video Formats
(page 49). Notes Depending on the TV, the TV setting for HDMI output may be required. Refer to the operating instructions of the TV. 21US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 22 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Listening to Music/Sound Listening to a TV and Other Devices You can select the connected device and play the sound of that device. INPUT Front panel display
[HDMI]
Selects the sound of the device that is connected to the HDMI IN jack on the system.
[BT]
Selects the sound of the device that is connected to the system with the BLUETOOTH function. For details, see Listening to Music/Sound with the BLUETOOTH Function (page 24). 2 Adjust the volume (page 23). Tip You can also select the input by pressing on the bar speaker. 1 Press INPUT to select the input you want to play. Each time you press INPUT, the selected input appears in the front panel display cyclically as follows.
[TV] [HDMI] [BT]
Front panel display
[TV]
Selects the sound of the TV that is connected to the TV IN (OPT) or HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack on the system. You can set the playback input jack with
[HDMI] - [TV AUDIO] in the setup menu
(page 36). 22US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 23 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Adjusting the Volume Enjoying Multiplex Broadcast Sound (AUDIO) You can enjoy multiplex broadcast sound when the system receives a Dolby Digital multiplex broadcast signal.
+/
SW +/
AUDIO To adjust the system volume Press +/. The volume level appears in the front panel display. To adjust the subwoofer volume Press SW (subwoofer volume) +/. The volume level appears in the front panel display. The subwoofer is designed for playback of bass or low frequency sound. Notes When the input source does not contain much bass sound, such as in TV programs, the bass sound from the subwoofer may be difficult to hear. SW +/ does not work when the subwoofer is not connected. 1 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select the desired audio signal. Front panel display
[MAIN]
[SUB]
[M/S]
Function Sound of the main language will be output. Sound of the sub language will be output. Mixed sound of both the main and sub languages will be output. Notes To receive a Dolby Digital signal, you need to connect the TV that is compatible with eARC or ARC (page 32) to the HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack with the HDMI cable (supplied), or other devices to the HDMI IN jack with an HDMI cable (not supplied). If your TVs HDMI IN jack is not compatible with eARC or ARC (page 32), connect the 23US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 24 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM TV to the TV IN (OPT) jack with an optical digital cable (not supplied) to receive a Dolby Digital signal. AUDIO does not work while connecting a TV or other device to the system with the BLUETOOTH function. Listening to Music/
Sound with the BLUETOOTH Function You can listen to music by connecting the system and mobile device with the BLUETOOTH function. Listening to Music by Pairing the Mobile Device that is Connected for the First Time To use the BLUETOOTH function, you need to perform pairing of the system and mobile device in advance. BLUETOOTH button 1 Press and hold the BLUETOOTH button on the bar speaker for 2 seconds. The system enters the pairing mode, [PAIRING] appears in the front panel display, and the BLUETOOTH indicator flashes twice repeatedly. 24US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 25 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Note You can pair the BLUETOOTH devices up to the following number. Mobile devices: 9 Sony TV with the BLUETOOTH function:
1 If a new device is paired after pairing the above number of devices, the oldest connected device will be replaced by the new one. Tips If there is no mobile device that has been paired (ex. immediately after the purchase of the system), the system goes into pairing mode simply by changing the input to the BT input. Perform pairing for the second and subsequent mobile devices. Listening to Music from the Paired Device INPUT 2 On the mobile device, search the system by performing the pairing operation. The list of the BLUETOOTH devices that are searched appears on the screen of the mobile device. For the operation method to pair the BLUETOOTH device to the mobile device, refer to the operating instructions of the mobile device. 3 Pair the system and mobile device by selecting HT-G700 from the list on the screen of the mobile device. If a Passkey is requested, enter 0000. 4 Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker lights in blue. A connection between the system and mobile device has been established. 5 Start audio playback with the music app on the connected mobile device. Sound is output from the system. 6 Adjust the volume (page 23). To check the connection status of the BLUETOOTH function Status During pairing standby status Connection is being attempted Connection has been established BLUETOOTH indicator Flashes twice in blue repeatedly Flashes slowly in blue repeatedly Lights in blue 1 Turn the BLUETOOTH function of the mobile device to on. 2 Press INPUT repeatedly to select
[BT]. The system automatically reconnects to the mobile device it was most recently connected to. 25US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 26 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM 3 Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker lights in blue. A connection between the system and mobile device has been established. 4 Start audio playback with the music app on the connected mobile device. Sound is output from the system. 5 Adjust the volume (page 23). To disconnect the mobile device Perform any of the following items. Disable the BLUETOOTH function on the mobile device. Set [BT] - [POWER] to [OFF] (page 37). Turn off the system or mobile device. Tip When the connection is not established, select HT-G700 on the mobile device. 26US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 27 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM 1 Press IMMERSIVE AE to set the function on or off. Front panel display
[IAE.ON]
[IAE.OFF]
Function Activates the vertical surround function. Deactivates the vertical surround function. Notes The surround effect from all directions differs depending on the sound source. A time gap between the sound and picture may occur depending on the sound source. If your TV has a function that delays the image, use it for adjustment. The IMMERSIVE AE function is available only when the [AUDIO] - [EFFECT] setting is set to [SOUND MODE ON] (page 35). Adjusting the Sound Quality Enjoying Immersive Surround Experience
(IMMERSIVE AE) You can feel immersed by the sound from not only the horizontal direction, but also from the upward direction by using Vertical Surround Engine*
effectively for sound modes (page 28). This function also works for the 2.0 channel signal such as a TV program.
* Vertical Surround Engine is a highly precise digital sound field processing technology developed by Sony that produces the sound field in the height direction virtually in addition to a sound field in the horizontal direction by only using front speakers and without using top speakers. You do not need to install speakers on a ceiling and you can enjoy the sound with rich presence regardless of the ceiling height. Also, this function is hardly affected by the shape of a room because it does not use the sound reflected from a wall and enables improved surround playback. IMMERSIVE AE 27US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 28 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Setting the Sound Effect that is Tailored to Sound Sources (Sound Mode) You can easily enjoy pre-programmed sound effects that are tailored to different kinds of sound sources. Button CINEMA MUSIC Function
[CINEMA] appears in the front panel display. You feel immersed by the sound that travels behind you and surrounds your entire body. This mode is suitable for watching movies.
[MUSIC] appears in the front panel display. Vividness and glossiness of the sound are expressed in detail. This mode is suitable for enjoying music in a way that moves you. Notes The sound mode function is disabled when the [AUDIO] - [EFFECT] setting is set to a setting other than [SOUND MODE ON]
(page 35). A time gap between the sound and picture may occur depending on the sound source. If your TV has a function that delays the image, use it for adjustment. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) STANDARD AUTO SOUND MUSIC CINEMA 1 Press one of the sound mode selecting buttons (AUTO SOUND, STANDARD, CINEMA, MUSIC) to select the sound mode. Button AUTO SOUND [AUTO SOUND]
Function appears in the front panel display. The appropriate sound mode setting is automatically selected from STANDARD, CINEMA, or MUSIC.
[STANDARD] appears in the front panel display. The sound of a TV program can be heard clearly. STANDARD 28US C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 29 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Making Dialogs Clearer
(VOICE) Enjoying Clear Sound with Low Volume at Midnight (NIGHT) VOICE 1 Press VOICE to set the function on or off. Front panel display
[Vo.ON]
[Vo.OFF]
Function Dialog is easily heard by enhancing dialog range. Deactivates the voice mode function. NIGHT 1 Press NIGHT to set the function on or off. Front panel display
[N.ON]
[N.OFF]
Function Outputs the sound at low volume with minimum loss of fidelity and clarity of dialog. Deactivates the night mode function. Note When you turn the system off, this setting is set to [N.OFF] automatically. 29US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 30 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Checking the Current Sound Settings (DISPLAY) You can check the current settings of the sound mode, IMMERSIVE AE, voice mode, night mode, and current stream information. DISPLAY
/
1 Press DISPLAY. The current sound mode appears in the front panel display. 2 Press repeatedly to select the sound setting you want to check. The current status of each sound setting appears in the following order. Sound mode (page 28) IMMERSIVE AE (page 27) Voice mode (page 29) Night mode
(page 29) Stream information The current status of each sound setting appears in the reverse order by pressing . 30US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\080HDM.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 31 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Using the Control for HDMI Function Using the Control for HDMI Function Connecting a device such as a TV or Blu-
ray Disc player compatible with the Control for HDMI function* using an HDMI cable enables you to easily operate the device by a TV remote control. The following functions can be used with the Control for HDMI function. System Power Off function System Audio Control function eARC/ARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel/Audio Return Channel) One-Touch Play function HDMI Standby Through power saving setting Note These functions may work with devices other than those manufactured by Sony, but operation is not guaranteed.
* Control for HDMI is a standard used by CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) for allowing HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) devices to control each other. Preparing to Use the Control for HDMI Function Set [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] to
[ON] (page 36). The default setting is
[ON]. Enable the Control for HDMI function settings for the TV and other device connected to the system. Tip If you enable the Control for HDMI
(BRAVIA sync) function when using a TV manufactured by Sony, the Control for HDMI function of the system is also enabled automatically. System Power Off Function When you turn off the TV, the system will turn off automatically. Note The connected device may not turn off depending on the status of the device. System Audio Control Function If you turn on the system while you are watching the TV, the TV sound will be output from the speakers of the system. The volume of the system can be adjusted using the TV remote control. When you turn on the TV, the system is turned on automatically and the TV sound is output from the speakers of the system. Operations can also be made by the TVs menu. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Notes The number for the systems volume level is displayed on the TV screen depending on the TV. The volume number displayed on the TV may differ from the number on the front panel display of the system. Depending on the settings of the TV, the System Audio Control function may not be available. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Depending on the TV, if the TV sound was output from the speakers of the TV the previous time you watched the TV, the system may not turn on by interlocking with the TV power even if the TV is turned on. 31US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\080HDM.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 32 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM eARC/ARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel/Audio Return Channel) If the system is connected to a TVs HDMI IN jack compatible with eARC or ARC, you can listen to TV sound from the speakers of the system without connecting an optical digital cable. On the system, set [HDMI] - [EARC] to
[ON] (page 36). The default setting is
[ON]. Notes Enable the eARC or ARC function of the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. If the TV is not compatible with eARC or ARC, an optical digital cable (not supplied) needs to be connected (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). One-Touch Play Function When you play content on a device (Blu-
ray Disc player, PlayStation4, etc.) connected to the system, the system and TV are turned on automatically, the input of the system is switched to the HDMI input, and sound is output from the speakers of the system. Notes If [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] is set to
[ON] or [AUTO] and the TV sound was output from the speakers of the TV the previous time you watched the TV, the system may not turn on and the sound and picture may be output from the TV even if device content is played (page 36). Depending on the TV, the beginning part of content being played may not play correctly. 32US HDMI Standby Through Power Saving Setting HDMI Standby Through is a function that allows you to enjoy the sound and picture of a connected device without turning on the system. You can reduce system standby power consumption by setting [HDMI] -
[STANDBY THROUGH] to [AUTO]
(page 36). The default setting is [AUTO]. Note If the picture of a device connected to the system is not displayed on the TV, set
[HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] to [ON]. If you connect a TV other than those manufactured by Sony, we recommend you to select this setting. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\080HDM.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 33 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Using the BRAVIA Sync Function In addition to the Control for HDMI function, you can also use the BRAVIA sync function such as the Sound mode/
Scene Select function. Note This function is proprietary function of Sony. This function cannot operate with products other than those manufactured by Sony. Sound mode/Scene Select Function The sound mode of the system is automatically switched according to the setting of the TVs Scene Select function or sound mode. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Set the sound mode to [AUTO SOUND]
(page 28). 33US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 34 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Changing the Settings Using the Setting Menu You can set the following items with the setting menu. Your settings are retained even if you disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead). 1 Press MENU to enter the setting menu mode. 2 Press / repeatedly to select the item, then press ENTER. The setting menu item appears in the front panel display. You can select the following items.
[SPEAKER] (Speaker settings) (page 34)
[AUDIO] (Audio settings) (page 35)
[HDMI] (HDMI settings) (page 36)
[BT] (BLUETOOTH settings) (page 37)
[SYSTEM] (System settings) (page 37)
[RESET] (Resetting the system) (page 37)
[UPDATE] (Updating the system) (page 37) To return to the upper layer, press BACK. 3 Press / repeatedly to select the setting, then press ENTER. 4 Press MENU to exit the setting menu mode. Setting menu items Items
[SPEAKER]
(Speaker settings)
[LINK]
(Link mode)
[SUBWOOFER INFO]
(Subwoofer version information) Function
[START]: Performs the manual connection of the subwoofer to the system. For details, see Connecting the Subwoofer (page 15). To cancel the manual connection, press BACK.
[CANCEL]: Returns to the upper layer [LINK]. Shows the version information of the subwoofer.
[LATEST]: The subwoofer is the latest version.
[PLEASE UPDATE]: The subwoofer is not the latest version.
[NOT CONNECTED]: The subwoofer is not connected to the system. 34US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 35 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Items
[AUDIO]
(Audio settings)
[DRC]
(Audio DRC)
[SYNC]
(A/V Sync)
[DIALOG]
(DTS Dialog Control)
[EFFECT]
(Sound Effect) Function You can compress the dynamic range of the sound track.
[AUTO]: Automatically compresses sound encoded in Dolby TrueHD.
[ON]: Reproduces the dolby and DTS sound track with the kind of dynamic range that the recording engineer intended.
[OFF]: No compression of dynamic range. When the sound does not match the pictures on the TV screen, you can adjust the delay between the picture and sound. You can adjust from 0 msec to 120 msec in 40 msec increments. The default setting is [0ms]. Note This function is available only when the HDMI input is selected. By adjusting the dialog volume, you can easily listen to dialog since it stands out from the ambient noise. This function works while playing content that is compatible with the DTS:X dialog control function. You can adjust from 0 dB to 6 dB in 1 dB increments. The default setting is [0dB]. You can select sound effects, including the sound mode.
[SOUND MODE ON]: Vertical Surround Engine enhances the surround and height speaker channels to create an immersive and enveloping virtual surround effect such as sound mode (page 28) and vertical surround (page 27).
[DOLBY SPEAKER VIRTUALIZER]: Dolby Speaker Virtualizer enhances the surround and height speaker channels to create an immersive and enveloping virtual surround effect. Disables sound effects for the DTS format.
[DTS VITRUAL:X]: DTS Virtual:X is enabled. DTS Virtual:X Technology in the system puts you in the middle of multi speaker. Disables sound effects for the Dolby format.
[NO EFFECT]: Disables the sound effects. 35US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 36 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Items
[HDMI]
(HDMI settings)
[CONTROL FOR HDMI]
[STANDBY THROUGH]
Function
[ON]: The Control for HDMI function is enabled. Devices connected with an HDMI cable can control each other.
[OFF]: Off This function is available when you set [CONTROL FOR HDMI]
to [ON].
[AUTO]: Signals are output from the systems HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) jack when the TV is turned on while the system is not turned on. The system standby power consumption can be reduced more than when set to [ON]
by turning off the connected TV.
[ON]: Signals are always output from the systems HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack when the system is not turned on. If you connect a TV other than one manufactured by Sony, we recommend that you select this setting.
[OFF]: Signals are not output from the systems HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) jack when the system is not turned on. Turn on the system to enjoy the TV content of a device connected to the system. The system standby power consumption can be reduced more than when set to [ON]. You can set the input jack for TV playback.
[AUTO]: Plays the sound from the HDMI OUT (TV eARC/
ARC) jack with priority when you connect the TV to both the HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) and TV IN (OPT) jacks.
[OPTICAL]: Plays the sound from the TV IN (OPT) jack for the TV input. You can transfer the signals of the object audio content, such as Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD and DTS:X, or multi-
channel LPCM content using an HDMI cable by connecting the system and a TV compatible with eARC.
[ON]: Enables the eARC function. Use this setting when the system is connected to a TV compatible with eARC.
[OFF]: Use this setting when the system is not connected to a TV compatible with eARC. Note When [EARC] is set to [ON], confirm the eARC setting of the connected TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. You can select the HDMI signal format for the input signal. For details, see Setting the HDMI Signal Format to Watch 4K Video Content (page 21).
[TV AUDIO]
[EARC]
[FORMAT]
(HDMI Signal Format) 36US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 37 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Items
[BT]
(BLUETOOTH settings)
[POWER]
(BLUETOOTH Power)
[STANDBY]
[AAC CODEC]
[SYSTEM]
(System settings)
[IR REPEATER]
[AUTO STANDBY]
[VERSION]
(Version information)
[ALL RESET]
[START]
[RESET]
(Resetting the system)
[UPDATE]
(Updating the system) Function You can turn the BLUETOOTH function on or off.
[ON]: Turns the BLUETOOTH function on.
[OFF]: Turns the BLUETOOTH function off. Note When the BLUETOOTH function is set to off, the BLUETOOTH input is skipped while selecting input by pressing INPUT. When the system has pairing information, you can turn the system on and listen to music from a BLUETOOTH device, even when the system is in standby mode, by setting the BLUETOOTH standby mode to on.
[ON]: BLUETOOTH standby mode is enabled.
[OFF]: BLUETOOTH standby mode is disabled. Note While the BLUETOOTH standby mode is on, standby power consumption increases. You can enjoy high-quality sound if AAC is enabled and your device supports AAC.
[ON]: Enables AAC codec.
[OFF]: Disables AAC codec.
[ON]: Remote signals for the TV are sent from the rear of the bar speaker.
[OFF]: Turns off the function. For details, see When the TV Remote Control does not Work (page 16).
[ON]: Turns on the auto standby function. When you do not operate the system for about 20 minutes, the system enters standby mode automatically.
[OFF]: Off. The current firmware version information of the system appears in the front panel display. You can reset the system settings to the factory default. For details, see Resetting the System (page 45). You can start a software update after connecting the USB memory on which the software update file is stored to the system. When there is a software update available, we will notify you on the following website:
https://www.sony.com/am/support Notes Before updating, make sure that the subwoofer is turned on and connected to the system. You can update the software of the system by pressing and holding and the BLUETOOTH button on the bar speaker for 7 seconds.
[CANCEL]
Returns to the upper layer [UPDATE]. 37US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 38 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Changing the Brightness of the Front Panel Display and Indicators
(DIMMER) You can change the brightness of the following. Front panel display BLUETOOTH indicator Power indicator on the subwoofer Saving Power in Standby Mode Check that you have made the following settings:
[SYSTEM] - [AUTO STANDBY] is set to
[OFF] (page 37). (The default setting is
[OFF].)
[BT] - [STANDBY] is set to [OFF]
(page 37). (The default setting is [ON].) DIMMER 1 Press DIMMER repeatedly to select the desired setting. Front panel display
[BRIGHT]
[DARK]
[OFF]
Function The front panel display and BLUETOOTH indicator light brightly. The front panel display and BLUETOOTH indicator light darkly. The front panel display is turned off. Note The front panel display is turned off when
[OFF] is selected. It turns on automatically when you press any button, then turns off again if you do not operate the system for about 10 seconds. However, in some cases, the front panel display may not turn off. In this case, the brightness of the front panel display is same as [DARK]. 38US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 39 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If the system does not work properly, handle it in the following order. 1 Search for the cause and solution of the issue using this troubleshooting. 2 Reset the system. All the settings of the system return to their initial status. For details, see Resetting the System (page 45). Should any problems persist, consult your nearest Sony dealer. Be sure to bring your bar speaker and subwoofer, even if it seems as though only one has a problem, when you request to repair. Power The system does not power up. Check that the AC power cord (mains lead) is connected securely. Disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains), and then reconnect after several minutes. The system is turned off automatically. The auto standby function is working. Set [SYSTEM] - [AUTO STANDBY] to
[OFF] (page 37). The system does not turn on even when the TV is turned on. Set [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] to
[ON] (page 36). The TV must support the Control for HDMI function. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Check the speaker settings of the TV. The system power syncs with the speaker settings of the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Depending on the TV, if the sound was output from the speakers of the TV the previous time, the system may not turn on by interlocking with the TV power even when the TV is turned on. The system turns off when the TV is turned off. Check the setting of [HDMI] -
[CONTROL FOR HDMI] (page 36). When the Control for HDMI function is set to on and the input of the system is the TV or HDMI input, the system turns off automatically when you turn off the TV. The system does not turn off even when the TV is turned off. Check the setting of [HDMI] -
[CONTROL FOR HDMI] (page 36). To turn the system off automatically by interlocking with the TV power, set the Control for HDMI function to on. This function works only if the input of the system is the TV or HDMI input. The system does not turn off automatically while the BLUETOOTH input is selected. The TV must support the Control for HDMI function. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. The system cannot be turned off. The system may be in demo mode. To cancel demo mode, reset the system. Press and hold (power) and
(volume) on the bar speaker for more than 5 seconds (page 45). Picture There is no picture or the picture is not output correctly. Select the appropriate input
(page 22). When there is no picture while the TV input is selected, select the TV 39US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 40 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM channel that you want using the TV remote control. When there is no picture while the HDMI input is selected, press the playback button of the connected device. Disconnect the HDMI cable, then connect it again. Make sure that the cable is firmly inserted. When there is no picture from the connected device or the picture from the connected device is not output correctly, set [HDMI] - [FORMAT] to
[STANDARD] (page 36). Some pictures of an old type device may not displayed correctly while [HDMI] -
[FORMAT] is set to [ENHANCED]. If no picture appears while connecting the device with the HDMI cable, make sure that the device is connected to the HDMI IN jack and the TV is connected to the HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) jack. The system is connected to an input device that is not HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection) compliant. In this case, check the specifications of the connected device. 3D content from the HDMI IN jack does not appear on the TV screen. Depending on the TV or video device, 3D content may not appear. Check the supported HDMI video format
(page 49). 4K video content from the HDMI IN jack does not appear on the TV screen. Depending on the TV or the video device, 4K video content may not appear. Check the video capability and settings of your TV and video device. The picture may not be displayed properly if [HDMI] - [FORMAT] is set to
[ENHANCED]. In this case, set it to
[STANDARD] (page 36). Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet that supports 18 Gbps or High Speed HDMI Cable with 40US Ethernet (page 49). If the system is connected to the HDMI jack that is not compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3, [ERROR: TV DOES NOT SUPPORT HDCP2.2 OR 2.3]
appears in the front panel display. Connect to the HDMI jack compatible with HDCP2.2 or HDCP2.3 of the 4K TV or 4K device. An image is not displayed on the entire TV screen. The aspect ratio on the media is fixed. Picture and sound of the device that is connected to the system are not output from the TV when the system is not turned on. Set [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] to
[AUTO] or [ON] (page 36). Turn on the system, and then switch the input for the device playing. HDR contents cannot show as high-
dynamic range. Check the settings of the TV and connected device. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV and the connected device. Some devices may convert HDR contents to SDR if the bandwidth is not enough. In that case, be sure that
[HDMI] - [FORMAT] is set to
[ENHANCED] (page 36) if the TV and the connected device support a bandwidth of up to 18 Gbps. When
[ENHANCED] is set, be sure to use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet that supports 18 Gbps
(page 49). Sound The system cannot connect to a TV with the BLUETOOTH function. When you connect the system and TV with the HDMI cable (supplied), the BLUETOOTH connection is canceled. Disconnect the HDMI cable, then perform the connecting operation from the start (page 17). HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 41 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM No TV sound is output from the system. Check the type and connection of the HDMI cable or optical digital cable that is connected to the system and the TV (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). Disconnect the cables that are connected between the TV and the system, then connect them firmly again. Disconnect the AC power cords
(mains leads) of the TV and the system from the AC outlets (mains), then connect them again. When the system and TV are connected with the HDMI cable only, check the following. The HDMI jack of the connected TV is labeled with eARC or ARC. The Control for HDMI function of the TV is set to on. The eARC or ARC function of the TV is enabled.
[HDMI] - [EARC] is set to [ON]
(page 36).
[HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] is set to [ON] (page 36). If your TV is not compatible with eARC, set [HDMI] - [EARC] to [OFF]
(page 36). If your TV is not compatible with eARC or ARC, connect an optical digital cable (not supplied) (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). If the TV is not compatible with eARC or ARC, TV sound will not be output from the system even if the system is connected to the TVs HDMI IN jack. Press INPUT repeatedly to select the TV input (page 22). Increase the volume on the system or cancel muting. If sound of a cable box/satellite box connected to the TV is not output, connect the device to a HDMI IN jack of the system and switch input of the system to HDMI (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). Depending on the order in which you turn on the TV and system, the system may be muted. If this happens, turn on the TV first, then the system. Set the speakers setting of the TV
(BRAVIA) to Audio System. Refer to the operating instructions of your TV regarding how to set the TV. Picture and sound of the device that is connected to the system are not output from the TV when the system is not turned on. Set [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] to
[AUTO] or [ON] (page 36). Turn on the system, and then switch the input for the device playing. The sound is output from both the system and TV. Mute the sound of the system or TV. The output sound of the system is not the same level as that of the TV even though the values of the volume level on the system and TV are set to the same value. If the Control for HDMI function is set to on, the value of the volume level on the system may appear on your TV as the TV volume. The output sound levels of the system and TV differ even though the values of the volume level on the system and TV are set to the same value. The output sound levels of the system and TV differ depending on the sound processing characteristics of each, and it is not a malfunction. The sound is interrupted while watching a TV program or content on a Blu-ray Disc, etc. Check the sound mode setting
(page 28). If the sound mode is set to
[AUTO SOUND], the sound may be interrupted when the sound mode is changed automatically according to the information of the program that is being played. If you do not want to change the sound mode 41US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 42 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM automatically, set the sound mode to a setting other than [AUTO SOUND]. The TV sound from the system lags behind the image. Set [AUDIO] - [SYNC] to [0ms] if it is set to the range between 40 msec and 120 msec (page 35). A time gap between the sound and picture may occur depending on the sound source. If your TV has a function that delays the image, use it for adjustment. No sound or only a very low-level sound of the device connected to the system is heard. Press + on the remote control and check the volume level (page 11). Press or + on the remote control to cancel the muting function
(page 11). Make sure the input source is selected correctly. You should try other input sources by pressing INPUT repeatedly (page 22). Check that all the cables and cords of the system and connected device are firmly inserted. When you play content compatible with copyright protection technology
(HDCP), it may not be output from the system. Set [HDMI] - [FORMAT] to
[STANDARD] (page 21). The surround effect cannot be obtained. Depending on the input signal and the sound mode setting, surround sound processing may not work effectively. The surround effect may be subtle, depending on the program or disc. To play multi-channel audio, check the digital audio output setting on the device connected to the system. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device. 42US Subwoofer No sound or only a very low-level sound is heard from the subwoofer. Make sure that the power indicator on the subwoofer is lit in green or amber. If the power indicator on the subwoofer does not light, try the following. Make sure the AC power cord
(mains lead) of the subwoofer is connected properly. Press (power) of the subwoofer to turn on the power. If the power indicator on the subwoofer flashes slowly in green or amber, or lights in red, try the following. Move the subwoofer to a location near the bar speaker so that the power indicator on the subwoofer lights in green or amber. Follow the steps in Connecting the Subwoofer (page 15). If the power indicator on the subwoofer flashes in red, press
(power) of the subwoofer to turn off the power and check whether the ventilation holes of the subwoofer is blocked or not. The subwoofer is designed for playback of bass or low frequency sound. If the input sources contain very little bass sound components
(i.e., a TV broadcast), the sound from the subwoofer may be difficult to hear. Play the built-in demonstration music by following the steps below and check that the sound is output from the subwoofer. Press and hold on the bar speaker for 5 seconds. The built-in demonstration music is played. Press again. The built-in demonstration music HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 43 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM is canceled and the system returns to the previous status. Press SW + on the remote control to increase the subwoofer volume
(page 11). Set the night mode to off (page 29). Sound skips or has noise. If there is a device nearby that generates electromagnetic waves, such as a wireless LAN or a microwave oven in use, locate the system apart from it. If there is an obstacle between the bar speaker and the subwoofer, move or remove it. Do not cover the top of the bar speaker with metal objects such as TV frame, etc. Wireless functions may become unstable. Locate the bar speaker and the subwoofer as close as possible. Switch the wireless LAN frequency of any nearby wireless LAN router or PC to 5 GHz range. Switch the network connection of the TV or Blu-ray Disc player from wireless to wired. USB Device Connection The USB device is not recognized. Try the following:
Turn the system off. Remove and reconnect the USB device. Turn the system on. Make sure that the USB device is securely connected to the UPDATE port. Check to see if the USB device or a cable is damaged. Files stored on an USB memory are not played. The USB port of the system is for software updates only (page 37). The system does not support USB playback. Mobile Device Connection Pairing cannot be achieved. Bring the system and the BLUETOOTH device closer together. Make sure the system is not receiving interference from a wireless LAN device, other 2.4 GHz wireless devices, or a microwave oven. If a device that generates electromagnetic radiation is nearby, move the device away from the system. BLUETOOTH connection cannot be completed. Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker is lit
(page 24). Make sure the BLUETOOTH device to be connected with is turned on and the BLUETOOTH function is enabled. Bring the system and the BLUETOOTH device closer together. Pair the system and BLUETOOTH device again. You may need to cancel the pairing with the system using your BLUETOOTH device first. Pairing information may be deleted. Perform pairing operation again
(page 24). Sound of the connected BLUETOOTH mobile device is not output from the system. Make sure that the BLUETOOTH indicator on the bar speaker is lit
(page 24). Bring the system and the BLUETOOTH device closer together. If a device that generates electromagnetic radiation, such as a wireless LAN device, other BLUETOOTH devices, or a microwave oven is nearby, move the device away from the system. Remove any obstacle between the system and the BLUETOOTH device or move the system away from the obstacle. 43US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 44 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Reposition the connected BLUETOOTH device. Switch the wireless LAN frequency of any nearby wireless LAN router or PC to 5 GHz range. Increase the volume on the connected BLUETOOTH device. Remote Control The remote control of the system does not function. Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the bar speaker (page 11). Remove any obstacles in the path between the remote control and the system. Replace both batteries in the remote control with new ones, if they are weak. Make sure you are pressing the correct button on the remote control. TV remote control does not work. This problem might be solved by setting [SYSTEM] - [IR REPEATER] to
[ON] (page 37). Software Update You cannot perform the software update. Use the USB memory on which the software update file is stored to perform the software update
(page 37). Others The Control for HDMI function does not work properly. Check the connection with the system (refer to the supplied Startup Guide). Enable the Control for HDMI function on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your TV. 44US Wait a while, and then try again. If you unplug the system, it will take a while before operations can be made. Wait for 15 seconds or longer, and then try again. Make sure the devices connected to the system support the Control for HDMI function. Enable the Control for HDMI function on the devices connected to the system. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your device. The type and number of devices that can be controlled by the Control for HDMI function is restricted by the HDMI CEC standard as follows:
Recording devices (Blu-ray Disc recorder, DVD recorder, etc.): up to 3 devices Playback devices (Blu-ray Disc player, DVD player, etc.): up to 3 devices Tuner-related devices: up to 4 devices Audio system (receiver/
headphones): up to 1 device (used by the system)
[PROTECT] flashes in the front panel display and the system is turned off. Disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) and make sure nothing is obstructing the ventilation holes of the system. Sensors of the TV do not work properly. The system may block some sensors
(such as the brightness sensor), the remote control receiver of your TV or the emitter for 3D glasses (infrared transmission) of a 3D TV that supports the infrared 3D glass system, or wireless communication. Move the system away from the TV within a range that allows those parts to operate properly. For the locations of the sensors and remote control receiver, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 45 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Wireless function (the BLUETOOTH function or subwoofer) is unstable. Do not place metal objects other than a TV around the system. Music that you are not familiar with suddenly plays. The pre-installed sample music may on the have been played. Press bar speaker to stop playback. The system does not work properly. The system may be in demo mode. To cancel demo mode, reset the system. Press and hold (power) and
(volume) on the bar speaker for more than 5 seconds (page 45). Resetting the System If the system still does not operate properly, reset the system as follows. 1 Press MENU.
[SPEAKER] appears in the front panel display. 2 Press / to select [RESET], then press ENTER. 3 Press / to select [ALL RESET], then press ENTER. 4 Press / to select [START], then press ENTER. All the settings return to their initial status. To cancel resetting Select [CANCEL] in step 4. If You Cannot Perform Resetting Using the Setting Menu Press and hold (power) and
(volume) on the bar speaker for more than 5 seconds. The settings return to their initial status. Note By resetting, the link with the subwoofer may be lost. In this case, perform Connecting the Subwoofer (page 15). 45US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 46 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Additional Information Specifications Bar Speaker (SA-G700) Amplifier section U.S. models:
POWER OUTPUT AND TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION:
(FTC) Front L + Front R:
With 4 ohms loads, both channels driven, from 200 - 20,000 Hz; rated 35 W per channel minimum RMS power, with no more than 1% total harmonic distortion from 250 mW to rated output. POWER OUTPUT (reference) Front L/Front R/Center speaker: 100 W
(per channel at 4 ohms, 1 kHz) Canadian models:
POWER OUTPUT (rated) Front L + Front R: 60 W + 60 W
(at 4 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD) POWER OUTPUT (reference) Front L/Front R/Center speaker: 100 W
(per channel at 4 ohms, 1 kHz) Inputs HDMI IN*
TV IN (OPT) Outputs HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC)*
* HDMI IN and HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jacks support HDCP2.2 and HDCP2.3 protocol. HDCP2.2 and HDCP2.3 are newly enhanced copyright protection technology that is used to protect content such as 4K movies. HDMI Section Connector Type A (19pin) 46US USB section UPDATE port:
Type A (For software update only) BLUETOOTH section Communication system BLUETOOTH Specification version 4.2 Output BLUETOOTH Specification Power Class 1 Maximum communication range Line of sight approx. 30 m1) Maximum number of devices to be registered 10 devices Frequency band 2.4 GHz band (2.4000 GHz -
2.4835 GHz) Modulation method FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum) Compatible BLUETOOTH profiles2) A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) Supported Codecs3) SBC4), AAC5) Transmission range (A2DP) 20 Hz - 20,000 Hz (Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz) 1) The actual range will vary depending on factors such as obstacles between devices, magnetic fields around a microwave oven, static electricity, cordless phone use, reception sensitivity, the operating system, software applications, etc. 2) BLUETOOTH standard profiles indicate the purpose of BLUETOOTH communication between devices. 3) Codec: Audio signal compression and conversion format 4) Abbreviation for Subband Codec 5) Abbreviation for Advanced Audio Coding Front L/Front R/Center speaker block section Speaker system 3 speaker system, Acoustic suspension HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 47 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Speaker 45 mm 100 mm (1 13/16 in 4 in) cone type General Power requirements 120 V AC, 60 Hz Power consumption On: 45 W Standby mode: 0.5 W or less (Power Saving mode)
(When [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI]
and [BT] - [STANDBY] are set to [OFF]) Standby mode: 2 W or less*
(When [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI]
and [BT] - [STANDBY] are set to [ON])
* The system will automatically enter Power saving mode when there is no HDMI connection and no BLUETOOTH pairing history. Dimensions* (approx.) (w/h/d) 980 mm 64 mm 108 mm (38 5/8 in 2 5/8 in 4 3/8 in)
* Not including projection portion Mass (approx.) 3.5 kg (7 lb 12 oz) Subwoofer (SA-WG700) POWER OUTPUT (reference) 100 W (at 4 ohms, 100 Hz) Speaker system Subwoofer speaker system, Bass reflex Speaker 160 mm (6 3/8 in.) cone type Power requirements 120 V AC, 60 Hz Power consumption On: 20 W Standby mode: 0.5 W or less Dimensions (approx.) (w/h/d) 192 mm 387 mm 406 mm (7 5/8 in 15 1/4 in 16 in)
* Not including projection portion Mass (approx.) 7.5 kg (16 lb 9 oz) Wireless Transmitter/
Receiver Section 2.4 GHz (2.404 GHz - 2.476 GHz) Frequency band Modulation method GFSK Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. 47US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 48 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Supported Input Audio Formats Audio formats supported by this system are as follows. Format LPCM 2ch LPCM 5.1ch LPCM 7.1ch Dolby Digital Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD Dolby Atmos - Dolby Digital Plus DTS DTS-ES Discrete 6.1, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 DTS 96/24 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD LBR DTS:X
: Supported format.
: Unsupported format. Function
[HDMI]
[TV]
(eARC)
[TV]
(ARC)
[TV]
(OPT) Note The HDMI IN jack do not support audio format that contains copy protections, such as Super Audio CD or DVD-Audio. 48US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 49 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Supported HDMI Video Formats Video formats supported by this system are as follows. Resolution Frame Rate 3D Color Space Color Depth
[HDMI] - [FORMAT]
setting 4K 4096 2160p 3840 2160p 4K 4096 2160p 3840 2160p 1920 1080p 1920 1080i 1280 720p 720 480p 720 576p 640 480p 50/59.94/60 Hz 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 Hz 50/59.94/60 Hz 23.98/24/25/29.97/30 Hz 25/29.97/30/50/
59.94/60 Hz 23.98/24 Hz 50/59.94/60 Hz 50/59.94/60 Hz 23.98/24/29.97/30 Hz 59.94/60 Hz 50 Hz 59.94/60 Hz
[ENHANCED]1) RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 YCbCr 4:2:0 RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:0 RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 8 bit 8/10/12 bit 10/12 bit 10/12 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8/10/12 bit
[STANDARD]2) RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 8/10/12 bit RGB 4:4:4
: Compatible with 3D signal in Side-by-Side (Half) format
: Compatible with 3D signal in Frame packing and Over-Under (Top-and-Bottom) format 1) Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet that supports 18 Gbps. 2) Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet or Sony High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet with the Cable Type Logo. Notes on HDMI Jack and HDMI Connections Use an HDMI-authorized cable. We do not recommend using an HDMI-DVI conversion cable. Audio signals (sampling frequency, bit length, etc.) transmitted from an HDMI jack may be suppressed by the connected device. Sound may be interrupted when the sampling frequency or the number of channels of audio output signals from the playback device is switched. When the TV input is selected, video signals via the HDMI IN jack are output from the HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jack. This system supports TRILUMINOS. 49US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 50 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM HDMI IN and HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) jacks support bandwidth up to 18 Gbps, HDCP2.2 and HDCP2.31), BT.2020 wide color spaces2), and HDR (High Dynamic Range)3) contents pass-through. When connecting to a TV with a resolution that is different from that of the system, the system may restart to reset the picture output setting. 1) HDCP2.2 and HDCP2.3 are newly enhanced copyright protection technology that is used to protect content such as 4K movies. 2) BT.2020 color space is new wider color standard that is defined for ultra-high definition television systems. 3) HDR is an emerging video format that can display a wider range of brightness levels. The system is compatible with HDR10, HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma), and Dolby Vision. 50US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 51 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM during communication using BLUETOOTH technology. However, this security may be insufficient depending on the setting content and other factors, so always be careful when performing communication using BLUETOOTH technology. Sony cannot be held liable in any way for damages or other loss resulting from information leaks during communication using BLUETOOTH technology. BLUETOOTH communication is not necessarily guaranteed with all BLUETOOTH devices that have the same profile as this system. BLUETOOTH devices connected with this system must comply with the BLUETOOTH specification prescribed by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and must be certified to comply. However, even when a device complies with the BLUETOOTH specification, there may be cases where the characteristics or specifications of the BLUETOOTH device make it impossible to connect, or may result in different control methods, display or operation. Noise may occur or the audio may cut off depending on the BLUETOOTH device connected with this system, the communications environment, or surrounding conditions. If you have any questions or problems concerning your system, please consult your nearest Sony dealer. On BLUETOOTH Communication BLUETOOTH devices should be used within approximately 10 meters (33 feet)
(unobstructed distance) of each other. The effective communication range may become shorter under the following conditions. When a person, metal object, wall or other obstruction is between the devices with a BLUETOOTH connection Locations where a wireless LAN is installed Around microwave ovens that are in use Locations where other electromagnetic waves occur BLUETOOTH devices and wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11 b/g/n) use the same frequency band (2.4 GHz). When using your BLUETOOTH device near a device with wireless LAN capability, electromagnetic interference may occur. This could result in lower data transfer rates, noise, or inability to connect. If this happens, try the following remedies:
Use this system at least 10 meters
(33 feet) away from the wireless LAN device. Turn off the power to the wireless LAN device when using your BLUETOOTH device within 10 meters (33 feet). Install this system and BLUETOOTH device as closer to each other as possible. The radio waves broadcast by this system may interfere with the operation of some medical devices. Since this interference may result in malfunction, always turn off the power on this system and BLUETOOTH device in the following locations:
In hospitals, on trains, in airplanes, at gas stations, and any place where flammable gasses may be present Near automatic doors or fire alarms This system supports security functions that comply with the BLUETOOTH specification to ensure secure connection 51US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 52 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT:
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE, PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE THE SOFTWARE. This EULA is a legal agreement between you and Sony Electronics Inc. (SONY). This EULA governs your rights and obligations regarding the SONY software of SONY and/or its third party licensors (including SONYs affiliates) and their respective affiliates
(collectively, the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS), together with any updates/upgrades provided by SONY, any printed, on-line or other electronic documentation for such software, and any data files created by operation of such software (collectively, the SOFTWARE). Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in the SOFTWARE having a separate end user license agreement
(including, but not limited to, GNU General Public license and Lesser/
Library General Public License) shall be covered by such applicable separate end user license agreement in lieu of the terms of this EULA to the extent required by such separate end user license agreement (EXCLUDED SOFTWARE). SOFTWARE LICENSE The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The SOFTWARE is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and international treaties. 52US COPYRIGHT All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE (including, but not limited to, any images, photographs, animation, video, audio, music, text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE) is owned by SONY or one or more of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS. GRANT OF LICENSE SONY grants you a limited license to use the SOFTWARE solely in connection with your compatible device (DEVICE) and only for your individual, non-
commercial use. SONY and the THIRD-
PARTY SUPPLIERS expressly reserve all rights, title and interest (including, but not limited to, all intellectual property rights) in and to the SOFTWARE that this EULA does not specifically grant to you. REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, attempt to derive source code, modify, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble any of the SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in part, or create any derivative works from or of the SOFTWARE unless such derivative works are intentionally facilitated by the SOFTWARE. You may not modify or tamper with any digital rights management functionality of the SOFTWARE. You may not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent any of the functions or protections of the SOFTWARE or any mechanisms operatively linked to the SOFTWARE. You may not separate any individual component of the SOFTWARE for use on more than one DEVICE unless expressly authorized to do so by SONY. You may not remove, alter, cover or deface any trademarks or notices on the SOFTWARE. You may not share, distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign, transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 53 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM The software, network services or other products other than SOFTWARE upon which the SOFTWARES performance depends might be interrupted or discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers (software suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY). SONY and such suppliers do not warrant that the SOFTWARE, network services, contents or other products will continue to be available, or will operate without interruption or modification. USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used by you to view, store, process and/or use content created by you and/or third parties. Such content may be protected by copyright, other intellectual property laws, and/or agreements. You agree to use the SOFTWARE only in compliance with all such laws and agreements that apply to such content. You acknowledge and agree that SONY may take appropriate measures to protect the copyright of content stored, processed or used by the SOFTWARE. Such measures include, but are not limited to, counting the frequency of your backup and restoration through certain SOFTWARE features, refusal to accept your request to enable restoration of data, and termination of this EULA in the event of your illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE. CONTENT SERVICE PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY BE DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE THROUGH ONE OR MORE CONTENT SERVICES (CONTENT SERVICE). USE OF THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS OF SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU DECLINE TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS, YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that certain content and services available through the SOFTWARE may be provided by third parties over which SONY has no control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME. INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY SERVICES You acknowledge and agree that access to certain SOFTWARE features may require an Internet connection for which you are solely responsible. Further, you are solely responsible for payment of any third party fees associated with your Internet connection, including but not limited to Internet service provider or airtime charges. Operation of the SOFTWARE may be limited or restricted depending on the capabilities, bandwidth or technical limitations of your Internet connection and service. The provision, quality and security of such Internet connectivity are the sole responsibility of the third party providing such service. EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS You agree to comply with all applicable export and re-export restrictions and regulations of the area or country in which you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize the transfer, of the SOFTWARE to a prohibited country or otherwise in violation of any such restrictions or regulations. HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic 53US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 54 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the SOFTWARE could lead to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES). SONY, each of the THIRD-
PARTY SUPPLIERS, and each of their respective affiliates specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty, duty or condition of fitness for HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES. EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk and that you are responsible for use of the SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided AS IS, without warranty, duty or condition of any kind. SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as SONY) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY CONDITIONS OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL BE UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY DEFECTS WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES (INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARES PERFORMANCE DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE AVAILABLE, UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND 54US
(E) REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR CONDITION OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as SONY) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USERS TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, EACH AND ALL OF THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 55 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-
PARTY SUPPLIERS may automatically update or otherwise modify the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, for purposes of enhancement of security functions, error correction and improvement of functions, at such time as you interact with SONYs or third parties servers, or otherwise. Such updates or modifications may delete or change the nature of features or other aspects of the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, functions you may rely upon. You acknowledge and agree that such activities may occur at SONYs sole discretion and that SONY may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE upon your complete installation or acceptance of such update or modifications. Any updates/
modifications shall be deemed to be, and shall constitute part of, the SOFTWARE for purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of this EULA, you consent to such update/modification. ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY This EULA and SONYs privacy policy, each as amended and modified from time to time, together constitute the entire agreement between you and SONY with respect to the SOFTWARE. The failure of SONY to exercise or enforce any right or provision of this EULA shall not constitute a waiver of such right or provision. If any part of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to maintain the intent of this EULA, and the other parts will remain in full force and effect. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this EULA. This EULA shall be governed by the laws of Japan, without regards to conflict of laws provisions. Any dispute arising out of this EULA shall be subject to the exclusive venue of the Tokyo District Court in Japan, and the parties hereby consent to the venue and jurisdiction of such courts. EQUITABLE REMEDIES Notwithstanding anything contained in this EULA to the contrary, you acknowledge and agree that any violation of or non-compliance with this EULA by you will cause irreparable harm to SONY, for which monetary damages would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY obtaining any injunctive or equitable relief that SONY deems necessary or appropriate in such circumstances. SONY may also take any legal and technical remedies to prevent violation of and/or to enforce this EULA, including, but not limited to, immediate termination of your use of the SOFTWARE, if SONY believes in its sole discretion that you are violating or intend to violate this EULA. These remedies are in addition to any other remedies SONY may have at law, in equity or under contract. TERMINATION Without prejudice to any of its other rights, SONY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with any of its terms. In case of such termination, you must cease all use, and destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE. AMENDMENT SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND ANY OF THE TERMS OF THIS EULA AT ITS 55US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 56 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY EMAIL NOTIFICATION TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS PROVIDED BY YOU, BY PROVIDING NOTICE AS PART OF THE PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN UPGRADES/UPDATES OR BY ANY OTHER LEGALLY RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF NOTICE. If you do not agree to the amendment, you should promptly contact SONY for instructions. Your continued use of the SOFTWARE after the effective date of any such notice shall be deemed your agreement to be bound by such amendment. THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express intended third-party beneficiary of, and shall have the right to enforce, each provision of this EULA with respect to the SOFTWARE of such party. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, you may contact SONY by writing to SONY at applicable contact address of each area or country. Copyright 2020 Sony Electronics Inc. All rights reserved. 56US Precautions On safety Should any solid object or liquid fall into the system, unplug the system and have it checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further. Do not climb on the bar speaker and subwoofer, as you may fall down and injure yourself, or system damage may result. On power sources Before operating the system, check that the operating voltage is identical to your local power supply. The operating voltage is indicated on the nameplate at the bottom of the bar speaker. If you are not going to use the system for a long time, be sure to disconnect the system from the wall outlet (mains). To disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead), grasp the plug itself; never pull the cord. One blade of the plug is wider than the other for the purpose of safety and will fit into the wall outlet (mains) only one way. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, contact your dealer. AC power cord (mains lead) must be changed only at a qualified service shop. On heat buildup Although the system heats up during operation, this is not a malfunction. If you continuously use this system at high volume, the system temperature at the rear and bottom rises considerably. To avoid burning yourself, do not touch the system. On placement Do not place the system near heat sources or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust, or mechanical shock. Do not place anything at the rear of the bar speaker and subwoofer that might HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 57 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM On cleaning Clean the system with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine. If you have any question or problem concerning your system, please consult your nearest Sony dealer. block the ventilation holes and cause malfunctions. Do not place metal objects other than a TV around the system. Wireless functions may be unstable. If the system is being used in combination with a TV, VCR, or tape deck, noise may result and picture quality may suffer. In such a case, place the system away from the TV, VCR, or tape deck. Use caution when placing the system on a surface that has been specially treated
(with wax, oil, polish, etc.), as staining or discoloration of the surface may result. Take care to avoid any possible injury from the corners of the bar speaker and subwoofer. Keep 3 cm or more space under the bar speaker when you hang it on a wall. The speakers of this system are not of magnetically shielded type. Do not place magnetic cards on the system or near it. On handling the subwoofer Do not place your hand into the slit of the subwoofer when lifting it. The speaker driver may be damaged. When lifting it, hold the bottom of the subwoofer. On operation Before connecting other devices, be sure to turn off and unplug the system. If you encounter color irregularity on a nearby TV screen Color irregularities may be observed on certain types of TV sets. If color irregularity is observed... Turn off the TV set, then turn it on again after 15 to 30 minutes. If color irregularity is observed again... Place the system further away from the TV set. 57US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 58 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Copyrights and Trademarks prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary. TRILUMINOS and TRILUMINOS logo are a registered trademark of Sony Corporation. All other trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners. This system incorporates Dolby* Digital and the DTS** Digital Surround System.
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
**For DTS patents, see https://
patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together, DTS:X, Virtual:X, the DTS:X logo, and the DTS Virtual:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The BLUETOOTH word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Sony Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. BRAVIA logo is a trademark of Sony Corporation. PlayStation is a registered trademark or trademark of Sony Interactive Entertainment Inc. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology and patents licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is 58US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 59 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM Index Buttons AUDIO 23 DIMMER 38 DISPLAY 30 IMMERSIVE AE 27 NIGHT 29 VOICE 29 A A/V Sync 35 ARC 9, 32 Audio DRC 35 Audio format 7, 48 Audio Return Channel 9, 32 Audio settings 35 Auto Standby 37 B BLUETOOTH AAC 37 Pairing 24 Setting 37 Standby 37 BRAVIA sync 33 Brightness Front panel display 38 Indicators 38 BT.2020 50 C Connection (See Wired connection or Wireless connection in Index) Control for HDMI 31 Current settings 30 D Dialog range 29 DTS Dialog control 35 E eARC 9, 32, 36 Enhanced Audio Return Channel 9, 32, 36 F Format Audio 7, 48 Video 7, 49 H HDCP 50 HDMI Setting 36 Signal format 21 HDR 50 I IMMERSIVE AE 27 Installation 13 IR repeater 16 M Multiplex broadcast sound 23 N Night mode 29 O One-touch play 32 P PROTECT 44 R Remote control 11 Resetting 45 59US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 60 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM S Scene select 33 Settings Audio 35 BLUETOOTH 37 Brightness 38 Current status 30 HDMI 36 Menu 34 Resetting 45 Speaker 34 Surround 27 System 37 Software Update 37 Version 34, 37 Sound Mode 28 Sound mode Select 33 Speaker settings 34 Standby Through 32 System audio control 31 System power off 31 System settings 37 V Vertical Surround Engine 27, 35 Video format 7, 49 Voice mode 29 W Wired connection 4K TV and devices 20 AV devices 17 TV 17 Wireless connection BLUETOOTH devices 24 Subwoofer 15 TV 17 60US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\FY20HT_models\SB1\UC2\5013058111\5013058111HTG700UC2\01US-
HTG700UC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 61 Tuesday, October 22, 2019 11:09 AM 61US HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\020REG.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 2 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Enregistrement du propritaire Les numros de modle et de srie sont situs sur la partie infrieure de la barre de haut-parleurs. Notez les numros dans lespace ci-dessous. Reportez-
vous ces numros lorsque vous contactez votre dtaillant Sony propos de cet appareil. N de modle HT-G700 N de srie AVERTISSEMENT Pour rduire les risques dincendie ou dlectrocution, gardez ce systme labri de la pluie et de lhumidit. Le systme nest pas dconnect de la source dalimentation tant quil reste branch la prise CA, mme si le systme a t teint. Pour rduire le risque dincendie, nobstruez pas lorifice de ventilation du systme avec un journal, une nappe, une tenture, etc. Nexposez pas le systme une source de flamme nue (par exemple, une bougie allume). Pour rduire le risque dincendie ou dlectrocution, nexposez pas ce systme des claboussures ou des gouttes deau et ne posez pas des objets remplis de liquides, notamment des vases, sur le systme. Comme la fiche principale est utilise pour dconnecter le systme de la prise lectrique, connectez le systme une prise CA facilement accessible. Si vous constatez que le systme ne fonctionne pas normalement, dconnectez immdiatement la fiche principale de la prise CA. 2FR Ninstallez pas le systme dans un espace confin, tel quune bibliothque ou un meuble encastr. MISE EN GARDE Risque dexplosion si la pile est remplace par un type de pile inadquat. Nexposez pas les piles ou un appareil contenant des piles une chaleur excessive, notamment aux rayons directs du soleil ou des flammes. Ne pas placer ce produit prs dappareils mdicaux. Ce produit (y compris les accessoires) est dot dun ou plusieurs aimants qui peuvent interfrer avec le fonctionnement des stimulateurs cardiaques, robinets de drivation programmables pour traitement dhydrocphalie ou autres appareils mdicaux. Ne placez pas ce produit prs des personnes qui utilisent de tels appareils mdicaux. Consultez votre mdecin avant dutiliser ce produit si vous utilisez de tels appareils mdicaux. Utilisation lintrieur seulement. Pour la barre de haut-parleurs La plaque signaltique est situe sur la partie infrieure de la barre de haut-
parleurs. Pour les clients aux tats-Unis REMARQUE :
Ce systme a t test et sest rvl conforme aux limites des appareils numriques de Classe B, conformment lalina 15 de la rglementation FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences nuisibles dans une installation rsidentielle. Ce systme gnre, utilise et peut rayonner de lnergie de frquence radio qui, en cas dinstallation et dutilisation non conformes aux instructions, peut HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\020REG.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 3 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM FR engendrer des interfrences nuisibles avec les communications radio. Il nest toutefois pas garanti quaucune interfrence ne surviendra dans une installation particulire. Si ce systme altre effectivement la rception radio ou tlvise, ce qui peut tre dtermin en mettant le systme hors tension, puis nouveau sous tension, nous vous encourageons essayer de remdier la situation en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures ci-aprs :
Rorientez ou repositionnez lantenne de rception. Augmentez la distance qui spare le systme du rcepteur. Raccordez le systme la prise dun circuit diffrent de celui auquel le rcepteur est raccord. Sollicitez laide de votre revendeur ou dun technicien en radio/tlvision expriment. Des cbles et connecteurs correctement blinds et mis la terre doivent tre utiliss pour le raccordement des ordinateurs htes ou des priphriques afin de satisfaire aux limites dmission du FCC. Pour toute question au sujet de cette barre de son :
Visitez : www.sony.com/support Contactez : Sony Customer Information Service Center au 1-800-222-SONY
(7669) crivez : Sony Customer Information Service Center 12451 Gateway Blvd., Fort Myers, FL 33913 Dclaration de conformit du fournisseur Nom commercial : SONY No de modle : HT-G700 Responsable : Sony Electronics Inc. Adresse : 16535 Via Esprillo, San Diego, CA 92127 .-U. No de tlphone : 858-942-2230 Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC des tats-Unis. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) Cet appareil ne doit pas gnrer dinterfrences nuisibles et (2) il doit tre en mesure daccepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant gnrer un fonctionnement indsirable. ATTENTION Vous tes prvenu que toute modification ou tout changement non expressment approuv dans ce manuel peut annuler votre autorisation utiliser ce systme. Ce systme ne doit pas se trouver proximit dun autre metteur ou dune autre antenne, ou encore tre utilis en mme temps que ceux-ci. Ce systme est conforme aux limites dexposition au rayonnement du FCC dtermines pour un environnement incontrl et rencontre les recommandations dexposition aux radiofrquences (RF) du FCC. Ce systme devrait tre install et utilis en gardant le radiateur au moins 20 cm ou plus du corps dune personne. Pour les clients au Canada Il est impratif dutiliser des cbles et des connecteurs correctement blinds et mis la terre pour la connexion des ordinateurs htes et/ou aux priphriques. Lmetteur/rcepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le prsent systme est conforme aux CNR dInnovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada applicables aux deux conditions suivantes :
3FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\020REG.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 4 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM
(1) le systme ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
(2) lutilisateur du systme doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du systme. Ce systme est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements dISED nonces pour un environnement non contrl et respecte les rgles dexposition aux frquences radiolectriques (RF) CNR-102 dISED. Ce systme doit tre install et utilis en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le radiateur et le corps humain. 4FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\010COVTOC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 5 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Table des matires propos de ce Manuel dinstructions ..........................6 Que contient la bote? ................... 7 Possibilits offertes par le systme .........................8 Guide des pices et commandes ............................9 Installation du systme Installation de la barre de haut-
parleurs et du caisson de graves Manuel de dmarrage
(document distinct) Fixation de la barre de haut-parleurs sur un mur ...... 14 Connexion du caisson de graves .................................... 16 Lorsque la tlcommande du tlviseur ne fonctionne pas ...17 Raccordement un tlviseur ou appareil AV Raccordement un tlviseur ou appareil AV laide du cble HDMI Manuel de dmarrage
(document distinct) Connexion sans fil dun tlviseur Sony avec la fonction BLUETOOTH ........................... 19 Raccordement dun tlviseur 4K et dappareils 4K .............. 22 coute de la musique/du son coute dun tlviseur et dautres appareils ................................ 25 Rglage du volume .....................26 Apprcier un son diffus en multiplex (AUDIO) .................26 coute de la musique/du son avec la fonction BLUETOOTH ....... 27 Rglage de la qualit sonore Apprcier une exprience ambiophonique immersive
(IMMERSIVE AE) .....................30 Rglage de leffet sonore adapt aux sources sonores (Mode sonore) .................................. 31 Amliorer la clart des dialogues
(VOICE) ................................... 32 Apprcier un son clair avec un volume faible pendant la nuit
(NIGHT) .................................. 32 Vrifier les rglages sonores actuels
(DISPLAY) ............................... 33 Utilisation de la fonction Contrle pour HDMI Utilisation de la fonction Contrle pour HDMI .............................34 Utilisation de la fonction BRAVIA Sync .......................................36 Modification des rglages Utilisation du menu de rglage .................................. 37 Modification de la luminosit de laffichage du panneau avant et des tmoins (DIMMER) .......... 41 conomie dnergie en mode de veille ......................................42 Dpannage Dpannage ..................................43 Rinitialisation du systme .........50 Informations complmentaires Caractristiques techniques ........ 51 Formats audio dentre pris en charge .................................... 53 Formats vido HDMI pris en charge ....................................54 5FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\010COVTOC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 6 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM propos de la communication BLUETOOTH .......................... 56 CONTRAT DE LICENCE DUTILISATEUR FINAL .............57 Prcautions ................................. 62 Index ............................................ 65 propos de ce Manuel dinstructions Les instructions dans ce Manuel dinstructions dcrivent les commandes de la tlcommande. Certaines illustrations sont prsentes sous forme de dessins conceptuels et peuvent diffrer des produits rels. Les rglages par dfaut sont souligns dans chaque description de fonction. Les caractres entre crochets [ ]
apparaissent dans laffichage du panneau avant. 6FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 7 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Que contient la bote?
Barre de haut-parleurs (1) Cordon dalimentation CA (2) CALIBRE DE MONTAGE MURAL (1) Manuel de dmarrage Caisson de graves (1) Tlcommande (1)/
Pile R03 (taille AAA) (2) Manuel dinstructions (ce document) Cble HDMI (prenant en charge la spcification quivalente au cble HDMI haute vitesse de qualit suprieure avec Ethernet) (1) 7FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 8 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Possibilits offertes par le systme Le systme prend en charge les formats audio bass sur objets tels que Dolby Atmos et DTS:X, ainsi que les formats vido HDR tels que HDR10, HLG et Dolby Vision. coute dun tlviseur et dautres appareils (page 25) Lecteur Blu-ray Disc, dcodeur de cblodistribution, rcepteur satellite, etc. Raccordement de base :
Reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage (document distinct). Autres raccordements :
Consultez Raccordement un tlviseur ou appareil AV
(page 19). Utilisation de la fonction Contrle pour HDMI (page 34) Utilisation de la fonction BRAVIA Sync (page 36) Connexion sans fil dun tlviseur Sony avec la fonction BLUETOOTH
(page 19) coute de la musique/du son avec la fonction BLUETOOTH (page 27) Connexion du caisson de graves (page 16) 8FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 9 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Guide des pices et commandes Les dtails sont omis des illustrations. Barre de haut-parleurs (Appareil principal) Avant Touche (alimentation) Tmoin BLUETOOTH Allume le systme ou le rgle en mode de veille. Touche
(slection dentre) Permet de slectionner lentre pour la lecture sur le systme. Touche BLUETOOTH (page 27) Touches +/ (volume) Sallume en bleu : Connexion BLUETOOTH tablie. Clignote lentement en bleu plusieurs reprises : Tentative de connexion BLUETOOTH en cours. Clignote deux fois en bleu plusieurs reprises : Pendant ltat de veille de jumelage. Affichage du panneau avant Capteur de tlcommande Pointez la tlcommande vers le capteur de tlcommande pour faire fonctionner le systme. 9FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 10 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Arrire objet ou LPCM multicanal quil nest pas possible de transmettre avec ARC. Pour plus de dtails sur la fonction eARC, consultez
[EARC] (page 39). Pour les formats audio pris en charge, consultez Formats audio dentre pris en charge
(page 53). Pour les caractristiques et les remarques sur les raccordements, consultez Formats vido HDMI pris en charge (page 54). Entre CA IR-Repeater (page 17) Transmet le signal de la tlcommande du tlviseur au tlviseur. Prise TV IN (OPT) Prise HDMI IN Pour les caractristiques et les remarques sur les raccordements, consultez Formats vido HDMI pris en charge (page 54). Port UPDATE (page 40) Connectez la mmoire USB lors de la mise jour du systme. Prise HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) Raccordez un tlviseur muni dune prise dentre HDMI avec un cble HDMI. Le systme est compatible avec eARC et ARC. ARC est la fonction permettant denvoyer le son du tlviseur un appareil AV, comme le systme, partir de la prise HDMI du tlviseur. eARC est une extension de la fonction ARC qui permet la transmission dun contenu audio bas sur 10FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 11 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Caisson de graves Tmoin dalimentation Clignote lentement en ambre :
Tentative de connexion du caisson de graves au systme avec la connexion manuelle./Mise jour du logiciel. Clignote rapidement en ambre :
Caisson de graves en tat de veille de jumelage avec la connexion manuelle. Sallume en ambre : Caisson de graves connect au systme avec la connexion manuelle. Clignote lentement en vert :
Tentative de connexion du caisson de graves au systme. Sallume en vert : Caisson de graves connect au systme. Sallume en rouge : Caisson de graves en mode de veille. Steint : Caisson de graves teint. Touche (alimentation) Allume ou teint le caisson de graves. Touche LINK (page 16) Entre CA 11FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 12 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Tlcommande INPUT (page 25) Slectionne la source de lecture. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur INPUT, lentre slectionne apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant de manire cyclique dans lordre suivant.
[TV] [HDMI] [BT]
IMMERSIVE AE (page 30) Active/dsactive la fonction ambiophonique verticale. AUTO SOUND (page 31) CINEMA (page 31)
(volume) +*/ (page 26) Rgle le volume. SW (volume du caisson de graves) +/ (page 26) Rgle le volume du caisson de graves. MENU (page 37) Permet dafficher/de quitter le mode de menu de rglage.
/ (page 37) Slectionne les options du menu de rglage. ENTER (page 37) Permet de valider la slection. BACK (page 37) Permet de revenir laffichage prcdent. VOICE (page 32)
(alimentation) Allume le systme ou le rgle en mode de veille. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) 12FR C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 13 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM DISPLAY (page 33) Affiche les rglages du mode sonore, de la fonction IMMERSIVE AE, du mode voix, du mode nuit et des informations de diffusion actuelles. STANDARD (page 31) MUSIC (page 31)
(coupure du son) Dsactive temporairement le son. DIMMER (page 41) AUDIO* (page 26) NIGHT (page 32)
* Les touches AUDIO et + comportent un point tactile. Utilisez ce point comme guide pendant lutilisation. propos du remplacement des piles de la tlcommande Lorsque le systme ne rpond plus la tlcommande, remplacez les deux piles par des piles neuves. Utilisez des piles au manganse R03
(taille AAA) pour le remplacement. 13FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 14 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Installation du systme Installation de la barre de haut-parleurs et du caisson de graves Reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage (document distinct). Fixation de la barre de haut-parleurs sur un mur inapproprie des vis, une catastrophe naturelle, etc. 1 Prparez deux vis (non fournies) adaptes aux trous de fixation murale situs larrire de la barre de haut-parleurs. 4 mm (3/16 po) Plus de 30 mm (1 3/16 po) 5 mm
(7/32 po) 9 mm
(3/8 po) Vous pouvez fixer la barre de haut-
parleurs sur un mur. Trou larrire de la barre de haut-
parleurs 2 Collez le CALIBRE DE MONTAGE MURAL (fourni) sur le mur. Centre du tlviseur Remarques Prparez des vis (non fournies) adaptes au matriau et la rsistance du mur. Comme les plaques de pltre sont particulirement fragiles, fixez fermement les vis une poutre du mur. Installez les enceintes lhorizontale en les suspendant des vis insres dans des montants, sur une partie plate et continue du mur. Confiez linstallation un dtaillant Sony ou un installateur agr et portez une attention particulire aux consignes de scurit pendant linstallation. Sony ne peut tre tenu responsable des accidents ou dommages occasionns par une installation incorrecte, une rsistance insuffisante du mur, une installation 14FR Ruban adhsif, etc. CALIBRE DE MONTAGE MURAL 1 Alignez la LIGNE CENTRALE DU TLVISEUR () du CALIBRE DE MONTAGE MURAL avec la ligne centrale de votre tlviseur. 2 Alignez la LIGNE ARRIRE DU TLVISEUR () du CALIBRE DE MONTAGE MURAL avec le bas de votre tlviseur, puis collez le CALIBRE DE MONTAGE MURAL HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 15 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM 5 Suspendez la barre de haut-
parleurs aux vis. Alignez les trous larrire de la barre de haut-parleurs avec les vis, puis suspendez la barre de haut-
parleurs aux deux vis. Remarques Au moment de coller le CALIBRE DE MONTAGE MURAL, lissez-le compltement. Installez la barre de haut-parleurs une distance dau moins 70 mm (2 7/8 po) du tlviseur. sur le mur en utilisant un ruban adhsif disponible sur le march, etc. 3 Fixez les vis dans les marques () sur la LIGNE DE VIS () du CALIBRE DE MONTAGE MURAL de la manire indique dans lillustration ci-dessous. 368,5 mm
(14 1/2 po) 368,5 mm
(14 1/2 po) Vis Marques
() 10,5 mm 11,5 mm
(environ 7/16 po) 4 Retirez le CALIBRE DE MONTAGE MURAL. 15FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 16 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Connexion du caisson de graves Connexion automatique du caisson de graves Le caisson de graves est connect automatiquement au systme lors de la mise en marche. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage (document distinct) pour la connexion du caisson de graves. Connexion manuelle du caisson de graves Si vous ne parvenez pas connecter le caisson de graves au systme, ou encore si vous utilisez plusieurs produits sans fil et souhaitez spcifier la connexion sans fil pour relier le systme au caisson de graves, effectuez la connexion manuelle. LINK Tmoin dalimentation
/
MENU ENTER 1 Appuyez sur MENU.
[SPEAKER] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. 2 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [SPEAKER], puis appuyez sur ENTER. 16FR 3 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [LINK], puis appuyez sur ENTER. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 17 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM 4 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [START], puis appuyez sur ENTER.
[LINK] clignote dans laffichage du panneau avant. Pour annuler la liaison manuelle, slectionnez [CANCEL]. 5 Appuyez sur la touche LINK du caisson de graves. La liaison manuelle dmarre. Le tmoin dalimentation du caisson de graves clignote en ambre. 6 Lorsque [DONE] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant, appuyez sur MENU. La liaison est tablie et le tmoin dalimentation du caisson de graves sallume en ambre. Remarque Si [ERROR] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant, la connexion du caisson de graves nest pas tablie. Effectuez de nouveau la connexion manuelle. Lorsque la tlcommande du tlviseur ne fonctionne pas Lorsque la barre de haut-parleurs bloque le capteur de tlcommande du tlviseur, la tlcommande du tlviseur pourrait ne pas fonctionner. Dans ce cas, activez la fonction IR-
Repeater du systme. Vous pouvez contrler le tlviseur laide de la tlcommande du tlviseur en envoyant le signal de tlcommande depuis larrire de la barre de haut-
parleurs.
/
MENU ENTER 1 Appuyez sur MENU.
[SPEAKER] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. 2 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [SYSTEM], puis appuyez sur ENTER. 3 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [IR REPEATER], puis appuyez sur ENTER. 4 Slectionnez [ON]. 17FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 18 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Remarques Assurez-vous que la tlcommande du tlviseur ne peut pas contrler le tlviseur, puis rglez [IR REPEATER]
[ON]. Si le paramtre est rgl [ON]
pendant que la tlcommande peut contrler le tlviseur, un problme de fonctionnement peut survenir en raison des interfrences entre la commande directe de la tlcommande et la commande via la barre de haut-parleurs. Mme si [IR REPEATER] est rgl [ON], cette fonction pourrait ne pas fonctionner, selon votre tlviseur. De plus, les tlcommandes des autres appareils tels que les climatiseurs pourraient ne pas fonctionner correctement. Dans ce cas, changez la position dinstallation du systme ou du tlviseur. 18FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 19 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Raccordement un tlviseur ou appareil AV Raccordement un tlviseur ou appareil AV laide du cble HDMI Pour raccorder un tlviseur 4K ou des appareils 4K Consultez Raccordement dun tlviseur 4K et dappareils 4K
(page 22). Pour raccorder un tlviseur compatible avec eARC Pour le raccordement, reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage (document distinct). Pour les rglages, consultez
[EARC] (page 39). Pour le raccordement un tlviseur autre que celui mentionn ci-dessus, reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage
(document distinct). Connexion sans fil dun tlviseur Sony avec la fonction BLUETOOTH Lors de lutilisation dun tlviseur Sony* avec la fonction BLUETOOTH, vous pouvez couter le son du tlviseur ou de lappareil raccord au tlviseur en tablissant une connexion sans fil entre le systme et le tlviseur.
* Le tlviseur doit tre compatible avec A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) du profil BLUETOOTH. Lecteur Blu-ray Disc, dcodeur de cblodistribution, rcepteur satellite, etc. coute du son du tlviseur laide dune connexion sans fil entre le systme et le tlviseur Pour tablir une connexion sans fil entre le systme et le tlviseur, vous devez effectuer le jumelage du systme et du tlviseur en utilisant la fonction BLUETOOTH. Le jumelage est le processus requis pour lenregistrement mutuel pralable des informations sur les appareils BLUETOOTH connecter sans fil. 19FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 20 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM INPUT Touche BLUETOOTH 1 Allumez le tlviseur. 2 Allumez le systme. 3 Maintenez enfonces les touches BLUETOOTH de la barre de haut-
parleurs et INPUT de la tlcommande simultanment pendant 5 secondes. Le systme passe en mode de jumelage, [PAIRING] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant et le tmoin BLUETOOTH clignote deux fois plusieurs reprises. 20FR 4 Sur le tlviseur, recherchez le systme en effectuant lopration de jumelage. La liste dappareils BLUETOOTH recherchs apparat lcran du tlviseur. Pour la mthode de jumelage de lappareil BLUETOOTH au tlviseur, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. 5 Jumelez le systme et le tlviseur en slectionnant HT-G700 dans la liste lcran du tlviseur. 6 Assurez-vous que le tmoin BLUETOOTH de la barre de haut-
parleurs sallume en bleu et que
[TV-BT] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. Une connexion est tablie entre le systme et le tlviseur. 7 Slectionnez lmission ou lentre de lappareil en utilisant la tlcommande du tlviseur. Le son de limage affiche lcran du tlviseur est mis par le systme. 8 Rglez le volume du systme en utilisant la tlcommande du tlviseur. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche de coupure du son de la tlcommande du tlviseur, le son est coup temporairement. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 21 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Remarques Si le son du tlviseur nest pas mis par le systme, slectionnez lentre TV en appuyant sur INPUT et vrifiez ltat de laffichage du panneau avant et des tmoins de la barre de haut-parleurs.
[TV-BT] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant : Le systme et le tlviseur sont connects et le son du tlviseur est mis par le systme. Le tmoin BLUETOOTH clignote deux fois plusieurs reprises et [PAIRING]
apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant : Effectuez le jumelage sur le tlviseur.
[TV] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant : Suivez les tapes partir du dbut. Lorsque vous raccordez le systme et le tlviseur avec le cble HDMI (fourni), la connexion BLUETOOTH est annule. Pour connecter de nouveau le systme et le tlviseur avec la fonction BLUETOOTH, dconnectez le cble HDMI, puis effectuez la procdure de connexion depuis le dbut. Pendant que le systme connecte le tlviseur avec la fonction BLUETOOTH et que [AUTO SOUND] est slectionn comme mode sonore, [STANDARD] est slectionn comme mode sonore. coute du son du tlviseur jumel Vous pouvez allumer/teindre le systme, rgler le volume et couper le son en utilisant la tlcommande du tlviseur lorsquune connexion sans fil est tablie entre le tlviseur et le systme. 1 Allumez le tlviseur avec la tlcommande du tlviseur. Le systme est mis en marche par interverrouillage avec lalimentation du tlviseur, puis le son du tlviseur est mis par le systme. 2 Slectionnez lmission ou lentre de lappareil en utilisant la tlcommande du tlviseur. Le son de limage affiche lcran du tlviseur est mis par le systme. 3 Rglez le volume du systme en utilisant la tlcommande du tlviseur. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche de coupure du son de la tlcommande du tlviseur, le son est coup temporairement. Remarque Si vous slectionnez une entre autre que TV sur la tlcommande fournie avec le systme, le son du tlviseur nest pas mis par le systme. Pour mettre le son du tlviseur, slectionnez lentre TV en appuyant sur INPUT. Conseil Lorsque le tlviseur est teint, le systme est galement teint par interverrouillage avec lalimentation du tlviseur. 21FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 22 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Raccordement dun tlviseur 4K et dappareils 4K Toutes les prises HDMI du systme prennent en charge le format vido 4K et les protections HDCP2.2 et HDCP2.3
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection, rvisions de systme 2.2 et 2.3). Pour regarder un contenu vido 4K, raccordez le tlviseur 4K et les appareils 4K au systme via une prise HDMI compatible HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3 sur chaque appareil. Vous pouvez visionner le contenu vido 4K uniquement laide dun raccordement par prise HDMI compatible HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3. 22FR Prise HDMI compatible HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3 Tlviseur Prise HDMI compatible HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3 Lecteur Blu-ray Disc, dcodeur de cblodistribution, rcepteur satellite, etc. Cble HDMI (fourni) Cble HDMI (non fourni) Utilisez un cble HDMI prenant en charge le format vido 4K que vous souhaitez regarder. Pour plus de dtails, consultez Formats vido HDMI pris en charge
(page 54). Cble numrique optique (non fourni) 1 Identifiez la prise HDMI IN de votre tlviseur qui est compatible avec HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3. Reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 23 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM 2 Raccordez la prise HDMI IN compatible HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3 du tlviseur la prise HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) du systme laide du cble HDMI (fourni). Si la prise HDMI IN compatible HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3 du tlviseur prend en charge eARC ou ARC, le raccordement du tlviseur est termin. Passez ltape 4. 3 Si la prise HDMI IN compatible HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3 du tlviseur ne prend pas en charge eARC ou ARC, raccordez la prise de sortie numrique optique du tlviseur la prise TV IN (OPT) du systme laide dun cble numrique optique (non fourni). Lors du raccordement du tlviseur et du systme avec le cble HDMI
(fourni) uniquement, le son du tlviseur nest pas mis par le systme. Raccordez un cble numrique optique (non fourni). Le raccordement du tlviseur est termin. 4 Raccordez la prise HDMI OUT compatible HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3 de lappareil 4K la prise HDMI IN du systme laide dun cble HDMI (non fourni). Reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions de lappareil 4K pour vrifier que la prise HDMI OUT de lappareil 4K est compatible avec HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3. Le raccordement de lappareil 4K est termin. 5 Allumez le tlviseur. 6 Allumez le systme. Conseil Le contenu 4K peut tre regard laide dun appareil compatible avec HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3, mme si des appareils avec diffrentes versions (par exemple, un tlviseur compatible avec HDCP2.2 et un appareil 4K compatible avec HDCP2.3) sont raccords. Rglage du format de signal HDMI pour regarder un contenu vido 4K Pour regarder un contenu vido 4K, slectionnez le rglage appropri pour le tlviseur 4K et lappareil 4K raccords. 1 Appuyez sur MENU.
[SPEAKER] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. 2 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [HDMI], puis appuyez sur ENTER. 3 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [FORMAT], puis appuyez sur ENTER. 4 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur /
pour slectionner le rglage souhait.
[ENHANCED] : Slectionnez cette option lorsque le tlviseur et les appareils raccords prennent en charge les formats vido bande passante leve comme 4K 60p 4:4:4, etc.
[STANDARD] : Slectionnez cette option lorsque le tlviseur et les appareils raccords prennent en charge les formats vido bande passante standard. Pour connatre la relation entre ce rglage, les signaux de format vido pris en charge et les cbles HDMI utiliser, consultez Formats vido HDMI pris en charge
(page 54). 23FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 24 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Remarques Selon le tlviseur, la configuration du tlviseur pour la sortie HDMI pourrait tre requise. Reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Si limage ne saffiche pas pendant le rglage de [FORMAT] [ENHANCED], rglez le format [STANDARD]. 24FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 25 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM coute de la musique/du son coute dun tlviseur et dautres appareils Vous pouvez slectionner lappareil raccord et couter le son de cet appareil. INPUT Affichage du panneau avant
[TV]
Slectionne le son du tlviseur raccord la prise TV IN (OPT) ou HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) du systme. Vous pouvez slectionner la prise dentre utilise pour lcoute sonore avec
[HDMI] - [TV AUDIO] dans le menu de configuration (page 39).
[HDMI]
Slectionne le son de lappareil raccord prise HDMI IN du systme.
[BT]
Slectionne le son de lappareil connect au systme avec la fonction BLUETOOTH. Pour plus de dtails, consultez coute de la musique/du son avec la fonction BLUETOOTH
(page 27). 2 Rglez le volume (page 26). Conseil Vous pouvez galement slectionner lentre en appuyant sur la touche la barre de haut-parleurs. de 1 Appuyez sur INPUT pour slectionner lentre de lappareil dont vous souhaitez couter le son. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur INPUT, lentre slectionne apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant de manire cyclique dans lordre suivant.
[TV] [HDMI] [BT]
25FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 26 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Rglage du volume Apprcier un son diffus en multiplex (AUDIO) Vous pouvez apprcier un son diffus en multiplex lorsque le systme reoit un signal diffus en multiplex Dolby Digital.
+/
SW +/
Pour rgler le volume du systme Appuyez sur +/. Le niveau de volume apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. Pour rgler le volume du caisson de graves Appuyez sur SW (volume du caisson de graves) +/. Le niveau de volume apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. Le caisson de graves est conu pour reproduire les sons graves ou basses frquences. Remarques Lorsque la source dentre ne contient pas beaucoup de sons graves, comme les missions de tlvision, les sons graves mis par le caisson de graves peuvent tre difficiles entendre. SW +/ ne fonctionne pas lorsque le caisson de graves nest pas connect. 26FR AUDIO 1 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur AUDIO pour slectionner le signal audio souhait. Affichage du panneau avant
[MAIN]
[SUB]
[M/S]
Fonction Le son de la langue principale est mis. Le son de la langue secondaire est mis. Un mlange des langues principale et secondaire est mis. Remarques Pour recevoir un signal Dolby Digital, vous devez raccorder le tlviseur compatible avec eARC ou ARC (page 35) la prise HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) laide du cble HDMI (fourni) ou dautres appareils la prise HDMI IN laide dun cble HDMI
(non fourni). HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 27 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Si la prise HDMI IN de votre tlviseur nest pas compatible avec eARC ou ARC
(page 35), raccordez le tlviseur la prise TV IN (OPT) laide dun cble numrique optique (non fourni) pour recevoir un signal Dolby Digital. AUDIO ne fonctionne pas pendant la connexion dun tlviseur ou dun autre appareil au systme avec la fonction BLUETOOTH. coute de la musique/du son avec la fonction BLUETOOTH Vous pouvez couter de la musique en connectant le systme et lappareil mobile avec la fonction BLUETOOTH. coute de la musique en jumelant lappareil mobile connect pour la premire fois Pour utiliser la fonction BLUETOOTH, vous devez effectuer au pralable le jumelage du systme et de lappareil mobile. Touche BLUETOOTH 1 Maintenez enfonce la touche BLUETOOTH de la barre de haut-
parleurs pendant 2 secondes. Le systme passe en mode de jumelage, [PAIRING] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant et le tmoin BLUETOOTH clignote deux fois plusieurs reprises. 27FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 28 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Pour vrifier ltat de connexion de la fonction BLUETOOTH tat Pendant ltat de veille de jumelage Tentative de connexion en cours Connexion tablie Tmoin BLUETOOTH Clignote deux fois en bleu plusieurs reprises Clignote lentement en bleu plusieurs reprises Sallume en bleu Remarque Vous pouvez jumeler le nombre suivant dappareils BLUETOOTH. Appareils mobiles : 9 Tlviseur Sony avec la fonction BLUETOOTH : 1 Si un nouvel appareil est jumel aprs le jumelage du nombre dappareils ci-
dessus, lappareil connect le moins rcemment est remplac par le nouveau. Conseils Si aucun appareil mobile na t jumel
(par exemple, immdiatement aprs lachat du systme), le systme passe en mode de jumelage simplement en changeant lentre lentre BT. Effectuez le jumelage pour le deuxime appareil mobile et les suivants. 2 Sur lappareil mobile, recherchez le systme en effectuant lopration de jumelage. La liste dappareils BLUETOOTH recherchs apparat lcran de lappareil mobile. Pour la mthode de jumelage de lappareil BLUETOOTH lappareil mobile, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions de lappareil mobile. 3 Jumelez le systme et lappareil mobile en slectionnant HT-
G700 dans la liste lcran de lappareil mobile. Si un code est demand, entrez 0000 . 4 Assurez-vous que le tmoin BLUETOOTH de la barre de haut-
parleurs sallume en bleu. Une connexion est tablie entre le systme et lappareil mobile. 5 Dmarrez la lecture audio avec lapplication musicale sur lappareil mobile connect. Le son est mis par le systme. 6 Rglez le volume (page 26). 28FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 29 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM coute de la musique partir de lappareil jumel teignez le systme ou lappareil mobile. Conseil Lorsque la connexion nest pas tablie, slectionnez HT-G700 sur lappareil mobile. INPUT 1 Activez la fonction BLUETOOTH de lappareil mobile. 2 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur INPUT pour slectionner [BT]. Le systme se reconnecte automatiquement lappareil mobile auquel il tait connect le plus rcemment. 3 Assurez-vous que le tmoin BLUETOOTH de la barre de haut-
parleurs sallume en bleu. Une connexion est tablie entre le systme et lappareil mobile. 4 Dmarrez la lecture audio avec lapplication musicale sur lappareil mobile connect. Le son est mis par le systme. 5 Rglez le volume (page 26). Pour dconnecter lappareil mobile Effectuez lune des actions suivantes. Dsactivez la fonction BLUETOOTH de lappareil mobile. Rglez [BT] - [POWER] [OFF]
(page 40). 29FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 30 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Rglage de la qualit sonore Apprcier une exprience ambiophonique immersive (IMMERSIVE AE) Vous pouvez vous sentir immerg par le son restitu non seulement lhorizontale, mais galement depuis le haut en utilisant le Moteur ambiophonique vertical* efficacement pour les modes sonores (page 31). Cette fonction peut galement fonctionner pour les signaux 2.0 canaux comme ceux des missions de tlvision.
* Le Moteur ambiophonique vertical propose une technologie de traitement de champ acoustique numrique de haute prcision dveloppe par Sony, qui produit virtuellement un champ acoustique dans le sens de la hauteur en plus dun champ acoustique dans le sens horizontal en utilisant uniquement les enceintes avant, sans ncessiter denceintes suprieures. Vous navez pas installer denceintes au plafond pour apprcier un son avec une prsence riche, indpendamment de la hauteur du plafond. En plus de permettre une coute ambiophonique amliore, cette fonction est trs peu affecte par la forme de la pice, car elle nutilise pas le son reflt par les murs. IMMERSIVE AE 1 Appuyez sur IMMERSIVE AE pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Affichage du panneau avant
[IAE.ON]
[IAE.OFF]
Fonction Active la fonction ambiophonique verticale. Dsactive la fonction ambiophonique verticale. Remarques Leffet ambiophonique provenant de toutes les directions varie selon la source sonore. Un dcalage peut se produire entre le son et limage selon la source sonore. Si votre tlviseur est muni dune fonction permettant de retarder limage, utilisez-la pour effectuer lajustement. La fonction IMMERSIVE AE est disponible uniquement lorsque le rglage [AUDIO] -
[EFFECT] est rgl [SOUND MODE ON]
(page 38). 30FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 31 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Rglage de leffet sonore adapt aux sources sonores (Mode sonore) Vous pouvez facilement profiter des effets sonores prprogramms adapts diffrents types de sources sonores. Touche CINEMA MUSIC STANDARD AUTO SOUND MUSIC CINEMA 1 Appuyez sur lune des touches de slection de mode sonore (AUTO SOUND, STANDARD, CINEMA, MUSIC) pour slectionner le mode sonore. Fonction Touche AUTO SOUND [AUTO SOUND]
apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. Le rglage de mode sonore appropri est automatiquement slectionn parmi STANDARD, CINEMA ou MUSIC.
[STANDARD]
apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. Le son dune mission de tlvision est clairement audible. STANDARD Fonction
[CINEMA] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. Vous vous sentez immerg par le son qui voyage derrire vous et entoure tout votre corps. Ce mode est appropri pour le visionnement de films.
[MUSIC] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. La vivacit et la brillance sonores sont exprimes en dtail. Ce mode est appropri pour lcoute de la musique de manire favoriser les mouvements. Remarques La fonction de mode sonore est dsactive lorsque le rglage [AUDIO] -
[EFFECT] est dfini un rglage autre que
[SOUND MODE ON] (page 38). Un dcalage peut se produire entre le son et limage selon la source sonore. Si votre tlviseur est muni dune fonction permettant de retarder limage, utilisez-la pour effectuer lajustement. 31FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 32 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Amliorer la clart des dialogues (VOICE) Apprcier un son clair avec un volume faible pendant la nuit (NIGHT) VOICE 1 Appuyez sur VOICE pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Affichage du panneau avant
[Vo.ON]
[Vo.OFF]
Fonction Les dialogues sont facilement audibles grce lamlioration de la plage de dialogue. Dsactive la fonction de mode voix. NIGHT 1 Appuyez sur NIGHT pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Affichage du panneau avant
[N.ON]
[N.OFF]
Fonction met le son un volume faible avec une perte minimale de fidlit et de clart des dialogues. Dsactive la fonction de mode nuit. Remarque Lorsque vous teignez le systme, ce rglage passe automatiquement [N.OFF]. 32FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 33 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM
(page 32) Informations de diffusion Le rglage actuel change dans lordre inverse lorsque vous appuyez sur . Vrifier les rglages sonores actuels
(DISPLAY) Vous pouvez vrifier les rglages actuels du mode sonore, de la fonction IMMERSIVE AE, du mode voix, du mode nuit et des informations de diffusion actuelles. DISPLAY
/
1 Appuyez sur DISPLAY. Le rglage actuel apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. 2 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur pour slectionner loption souhaite. Le rglage actuel affich change dans lordre suivant. Mode sonore (page 31) IMMERSIVE AE (page 30) Mode voix (page 32) Mode nuit 33FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\080HDM.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 34 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Utilisation de la fonction Contrle pour HDMI Utilisation de la fonction Contrle pour HDMI Le raccordement dun appareil tel quun tlviseur ou lecteur Blu-ray Disc compatible avec la fonction Contrle pour HDMI* laide dun cble HDMI vous permet de contrler facilement lappareil en utilisant une tlcommande de tlviseur. Les fonctions suivantes peuvent tre utilises avec la fonction Contrle pour HDMI. Fonction de mise en arrt du systme Fonction de contrle audio du systme eARC/ARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel/Audio Return Channel) Fonction de lecture laide dune touche Rglage dconomie dnergie HDMI Standby Through Remarque Ces fonctions pourraient fonctionner avec des appareils autres que ceux fabriqus par Sony, mais le fonctionnement nest pas garanti.
* Contrle pour HDMI est une norme utilise par CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) pour permettre aux appareils HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) de se contrler entre eux. 34FR Prparation pour lutilisation de la fonction Contrle pour HDMI Rglez [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI]
[ON] (page 39). Le rglage par dfaut est [ON]. Activez les rglages de fonction Contrle pour HDMI pour le tlviseur et lautre appareil raccord au systme. Conseil Si vous activez la fonction Contrle pour HDMI ( BRAVIA Sync) pendant lutilisation dun tlviseur fabriqu par Sony, la fonction Contrle pour HDMI du systme est galement active automatiquement. Fonction de mise en arrt du systme Lorsque vous teignez le tlviseur, le systme steint automatiquement. Remarque Lappareil raccord pourrait ne pas steindre, selon ltat de lappareil. Fonction de contrle audio du systme Si vous mettez le systme en marche pendant que vous regardez le tlviseur, le son du tlviseur sera mis par les enceintes du systme. Le volume du systme peut tre rgl laide de la tlcommande du tlviseur. Lorsque vous mettez le tlviseur en marche, le systme sallume automatiquement et le son du tlviseur est mis par les enceintes du systme. Les oprations peuvent galement tre effectues partir du menu du tlviseur. Pour plus de dtails, HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\080HDM.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 35 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Remarques Les chiffres indiquant le niveau de volume du systme saffichent lcran du tlviseur, selon le tlviseur. Les chiffres indiquant le volume sur le tlviseur peuvent tre diffrents des chiffres indiqus sur laffichage du panneau avant du systme. Selon les rglages du tlviseur, la fonction de contrle audio du systme pourrait ne pas tre disponible. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Selon le tlviseur, si le son du tlviseur tait mis par les haut-parleurs du tlviseur la dernire fois que vous lavez regard, le systme pourrait ne pas sallumer par interverrouillage avec lalimentation du tlviseur lorsque vous allumez le tlviseur. eARC/ARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel/Audio Return Channel) Si le systme est raccord une prise HDMI IN du tlviseur compatible avec eARC ou ARC, vous pouvez couter le son du tlviseur laide des enceintes du systme sans raccorder de cble numrique optique. Sur le systme, rglez [HDMI] - [EARC]
[ON] (page 39). Le rglage par dfaut est [ON]. Remarques Activez la fonction eARC ou ARC du tlviseur. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-
vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Si le tlviseur nest pas compatible avec eARC ou ARC, un cble numrique optique (non fourni) doit tre raccord
(reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage fourni). Fonction de lecture laide dune touche Lors de la lecture dun contenu sur un appareil (lecteur Blu-ray Disc, PlayStation4 , etc.) raccord au systme, le systme et le tlviseur sallument automatiquement, lentre du systme passe lentre HDMI et le son est mis par les enceintes du systme. Remarques Si [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] est rgl
[ON] ou [AUTO] et que le son du tlviseur tait mis par les haut-parleurs du tlviseur la dernire fois que vous lavez regard, le systme pourrait ne pas sallumer; le son et limage pourraient tre mis par le tlviseur, mme si le contenu de lappareil est en cours de lecture (page 39). Selon le tlviseur, le dbut du contenu en cours de lecture pourrait ne pas safficher correctement. Rglage dconomie dnergie HDMI Standby Through HDMI Standby Through est une fonction vous permettant dapprcier le son et limage dun appareil raccord sans allumer le systme. Vous pouvez rduire la consommation en mode de veille du systme en rglant
[HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] [AUTO]
(page 39). Le rglage par dfaut est
[AUTO]. Remarque Si limage dun appareil raccord au systme ne saffiche pas sur le tlviseur, rglez [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH]
[ON]. Si vous raccordez un tlviseur qui nest pas fabriqu par Sony, nous vous recommandons de slectionner ce rglage. 35FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\080HDM.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 36 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Utilisation de la fonction BRAVIA Sync En plus de la fonction Contrle pour HDMI, vous pouvez galement utiliser la fonction BRAVIA Sync, notamment le mode sonore/la fonction de slection de scne. Remarque Cette fonction est une fonction exclusive de Sony. Cette fonction ne peut fonctionner quavec des produits fabriqus par Sony. Sound mode/Fonction de slection de scne Le mode sonore du systme est commut automatiquement selon le rglage de la fonction de slection de scne ou du mode sonore du tlviseur. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Rglez le mode sonore [AUTO SOUND]
(page 31). 36FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1)
1 | HT-G700 Manual new 20191118 Part02 | Users Manual | 3.36 MiB |
C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 37 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Modification des rglages Utilisation du menu de rglage Vous pouvez rgler les options suivantes dans le menu de rglage. Vos rglages sont conservs mme si vous dconnectez le cordon dalimentation CA. 1 Appuyez sur MENU pour accder au mode de menu de rglage. 2 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur / pour slectionner loption, puis appuyez sur Loption du menu de rglage apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. ENTER. Vous pouvez slectionner les options suivantes.
[SPEAKER] (Rglages denceinte) (page 37)
[AUDIO] (Rglages audio) (page 38)
[HDMI] (Rglages HDMI) (page 39)
[BT] (Rglages BLUETOOTH) (page 40)
[SYSTEM] (Rglages systme) (page 40)
[RESET] (Rinitialisation du systme) (page 40)
[UPDATE] (Mise jour du systme) (page 40) 3 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur / pour slectionner le rglage, puis appuyez sur ENTER. Pour revenir au niveau suprieur, appuyez sur BACK. 4 Appuyez sur MENU pour quitter le mode de menu de rglage. Options du menu de rglage Options
[SPEAKER]
(Rglages denceinte)
[LINK]
(Mode de liaison)
[SUBWOOFER INFO]
(Informations de version du caisson de graves) Fonction
[START] : Permet deffectuer la connexion manuelle du caisson de graves au systme. Pour plus de dtails, consultez Connexion du caisson de graves (page 16). Pour annuler la connexion manuelle, appuyez sur BACK.
[CANCEL] : Permet de revenir au niveau suprieur [LINK]. Permet dafficher les informations de version du caisson de graves.
[LATEST] : La version du caisson de graves est la plus rcente.
[PLEASE UPDATE] : La version du caisson de graves nest pas la plus rcente.
[NOT CONNECTED] : Le caisson de graves nest pas connect au systme. 37FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 38 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Options
[AUDIO]
(Rglages audio)
[DRC]
(DRC Audio)
[SYNC]
(A/V Sync)
[DIALOG]
(Contrle des dialogues DTS)
[EFFECT]
(Effet sonore) Fonction Vous pouvez compresser la gamme dynamique de la plage sonore.
[AUTO] : Compresse automatiquement les sons encods en Dolby TrueHD.
[ON] : Reproduit la plage sonore Dolby et DTS en respectant la gamme dynamique prvue par lingnieur du son au moment de lenregistrement.
[OFF] : Aucune compression nest applique la gamme dynamique. Lorsque le son ne correspond pas aux images affiches sur lcran du tlviseur, vous pouvez rgler le dcalage entre limage et le son. Vous pouvez slectionner une valeur comprise entre 0 ms et 120 ms par incrments de 40 ms. Le rglage par dfaut est [0ms]. Remarque Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque lentre HDMI est slectionne. En rglant le volume des dialogues, vous pouvez entendre facilement les dialogues, car ils ressortent des bruits ambiants. Cette fonction fonctionne pendant la lecture dun contenu compatible avec la fonction de contrle des dialogues DTS:X. Vous pouvez slectionner une valeur comprise entre 0 dB et 6 dB par incrments de 1 dB. Le rglage par dfaut est [0dB]. Vous pouvez slectionner des effets sonores, y compris le mode sonore.
[SOUND MODE ON] : Le Moteur ambiophonique vertical amliore les canaux denceintes ambiophoniques et en hauteur pour crer un effet ambiophonique virtuel immersif et enveloppant comme le mode sonore (page 31) et le son ambiophonique vertical (page 30).
[DOLBY SPEAKER VIRTUALIZER] : Le Virtualiseur denceintes Dolby amliore les canaux denceintes ambiophoniques et en hauteur pour crer un effet ambiophonique virtuel immersif et enveloppant. Dsactive les effets sonores pour le format DTS.
[DTS VITRUAL:X] : DTS Virtual:X est active. La technologie DTS Virtual:X utilise par le systme vous donne limpression de vous trouver au centre denceintes multiples. Dsactive les effets sonores pour le format Dolby.
[NO EFFECT] : Dsactive les effets sonores. 38FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 39 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Options
[HDMI]
(Rglages HDMI)
[CONTROL FOR HDMI]
[STANDBY THROUGH]
[TV AUDIO]
[EARC]
Fonction
[ON] : La fonction Contrle pour HDMI est active. Les appareils raccords laide dun cble HDMI peuvent se contrler entre eux.
[OFF] : Dsactiv Cette fonction est disponible lorsque vous rglez [CONTROL FOR HDMI] [ON].
[AUTO] : Les signaux sont mis par la prise HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) du systme lorsque le tlviseur est allum pendant que le systme est teint. La consommation en mode de veille du systme peut tre davantage rduite que lors du rglage [ON] en teignant le tlviseur raccord.
[ON] : Les signaux sont toujours mis par la prise HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) du systme lorsque le systme est teint. Si vous raccordez un tlviseur qui nest pas fabriqu par Sony, nous vous recommandons de slectionner ce rglage.
[OFF] : Les signaux ne sont pas mis par la prise HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) du systme lorsque le systme est teint. Allumez le systme pour apprcier sur le tlviseur le contenu dun appareil raccord au systme. La consommation en mode de veille du systme peut tre davantage rduite que lors du rglage [ON]. Vous pouvez slectionner la prise dentre utilise pour lcoute sonore du tlviseur.
[AUTO] : Permet dcouter le son provenant de la prise HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) en priorit lorsque vous raccordez le tlviseur aux prises HDMI OUT (TV eARC/
ARC) et TV IN (OPT).
[OPTICAL] : Permet dcouter le son provenant de la prise TV IN (OPT) utilise pour lentre du tlviseur. Vous pouvez transfrer les signaux dun contenu audio bas sur objet, tel que Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD et DTS:X, ou dun contenu LPCM multicanal laide dun cble HDMI en raccordant le systme et un tlviseur compatible avec eARC.
[ON] : Active la fonction eARC. Utilisez ce rglage lorsque le systme est raccord un tlviseur compatible avec eARC.
[OFF] : Utilisez ce rglage lorsque le systme nest pas raccord un tlviseur compatible avec eARC. Remarque Lorsque [EARC] est rgl [ON], confirmez le rglage eARC adquat du tlviseur raccord. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Vous pouvez slectionner le format de signal HDMI pour le signal dentre. Pour plus de dtails, consultez Rglage du format de signal HDMI pour regarder un contenu vido 4K
(page 23).
[FORMAT]
(Format de signal HDMI) 39FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 40 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Options
[BT]
(Rglages BLUETOOTH)
[POWER]
(Alimentation BLUETOOTH)
[STANDBY]
[AAC CODEC]
[SYSTEM]
(Rglages systme)
[IR REPEATER]
[AUTO STANDBY]
[VERSION]
(Informations de version)
[ALL RESET]
[START]
[RESET]
(Rinitialisati on du systme)
[UPDATE]
(Mise jour du systme) Fonction Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction BLUETOOTH.
[ON] : Active la fonction BLUETOOTH.
[OFF] : Dsactive la fonction BLUETOOTH. Remarque Lorsque la fonction BLUETOOTH est dsactive, lentre BLUETOOTH est ignore lors de la slection de lentre en appuyant sur INPUT. Lorsque le systme contient des informations de jumelage, vous pouvez allumer le systme et couter la musique dun appareil BLUETOOTH, mme si le systme est en mode de veille, en activant le mode de veille BLUETOOTH.
[ON] : Le mode de veille BLUETOOTH est activ.
[OFF] : Le mode de veille BLUETOOTH est dsactiv. Remarque Pendant que le mode de veille BLUETOOTH est activ, la consommation dnergie en mode de veille augmente. Vous pouvez apprcier un son de haute qualit lorsque la fonction AAC est active et que votre appareil prend en charge AAC.
[ON] : Active le codec AAC.
[OFF] : Dsactive le codec AAC.
[ON] : Les signaux de tlcommande du tlviseur sont envoys depuis larrire de la barre de haut-parleurs.
[OFF] : Dsactive la fonction. Pour plus de dtails, consultez Lorsque la tlcommande du tlviseur ne fonctionne pas (page 17).
[ON] : Active la fonction de veille automatique. Lorsque vous nutilisez pas le systme pendant environ 20 minutes, le systme passe automatiquement en mode de veille.
[OFF] : Dsactiv. Les informations de la version de micrologiciel actuelle du systme apparaissent dans laffichage du panneau avant. Vous pouvez rtablir les rglages dusine du systme. Pour plus de dtails, consultez Rinitialisation du systme
(page 50). Vous pouvez dmarrer une mise jour logicielle aprs avoir connect au systme la mmoire USB sur laquelle le fichier de mise jour logicielle est stock. Lorsquune mise jour logicielle est disponible, nous vous en informons sur le site Web suivant :
https://www.sony.com/am/support Remarques Avant la mise jour, assurez-vous que le caisson de graves est allum et connect au systme. Vous pouvez mettre jour le logiciel du systme en maintenant enfonces les touches et BLUETOOTH de la barre de haut-parleurs pendant 7 secondes.
[CANCEL]
Annule la mise jour logicielle. 40FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 41 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM sur une touche quelconque, puis il steint de nouveau lorsque vous nutilisez pas le systme pendant environ 10 secondes. Toutefois, dans certains cas, laffichage du panneau avant pourrait ne pas steindre. En pareil cas, la luminosit de laffichage du panneau avant est la mme quen mode [DARK]. Modification de la luminosit de laffichage du panneau avant et des tmoins (DIMMER) Vous pouvez modifier la luminosit des lments suivants. Affichage du panneau avant Tmoin BLUETOOTH Tmoin dalimentation du caisson de graves DIMMER 1 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur DIMMER pour slectionner le rglage souhait. Affichage du panneau avant
[BRIGHT]
[DARK]
[OFF]
Fonction Laffichage du panneau avant et le tmoin BLUETOOTH sallument clairement. Laffichage du panneau avant et le tmoin BLUETOOTH sallument sombrement. Laffichage du panneau avant est teint. Remarque Laffichage du panneau avant est teint lorsque [OFF] est slectionn. Il sallume automatiquement lorsque vous appuyez 41FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 42 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM conomie dnergie en mode de veille Vrifiez que vous avez effectu les rglages suivants :
[SYSTEM] - [AUTO STANDBY] est rgl
[OFF] (page 40). (Le rglage par dfaut est [OFF].)
[BT] - [STANDBY] est rgl [OFF]
(page 40). (Le rglage par dfaut est
[ON].) 42FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 43 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Dpannage Dpannage Si le systme ne fonctionne pas correctement, procdez dans lordre suivant. 1 Recherchez la cause du problme et la solution en utilisant ce guide de dpannage. 2 Rinitialisez le systme. Tous les rglages du systme retournent leur tat initial. Pour plus de dtails, consultez Rinitialisation du systme (page 50). Si le problme persiste, consultez votre dtaillant Sony le plus proche. Lorsque vous demandez une rparation, apportez la barre de haut-
parleurs et le caisson de graves, mme si un seul lment semble prsenter un problme. Alimentation Le systme ne sallume pas. Vrifiez que le cordon dalimentation CA est correctement connect. Dconnectez le cordon dalimentation CA de la prise murale, puis reconnectez-le aprs quelques minutes. Le systme steint automatiquement. La fonction de veille automatique est active. Rglez [SYSTEM] - [AUTO STANDBY] [OFF] (page 40). Le systme ne sallume pas lorsque vous allumez le tlviseur. Rglez [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI]
[ON] (page 39). Le tlviseur doit prendre en charge la fonction Contrle pour HDMI. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Vrifiez les rglages de haut-parleur du tlviseur. Lalimentation du systme est synchronise avec les rglages de haut-parleur du tlviseur. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Selon le tlviseur, si le son tait mis par les haut-parleurs du tlviseur lors de la dernire utilisation, le systme pourrait ne pas sallumer par interverrouillage avec lalimentation du tlviseur lorsque vous allumez le tlviseur. Le systme steint lorsque vous teignez le tlviseur. Vrifiez le rglage de [HDMI] -
[CONTROL FOR HDMI] (page 39). Lorsque la fonction Contrle pour HDMI est active et que lentre du systme est lentre TV ou HDMI, le systme steint automatiquement lorsque vous teignez le tlviseur. Le systme ne steint pas lorsque vous teignez le tlviseur. Vrifiez le rglage de [HDMI] -
[CONTROL FOR HDMI] (page 39). Pour teindre le systme automatiquement par interverrouillage avec lalimentation du tlviseur, activez la fonction Contrle pour HDMI. Cette fonction fonctionne uniquement si lentre du systme est lentre TV ou HDMI. Le systme ne steint pas automatiquement pendant que lentre BLUETOOTH est slectionne. Le tlviseur doit prendre en charge la fonction Contrle pour HDMI. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Il nest pas possible dteindre le systme. Le systme pourrait tre en mode de dmonstration. Pour annuler le mode 43FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 44 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM de dmonstration, rinitialisez le systme. Maintenez enfonces les touches (alimentation) et
(volume) de la barre de haut-parleurs pendant plus de 5 secondes
(page 50). Image Il ny a pas dimage ou limage nest pas mise correctement. Slectionnez lentre approprie
(page 25). Lorsquil ny a pas dimage pendant que lentre TV est slectionne, slectionnez le canal de tlvision souhait en utilisant la tlcommande du tlviseur. Lorsquil ny a pas dimage pendant que lentre HDMI est slectionne, appuyez sur la touche de lecture de lappareil raccord. Dconnectez le cble HDMI, puis raccordez-le de nouveau. Assurez-
vous que le cble est fermement insr. Lorsquil ny a pas dimage provenant de lappareil raccord ou que limage provenant de lappareil raccord nest pas mise correctement, rglez
[HDMI] - [FORMAT] [STANDARD]
(page 39). Certaines images dun type dappareil plus ancien pourraient ne pas safficher correctement pendant que [HDMI] - [FORMAT] est rgl
[ENHANCED]. Si aucune image napparat lors du raccordement de lappareil avec le cble HDMI, assurez-vous que lappareil est raccord la prise HDMI IN et que le tlviseur est raccord la prise HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC). Le systme est raccord un appareil dentre non conforme HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Dans ce cas, vrifiez les caractristiques de lappareil raccord. Le contenu 3D de la prise HDMI IN napparat pas sur lcran du tlviseur. Selon le tlviseur ou lappareil vido, il est possible que le contenu 3D ne saffiche pas. Vrifiez le format vido HDMI pris en charge (page 54). Le contenu vido 4K de la prise HDMI IN napparat pas sur lcran du tlviseur. Selon le tlviseur ou lappareil vido, il est possible que le contenu vido 4K ne saffiche pas. Vrifiez la fonctionnalit vido et les rglages de votre tlviseur et de lappareil vido. Limage pourrait ne pas safficher correctement si [HDMI] - [FORMAT]
est rgl [ENHANCED]. En pareil cas, rglez le format [STANDARD]
(page 39). Utilisez un cble HDMI haute vitesse de qualit suprieure avec Ethernet prenant en charge 18 Gbit/s ou un cble HDMI haute vitesse avec Ethernet (page 54). Si le systme est raccord une prise HDMI qui nest pas compatible avec HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3, [ERROR: TV DOES NOT SUPPORT HDCP2.2 OR 2.3]
apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. Effectuez le raccordement la prise HDMI compatible avec HDCP2.2 ou HDCP2.3 du tlviseur 4K ou de lappareil 4K. Limage ne saffiche pas sur la totalit de lcran du tlviseur. Le format dimage du mdia est fixe. Limage et le son de lappareil raccord au systme ne sont pas mis par le tlviseur lorsque le systme nest pas allum. Rglez [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH]
[AUTO] ou [ON] (page 39). Allumez le systme, puis commutez lentre celle utilise par lappareil en cours de lecture. 44FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 45 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Les contenus HDR naffichent pas une gamme dynamique leve. Vrifiez les rglages du tlviseur et de lappareil raccord. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions de votre tlviseur et de lappareil raccord. Certains appareils pourraient convertir les contenus HDR en SDR si la bande passante nest pas suffisante. En pareil cas, assurez-vous que [HDMI] - [FORMAT] est rgl
[ENHANCED] (page 39) si le tlviseur et lappareil raccord prennent en charge une bande passante allant jusqu 18 Gbit/s. Lorsque
[ENHANCED] est rgl, assurez-vous dutiliser un cble HDMI haute vitesse de qualit suprieure avec Ethernet prenant en charge 18 Gbit/s
(page 54). Son Le systme ne peut pas se connecter un tlviseur avec la fonction BLUETOOTH. Lorsque vous raccordez le systme et le tlviseur avec le cble HDMI
(fourni), la connexion BLUETOOTH est annule. Dconnectez le cble HDMI, puis effectuez la procdure de connexion depuis le dbut (page 19). Aucun son du tlviseur nest mis par le systme. Vrifiez le type et le raccordement du cble HDMI ou du cble numrique optique raccord au systme et au tlviseur (reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage fourni). Dconnectez les cbles qui sont connects entre le tlviseur et le systme, puis reconnectez-les fermement. Dconnectez les cordons dalimentation CA du tlviseur et du systme des prises CA, puis reconnectez-les. Lorsque le systme et le tlviseur sont raccords laide du cble HDMI uniquement, vrifiez les points suivants. La prise HDMI du tlviseur raccord porte ltiquette eARC ou ARC . La fonction Contrle pour HDMI du tlviseur est active. La fonction eARC ou ARC du tlviseur est active.
[HDMI] - [EARC] est rgl [ON]
(page 39).
[HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] est rgl [ON] (page 39). Si votre tlviseur nest pas compatible avec eARC, rglez [HDMI]
- [EARC] [OFF] (page 39). Si votre tlviseur nest pas compatible avec eARC ou ARC, raccordez un cble numrique optique (non fourni) (reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage fourni). Si le tlviseur nest pas compatible avec eARC ou ARC, le son du tlviseur ne sera pas mis par le systme, mme si le systme est raccord la prise HDMI IN du tlviseur. Appuyez plusieurs fois sur INPUT pour slectionner lentre TV
(page 25). Augmentez le volume du systme ou annulez la fonction de coupure du son. Si le son dun dcodeur de cblodistribution/rcepteur satellite raccord au tlviseur nest pas mis, raccordez lappareil une prise HDMI IN du systme et commutez lentre du systme HDMI (reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage fourni). Selon lordre de mise en marche du tlviseur et du systme, il est possible que le son du systme soit coup et que [MUTED] apparaisse dans laffichage du panneau avant. Si cela se produit, allumez dabord le tlviseur, puis le systme. Rglez le paramtre de haut-parleurs du tlviseur (BRAVIA) Systme audio. Reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions de votre tlviseur 45FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 46 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM pour savoir comment configurer le tlviseur. Limage et le son de lappareil raccord au systme ne sont pas mis par le tlviseur lorsque le systme nest pas allum. Rglez [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH]
[AUTO] ou [ON] (page 39). Allumez le systme, puis commutez lentre celle utilise par lappareil en cours de lecture. Le son est mis par le systme et le tlviseur. Coupez le son du systme ou du tlviseur. Le son mis par le systme nest pas au mme niveau que celui du tlviseur, mme si les valeurs de niveau de volume du systme et du tlviseur sont identiques. Si la fonction Contrle pour HDMI est active, la valeur de niveau de volume du systme pourrait apparatre sur votre tlviseur en tant que valeur de volume du tlviseur. Les niveaux sonores mis par le systme et le tlviseur peuvent tre diffrents, mme si les valeurs de niveau de volume du systme et du tlviseur sont identiques. Les niveaux sonores mis par le systme et le tlviseur varient en fonction de leurs caractristiques de traitement sonore; il ne sagit pas dun problme de fonctionnement. Le son est interrompu pendant le visionnement dune mission de tlvision ou dun contenu sur un disque Blu-ray, etc. Vrifiez le rglage du mode sonore
(page 31). Si le mode sonore est rgl
[AUTO SOUND], le son pourrait tre interrompu lorsque le mode sonore est modifi automatiquement en fonction des informations de lmission en cours de visionnement. Si vous ne souhaitez pas modifier le 46FR mode sonore automatiquement, rglez le mode sonore un rglage autre que [AUTO SOUND]. Le son du tlviseur mis par le systme est dcal par rapport limage. Rglez [AUDIO] - [SYNC] [0ms] si le paramtre est rgl dans la plage entre 40 ms et 120 ms (page 38). Un dcalage peut se produire entre le son et limage selon la source sonore. Si votre tlviseur est muni dune fonction permettant de retarder limage, utilisez-la pour effectuer lajustement. Aucun son ou seulement un son trs faible de lappareil raccord est mis par le systme. Appuyez sur la touche + de la tlcommande et vrifiez le niveau de volume (page 12). Appuyez sur la touche ou + de la tlcommande pour annuler la fonction de coupure du son (page 12). Assurez-vous que la source dentre est slectionne correctement. Essayez dautres sources dentre en appuyant plusieurs fois sur INPUT
(page 25). Vrifiez que tous les cbles et cordons du systme et de lappareil raccord sont fermement insrs. Lors de la lecture dun contenu compatible avec la technologie de protection des droits dauteur
(HDCP), il pourrait ne pas tre mis par le systme. Rglez [HDMI] - [FORMAT]
[STANDARD] (page 23). Leffet ambiophonique ne peut pas tre obtenu. Selon le rglage de signal dentre et de mode sonore, le traitement sonore ambiophonique pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. Leffet ambiophonique peut tre subtil, selon le programme ou le disque. Pour effectuer la lecture du son multicanal, vrifiez le rglage de HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 47 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM sortie audio numrique sur lappareil raccord au systme. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions fourni avec lappareil raccord. Caisson de graves Aucun son ou seulement un son trs faible est mis par le caisson de graves. Assurez-vous que le tmoin dalimentation du caisson de graves est allum en vert ou ambre. Si le tmoin dalimentation du caisson de graves ne sallume pas, essayez de procder comme suit. Assurez-vous que le cordon dalimentation CA du caisson de graves est raccord correctement. Appuyez sur la touche
(alimentation) du caisson de graves pour le mettre en marche. Si le tmoin dalimentation du caisson de graves clignote lentement en vert ou ambre, ou sil sallume en rouge, essayez de procder comme suit. Rapprochez le caisson de graves de la barre de haut-parleurs de manire ce que le tmoin dalimentation du caisson de graves sallume en vert ou ambre. Suivez les tapes de la section Connexion du caisson de graves
(page 16). Si le tmoin dalimentation du caisson de graves clignote en rouge, appuyez sur la touche
(alimentation) du caisson de graves pour lteindre et vrifiez si les ouvertures daration du caisson de graves sont bloques. Le caisson de graves est conu pour reproduire les sons graves ou basses frquences. Si les sources dentre comportent trs peu de sons graves
(par exemple, une mission de tlvision), le son mis par le caisson de graves peut tre difficile entendre. Dmarrez la lecture de la musique de dmonstration intgre en suivant les tapes ci-dessous et vrifiez que le son est mis par le caisson de graves. Maintenez enfonce la touche de la barre de haut-parleurs pendant 5 secondes. La lecture de la musique de dmonstration intgre dmarre. Appuyez de nouveau sur
. La musique de dmonstration intgre sarrte et le systme retourne ltat prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche SW + de la tlcommande pour augmenter le volume du caisson de graves
(page 12). Dsactivez le mode nuit (page 32). Le son est saccad ou comporte des parasites. Si un appareil qui gnre des ondes lectromagntiques se trouve proximit, par exemple un appareil LAN sans fil ou un four micro-ondes en cours dutilisation, loignez-le du systme. Si un obstacle se trouve entre la barre de haut-parleurs et le caisson de graves, dplacez ou retirez-le. Ne couvrez pas le dessus de la barre de haut-parleurs avec des objets mtalliques tels quun cadre de tlviseur, etc. Les fonctions sans fil peuvent devenir instables. Placez la barre de haut-parleurs et le caisson de graves aussi prs que possible. Faites passer la frquence LAN sans fil de tout routeur LAN sans fil ou ordinateur situ proximit la plage 5 GHz. Faites passer la connexion rseau du tlviseur ou du lecteur Blu-ray Disc de la connexion sans fil cble. 47FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 48 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Connexion dun priphrique USB Le priphrique USB nest pas reconnu. Essayez deffectuer les actions suivantes :
teignez le systme. Retirez et reconnectez le priphrique USB. Allumez le systme. Assurez-vous que le priphrique USB est correctement connect au port UPDATE. Vrifiez si le priphrique USB ou un cble est endommag. Des fichiers stocks sur une mmoire USB ne sont pas lus. Le port USB du systme est destin uniquement aux mises jour logicielles (page 40). Le systme ne prend pas en charge la lecture USB. Connexion dun appareil mobile Impossible deffectuer le jumelage. Rapprochez le systme et lappareil BLUETOOTH. Assurez-vous que le systme ne reoit aucune interfrence provenant dun appareil LAN sans fil, dun autre appareil sans fil 2,4 GHz ou dun four micro-ondes. Si un appareil qui gnre un rayonnement lectromagntique se trouve proximit, loignez lappareil du systme. La connexion BLUETOOTH ne peut pas tre effectue. Assurez-vous que le tmoin BLUETOOTH de la barre de haut-
parleurs sallume (page 27). Assurez-vous que lappareil BLUETOOTH connecter est allum et 48FR que la fonction BLUETOOTH est active. Rapprochez le systme et lappareil BLUETOOTH. Jumelez de nouveau le systme et lappareil BLUETOOTH. Il pourrait dabord tre ncessaire dannuler le jumelage avec le systme laide de votre appareil BLUETOOTH. Il est possible que les informations de jumelage soient supprimes. Procdez de nouveau au jumelage
(page 27). Le son de lappareil mobile BLUETOOTH connect nest pas mis par le systme. Assurez-vous que le tmoin BLUETOOTH de la barre de haut-
parleurs sallume (page 27). Rapprochez le systme et lappareil BLUETOOTH. Si un appareil qui gnre un rayonnement lectromagntique se trouve proximit, par exemple un appareil LAN sans fil, un autre appareil BLUETOOTH ou un four micro-ondes, loignez lappareil du systme. Retirez tout obstacle se trouvant entre le systme et lappareil BLUETOOTH ou loignez le systme de lobstacle. Repositionnez lappareil BLUETOOTH connect. Faites passer la frquence LAN sans fil de tout routeur LAN sans fil ou ordinateur situ proximit la plage 5 GHz. Augmentez le volume sur lappareil BLUETOOTH connect. Tlcommande La tlcommande du systme ne fonctionne pas. Pointez la tlcommande vers le capteur de tlcommande sur la barre de haut-parleurs (page 12). HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 49 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Retirez tous les obstacles qui se trouvent entre la tlcommande et le systme. Remplacez les deux piles de la tlcommande par de nouvelles piles, si elles sont faibles. Assurez-vous dappuyer sur la bonne touche de la tlcommande. La tlcommande du tlviseur ne fonctionne pas. Ce problme pourrait tre rsolu en rglant [SYSTEM] - [IR REPEATER]
[ON] (page 40). Mise jour logicielle Vous ne pouvez pas effectuer la mise jour logicielle. Utilisez la mmoire USB sur laquelle le fichier de mise jour logicielle est stock pour effectuer la mise jour logicielle (page 40). Autres La fonction Contrle pour HDMI ne fonctionne pas correctement. Vrifiez le raccordement avec le systme (reportez-vous au Manuel de dmarrage fourni). Activez la fonction Contrle pour HDMI sur le tlviseur. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions du tlviseur. Attendez un instant, puis essayez de nouveau. Si vous dbranchez le systme, vous devrez attendre quelques instants avant deffectuer des oprations. Attendez au moins 15 secondes, puis essayez de nouveau. Assurez-vous que les appareils raccords au systme prennent en charge la fonction Contrle pour HDMI. Activez la fonction Contrle pour HDMI sur les appareils raccords au systme. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions de votre appareil. Le type et le nombre dappareils qui peuvent tre contrls par la fonction Contrle pour HDMI sont limits par la norme HDMI CEC comme suit :
Appareils denregistrement
(enregistreur Blu-ray Disc, enregistreur DVD, etc.) : jusqu 3 appareils Appareils de lecture (lecteur Blu-ray Disc, lecteur DVD, etc.) : jusqu 3 appareils Appareils de syntonisation : jusqu 4 appareils Systme audio (rcepteur/casque dcoute) : jusqu 1 appareil (utilis par le systme)
[PROTECT] clignote dans laffichage du panneau avant et le systme steint. Dconnectez le cordon dalimentation CA et assurez-vous que rien nobstrue les ouvertures daration du systme. Les capteurs du tlviseur ne fonctionnent pas correctement. Le systme peut bloquer certains capteurs (comme le capteur de luminosit), le rcepteur de tlcommande de votre tlviseur ou lmetteur de lunettes 3D
(transmission infrarouge) dun tlviseur 3D prenant en charge le systme de lunettes 3D infrarouge ou la communication sans fil. loignez le systme du tlviseur une distance suffisante pour permettre ces composants de fonctionner correctement. Pour connatre les emplacements des capteurs et du rcepteur de tlcommande, reportez-vous au manuel dinstructions fourni avec le tlviseur. 49FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 50 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM La fonction sans fil (fonction BLUETOOTH ou caisson de graves) est instable. Ne placez pas dobjets mtalliques autres quun tlviseur proximit du systme. De la musique avec laquelle vous ntes pas familier est soudainement audible. La musique dchantillon prinstalle pourrait tre en cours de lecture. Appuyez sur la touche de haut-parleurs pour arrter la lecture. de la barre Le systme ne fonctionne pas correctement. Le systme pourrait tre en mode de dmonstration. Pour annuler le mode de dmonstration, rinitialisez le systme. Maintenez enfonces les touches (alimentation) et
(volume) de la barre de haut-parleurs pendant plus de 5 secondes
(page 50). 50FR Rinitialisation du systme Si le systme ne fonctionne toujours pas correctement, rinitialisez-le en procdant comme suit. 1 Appuyez sur MENU.
[SPEAKER] apparat dans laffichage du panneau avant. 2 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [RESET], puis appuyez sur ENTER. 3 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [ALL RESET], puis appuyez sur ENTER. 4 Appuyez sur / pour slectionner [START], puis appuyez sur ENTER. Tous les rglages retournent leur tat initial. Pour annuler la rinitialisation Slectionnez [CANCEL] ltape 4. Si vous ne parvenez pas effectuer la rinitialisation laide du menu de rglage Maintenez enfonces les touches
(alimentation) et (volume) de la barre de haut-parleurs pendant plus de 5 secondes. Les rglages retournent leur tat initial. Remarque Lors de la rinitialisation, la liaison avec le caisson de graves pourrait tre interrompue. En pareil cas, effectuez Connexion du caisson de graves
(page 16). HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 51 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Informations complmentaires Caractristiques techniques Barre de haut-parleurs (SA-
G700) Section amplificateur Modles amricains :
PUISSANCE DE SORTIE ET DISTORSION HARMONIQUE TOTALE :
(FTC) Avant G + Avant D :
Avec des charges de 4 ohms, les deux canaux tant aliments, de 200 20 000 Hz; puissance efficace RMS minimale de 35 W par canal, avec une distorsion harmonique totale infrieure ou gale 1 %, de 250 mW la puissance de sortie nominale. PUISSANCE DE SORTIE (rfrence) Enceinte Avant G/Avant D/Centrale :
100 W (par canal 4 ohms, 1 kHz) Modles canadiens :
PUISSANCE DE SORTIE (nominale) Avant G + Avant D : 60 W + 60 W
( 4 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 % de DHT) PUISSANCE DE SORTIE (rfrence) Enceinte Avant G/Avant D/Centrale :
100 W (par canal 4 ohms, 1 kHz) Entres HDMI IN*
TV IN (OPT) Sorties HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC)*
* Les prises HDMI IN et HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) prennent en charge les protocoles HDCP2.2 et HDCP2.3. HDCP2.2 et HDCP2.3 reprsentent la technologie de protection des droits dauteur rcemment amliore qui est utilise pour protger des contenus tels que les films au format 4K. Section HDMI Connecteur Type A (19 broches) Section BLUETOOTH Systme de communication Spcification BLUETOOTH version 4.2 Sortie Spcification BLUETOOTH pour classe de puissance 1 Porte de communication maximale En ligne directe, environ 30 m1) Nombre maximum dappareils pouvant tre enregistrs 10 appareils Bande de frquence Bande 2,4 GHz (2,4000 GHz -
2,4835 GHz) Mthode de modulation FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum) Profils BLUETOOTH compatibles2) A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) Codecs pris en charge3) SBC4), AAC5) Plage de transmission (A2DP) 20 Hz - 20 000 Hz (Frquence dchantillonnage 32 kHz, 44,1 kHz, 48 kHz) 1) La plage relle varie en fonction de facteurs tels que la prsence dobstacles entre les appareils, les champs magntiques autour des fours micro-ondes, llectricit statique, lutilisation dun tlphone sans fil, la sensibilit de rception, le systme dexploitation, les applications logicielles, etc. 2) Les profils BLUETOOTH standard indiquent la fonction des communications BLUETOOTH entre les appareils. 3) Codec : Format de conversion et compression du signal audio 4) Abrviation pour codec de sous-bande 5) Abrviation pour codage audio avanc 51FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 52 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Section bloc denceinte Avant G/
Avant D/Centrale Systme denceinte Systme 3 haut-parleurs, suspension acoustique Haut-parleur Type conique de 45 mm 100 mm
(1 13/16 po 4 po) Gnralits Alimentation 120 V CA, 60 Hz Consommation dnergie En marche : 45 W Mode de veille : 0,5 W ou moins
(mode dconomie dnergie)
(Lorsque [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] et [BT] - [STANDBY] sont rgls
[OFF]) Mode de veille : 2 W ou moins*
(Lorsque [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] et [BT] - [STANDBY] sont rgls
[ON])
* Le systme passe automatiquement en mode dconomie dnergie lorsquil ny a aucun raccordement HDMI ni aucun historique de jumelage BLUETOOTH. Dimensions* (environ) (l/h/p) 980 mm 64 mm 108 mm (38 5/8 po 2 5/8 po 4 3/8 po)
* Excluant la partie saillante Poids (environ) 3,5 kg (7 lb 12 oz) Caisson de graves (SA-
WG700) PUISSANCE DE SORTIE (rfrence) 100 W ( 4 ohms, 100 Hz) Systme denceinte Systme de caisson de graves, Bass Reflex Haut-parleur Type conique de 160 mm (6 1/2 po) Alimentation 120 V CA, 60 Hz Consommation dnergie En marche : 20 W Mode de veille : 0,5 W ou moins Dimensions (environ) (l/h/p) 192 mm 387 mm 406 mm (7 5/8 po 15 1/4 po 16 po)
* Excluant la partie saillante Poids (environ) XX kg (XX lb XX oz) Partie metteur/rcepteur sans fil Bande de frquence 2,4 GHz (2,404 GHz - 2,476 GHz) Mthode de modulation GFSK La conception et les caractristiques techniques sont susceptibles dtre modifies sans pravis. 52FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 53 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Formats audio dentre pris en charge Ce systme prend en charge les formats audio suivants. Format LPCM 2ch LPCM 5.1ch LPCM 7.1ch Dolby Digital Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD Dolby Atmos - Dolby Digital Plus DTS DTS-ES Discrete 6.1, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 DTS 96/24 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD LBR DTS:X
: Format pris en charge.
: Format non pris en charge. Fonction
[HDMI]
[TV]
(eARC)
[TV]
(ARC)
[TV]
(OPT) Remarque La prise HDMI IN ne prend pas en charge les formats audio contenant des protections contre la copie, par exemple Super Audio CD ou DVD-Audio. 53FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 54 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Formats vido HDMI pris en charge Ce systme prend en charge les formats vido suivants. Rsolution Frquence dimages 3D 4K 4096 2160p 3840 2160p 4K 4096 2160p 3840 2160p 1920 1080p 1920 1080i 1280 720p 720 480p 720 576p 640 480p 50/59,94/60 Hz 23,98/24/25/29,97/30 Hz 50/59,94/60 Hz 23,98/24/25/29,97/30 Hz 25/29,97/30/50/
59,94/60 Hz 23,98/24 Hz 50/59,94/60 Hz 50/59,94/60 Hz 23,98/24/29,97/30 Hz 59,94/60 Hz 50 Hz 59,94/60 Hz Espace couleur RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 YCbCr 4:2:0 RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:0 RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 Profondeur de couleur Rglage [HDMI] -
[FORMAT]
[ENHANCED]1) 8 bits 8/10/12 bits 10/12 bits 10/12 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8/10/12 bits
[STANDARD]2) RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 8/10/12 bits RGB 4:4:4
: Compatible avec signal 3D en format Cte--cte (Moiti)
: Compatible avec signal 3D en format Mise en trame et Superpos (Haut et bas) 1) Utilisez un cble HDMI haute vitesse de qualit suprieure avec Ethernet prenant en charge 18 Gbit/s. 2) Utilisez un cble HDMI haute vitesse de qualit suprieure avec Ethernet ou un cble HDMI haute vitesse avec Ethernet de Sony portant le logo du type de cble. Remarques sur la prise HDMI et les raccordements HDMI Utilisez un cble HDMI approuv. Nous vous dconseillons dutiliser un cble de conversion HDMI-DVI. Il est possible que les signaux audio (frquence dchantillonnage, longueur binaire, etc.) transmis par une prise HDMI soient supprims par lappareil raccord. Le son peut tre interrompu en cas de modification de la frquence dchantillonnage ou du nombre de canaux des signaux de sortie audio provenant de lappareil utilis pour la lecture. Lorsque lentre TV est slectionne, les signaux vido mis par la prise HDMI IN sont mis partir de la prise HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC). 54FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 55 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Ce systme prend en charge TRILUMINOS . Les prises HDMI IN et HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) prennent en charge une bande passante allant jusqu 18 Gbit/s, HDCP2.2 et HDCP2.31), des espaces couleur largis BT.20202) et lintercommunication de contenus HDR (High Dynamic Range)3). Lors du raccordement un tlviseur avec une rsolution diffrente de celle du systme, le systme pourrait redmarrer pour rinitialiser le rglage de sortie de limage. 1) HDCP2.2 et HDCP2.3 reprsentent la technologie de protection des droits dauteur rcemment amliore qui est utilise pour protger des contenus tels que les films au format 4K. 2) Lespace couleur BT.2020 est une nouvelle norme de couleur plus vaste dfinie pour les systmes de tlvision en trs haute dfinition. 3) HDR est un nouveau format vido permettant dafficher une gamme largie de niveaux de luminosit. Le systme est compatible avec HDR10, HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) et Dolby Vision. 55FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 56 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM propos de la communication BLUETOOTH Les appareils BLUETOOTH doivent tre utiliss dans un rayon denviron 10 mtres (33 pieds) (distance sans obstacle) lun de lautre. La plage de communication effective peut tre rduite dans les cas suivants. Si une personne, un objet mtallique, un mur ou autre obstacle est prsent entre les appareils connects via BLUETOOTH Dans des endroits o un appareil LAN sans fil est install Autour de fours micro-ondes en cours dutilisation Dans des endroits o dautres ondes lectromagntiques sont prsentes Les appareils BLUETOOTH et LAN sans fil
(IEEE 802.11 b/g/n) utilisent la mme bande de frquence (2,4 GHz). Lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil BLUETOOTH proximit dun appareil muni dune fonctionnalit LAN sans fil, des interfrences lectromagntiques peuvent survenir. Cela risque de provoquer des taux de transfert de donnes infrieurs, du bruit ou une impossibilit de se connecter. Si cela se produit, essayez les solutions suivantes :
Utilisez ce systme une distance minimum de 10 mtres (33 pieds) de lappareil LAN sans fil. teignez lappareil LAN sans fil lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil BLUETOOTH dans un rayon de 10 mtres (33 pieds). Installez ce systme et lappareil BLUETOOTH aussi prs que possible lun de lautre. Les ondes radio mises par ce systme peuvent interfrer avec le fonctionnement de certains appareils mdicaux. Comme ces interfrences peuvent provoquer un problme de fonctionnement, teignez toujours ce 56FR systme et lappareil BLUETOOTH dans les endroits suivants :
Dans les hpitaux, les trains, les avions, les stations-service et tous les endroits o pourraient se trouver des gaz inflammables proximit de portes automatiques ou davertisseurs dincendie Ce systme prend en charge des fonctions de scurit conformes la spcification BLUETOOTH afin de garantir une connexion scurise lors de la communication laide de la technologie BLUETOOTH. Toutefois, comme cette scurit peut savrer insuffisante selon le rglage et dautres facteurs, faites toujours attention lorsque vous communiquez laide de la technologie BLUETOOTH. Sony ne peut pas tre tenu responsable de tout dommage ou toute perte rsultant de fuites dinformations lors de la communication laide de la technologie BLUETOOTH. La communication BLUETOOTH nest pas forcment garantie avec tous les appareils BLUETOOTH ayant le mme profil que ce systme. Les appareils BLUETOOTH connects ce systme doivent tre conformes la spcification BLUETOOTH prescrite par Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et tre certifis conformes. Toutefois, mme dans le cas dun appareil conforme la spcification BLUETOOTH, il est possible que certaines caractristiques ou spcifications de lappareil BLUETOOTH rendent la connexion impossible ou entranent des mthodes de contrle, un affichage ou un fonctionnement diffrents. Du bruit peut survenir ou le son peut tre interrompu en fonction de lappareil BLUETOOTH connect ce systme, de lenvironnement de communication ou des conditions environnantes. Si vous avez des questions ou si vous rencontrez des problmes avec votre systme, veuillez consulter votre dtaillant Sony le plus proche. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 57 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM CONTRAT DE LICENCE DUTILISATEUR FINAL IMPORTANT :
AVANT DUTILISER LE LOGICIEL, VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT LE PRSENT CONTRAT DE LICENCE DUTILISATEUR FINAL ( CLUF ). EN UTILISANT LE LOGICIEL, VOUS ACCEPTEZ LES CONDITIONS DU PRSENT CLUF. SI VOUS NACCEPTEZ PAS LES CONDITIONS DU PRSENT CLUF, VOUS NE POUVEZ PAS UTILISER LE LOGICIEL. Le prsent CLUF est un contrat conclu entre vous et Sony Electronics Inc.
( SONY ). Le prsent CLUF rgit vos droits et obligations concernant le logiciel SONY de SONY et/ou de ses concdants de licence tiers (y compris les socits affilies de SONY) et leurs socits affilies respectives
(collectivement nomms les FOURNISSEURS TIERS ), ainsi qu lgard de toute mise jour/mise niveau fournie par SONY, toute documentation imprime, en ligne ou lectronique relative ce logiciel et tout fichier de donnes cr en utilisant ce logiciel (collectivement nomms le LOGICIEL ). Nonobstant ce qui prcde, tout logiciel compris dans le LOGICIEL auquel est associ un contrat de licence dutilisateur final distinct (y compris, mais non de faon limitative, une Licence Publique Gnrale GNU et une Licence Publique Gnrale Limite/
pour Bibliothques) sera couvert par les dispositions du contrat de licence dutilisateur final distinct qui sappliqueront en lieu et place des conditions du prsent CLUF dans la mesure prcise par ledit contrat de licence dutilisateur final distinct
( LOGICIEL EXCLU ). LICENCE DUTILISATION DU LOGICIEL Le LOGICIEL est concd sous licence et nest pas vendu. Le LOGICIEL est protg par les lois relatives aux droits dauteur et autres droits de proprit intellectuelle, ainsi que par des traits internationaux. DROITS DAUTEUR Tous les droits et titres affrents et se rapportant au LOGICIEL (y compris, mais non de faon limitative, toute image, toute photographie, toute animation, toute vido, tout contenu audio, toute musique, tout texte et tout applet intgrs au LOGICIEL) sont dtenus par SONY ou lun ou plusieurs des FOURNISSEURS TIERS. OCTROI DE LICENCE SONY vous concde une licence limite pour lutilisation du LOGICIEL exclusivement avec votre appareil compatible ( APPAREIL ) et uniquement des fins personnelles non commerciales. SONY et les FOURNISSEURS TIERS se rservent expressment lensemble des droits, titres et intrts (y compris, mais non de faon limitative, lensemble des droits de proprit intellectuelle) affrents et se rapportant au LOGICIEL, qui ne vous sont pas spcifiquement octroys aux termes du prsent CLUF. OBLIGATIONS ET LIMITES Vous ne pouvez pas copier, publier, adapter, redistribuer, tenter de dterminer le code source, modifier, procder lingnierie inverse, dcompiler ou dsassembler le LOGICIEL en tout ou en partie, ni crer duvres drives du LOGICIEL, sauf si de telles uvres drives sont intentionnellement facilites par le LOGICIEL. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier ni altrer la fonctionnalit de gestion 57FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 58 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM des droits numriques du LOGICIEL. Vous ne pouvez pas contourner, modifier, empcher ou circonvenir une quelconque fonction ou protection du LOGICIEL ou tout mcanisme li de manire fonctionnelle au LOGICIEL. Vous ne pouvez pas sparer un composant individuel du LOGICIEL afin de lutiliser sur plus dun APPAREIL sans lautorisation expresse de SONY cet effet. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer, altrer, recouvrir ou dtriorer les marques de commerce ou mentions apposes sur le LOGICIEL. Vous ne pouvez pas partager, distribuer, louer, donner en location, concder en sous-
licence, cder, transfrer ni vendre le LOGICIEL. Les logiciels, services de rseau ou autres produits, autres que le LOGICIEL et indispensables lexcution du LOGICIEL, peuvent tre interrompus ou suspendus la discrtion des fournisseurs (fournisseurs de logiciels, fournisseurs de services ou SONY). SONY et ces fournisseurs ne garantissent pas que le LOGICIEL, les services de rseau, les contenus ou les autres produits resteront disponibles ou fonctionneront sans interruption ni modification. UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL AVEC DES CONTENUS PROTGS PAR DROITS DAUTEUR Il est possible que vous puissiez utiliser le LOGICIEL pour visualiser, stocker, traiter et/ou utiliser le contenu cr par vous-mme et/ou par des tiers. Ce contenu peut tre protg par le droit dauteur, dautres lois portant sur les droits de proprit intellectuelle et/ou des accords. Vous acceptez dutiliser le LOGICIEL uniquement en conformit avec la totalit de ces lois et accords sappliquant ce contenu. Vous reconnaissez et acceptez que SONY puisse prendre des mesures appropries pour protger les droits dauteur relatifs au contenu stock, 58FR trait ou utilis par le LOGICIEL. Ces mesures comprennent, mais non de faon limitative, le dcompte de la frquence de vos sauvegardes et restaurations par certaines fonctionnalits du LOGICIEL, le refus de votre demande de permission de restauration des donnes et la rsiliation du prsent CLUF en cas dutilisation illgitime de votre part du LOGICIEL. SERVICE DE CONTENU VEUILLEZ GALEMENT NOTER QUE LE LOGICIEL PEUT TRE CONU POUR TRE UTILIS AVEC LE CONTENU DISPONIBLE PAR LE BIAIS DUN OU DE PLUSIEURS SERVICES DE CONTENU ( SERVICE DE CONTENU ). LUTILISATION DU SERVICE ET DE CE CONTENU EST SOUMISE AUX CONDITIONS DE SERVICE DE CE SERVICE DE CONTENU. SI VOUS REFUSEZ DACCEPTER CES CONDITIONS, VOTRE UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL SERA LIMITE. Vous reconnaissez et acceptez que certains contenus et services disponibles par lintermdiaire du LOGICIEL puissent tre fournis par des tiers sur lesquels SONY nexerce aucun contrle. LUTILISATION DU SERVICE DE CONTENU NCESSITE UNE CONNEXION INTERNET. LE SERVICE DE CONTENU PEUT TRE INTERROMPU TOUT MOMENT. CONNECTIVIT INTERNET ET SERVICES DE TIERS Vous reconnaissez et acceptez que laccs certaines fonctionnalits du LOGICIEL puisse ncessiter une connexion Internet dont vous tes exclusivement responsable. Par ailleurs, vous tes exclusivement responsable du paiement des frais de tiers associs votre connexion Internet, y compris, mais non de faon limitative, les frais de fournisseur de service Internet ou dutilisation du rseau. Lutilisation du LOGICIEL peut tre limite ou restreinte HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 59 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM en fonction des capacits, de la bande passante ou des limites techniques de votre connexion et de votre service Internet. La fourniture, la qualit et la scurit de cette connectivit Internet relvent de la responsabilit exclusive du tiers fournissant le service. RGLEMENTATIONS RELATIVES AUX EXPORTATIONS ET AUTRES Vous acceptez de respecter toutes les restrictions et rglementations relatives aux exportations et rexportations en vigueur dans la zone ou le pays o vous rsidez, et de ne pas transfrer ou autoriser le transfert du LOGICIEL vers un pays interdit ou dune autre manire contrevenant ces restrictions ou rglementations. ACTIVITS HAUT RISQUE Le LOGICIEL ne possde pas de tolrance aux pannes et nest pas conu, fabriqu ou prvu pour lutilisation ou la revente comme quipement de contrle en ligne dans des environnements dangereux ncessitant des performances sans failles, comme lexploitation dinstallations nuclaires, la navigation ou les systmes de communication ariens, le contrle du trafic arien, les appareils de maintien des fonctions vitales ou les systmes darmes, pour lesquels toute panne du LOGICIEL pourrait conduire des dcs, des lsions corporelles ou dimportants prjudices physiques ou environnementaux ( ACTIVITS HAUT RISQUE ). SONY, chacun des FOURNISSEURS TIERS et chacune de leurs socits affilies respectives dclinent spcifiquement toute garantie, obligation ou condition dadquation aux ACTIVITS HAUT RISQUE, quelle soit expresse ou tacite. EXCLUSION DE GARANTIE SUR LE LOGICIEL Vous reconnaissez et acceptez que vous utilisez le LOGICIEL vos propres risques et que vous tes responsable de lutilisation du LOGICIEL. Le LOGICIEL est fourni EN LTAT , sans garantie, ni obligation ou condition daucune sorte. SONY ET CHACUN DES FOURNISSEURS TIERS (aux fins de la prsente Section, SONY et chacun des FOURNISSEURS TIERS sont collectivement nomms SONY ) DCLINENT EXPRESSMENT LENSEMBLE DES GARANTIES, OBLIGATIONS OU CONDITIONS, EXPRESSES OU TACITES, Y COMPRIS, MAIS NON DE FAON LIMITATIVE, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALIT MARCHANDE, DABSENCE DE CONTREFAON ET DADAPTATION UN USAGE PARTICULIER. SONY NE GARANTIT PAS ET NE FORMULE AUCUNE CONDITION NI NE FAIT AUCUNE DCLARATION (A) QUE LES FONCTIONS CONTENUES DANS TOUT LOGICIEL RPONDRONT VOS EXIGENCES OU QUELLES SERONT MISES JOUR, (B) QUE LE FONCTIONNEMENT DE TOUT LOGICIEL SERA ADQUAT OU EXEMPT DERREURS NI QUE TOUT DFAUT SERA CORRIG, (C) QUE LE LOGICIEL NENDOMMAGERA PAS DAUTRES LOGICIELS, MATRIELS OU DONNES, (D) QUE TOUT LOGICIEL, SERVICE DE RSEAU (Y COMPRIS INTERNET) OU PRODUIT (AUTRE QUE LE LOGICIEL) INDISPENSABLE AU FONCTIONNEMENT DU LOGICIEL DEMEURERA DISPONIBLE ET NE SERA PAS INTERROMPU OU MODIFI, ET (E) CONCERNANT LUTILISATION OU LES RSULTATS DE LUTILISATION DU LOGICIEL, QUANT SON EXACTITUDE, SA PRCISION, SA FIABILIT OU AUTRE. LES RENSEIGNEMENTS OU CONSEILS ORAUX OU CRITS DONNS PAR SONY OU UN REPRSENTANT AUTORIS DE SONY NE CONSTITUENT PAS UNE 59FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 60 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM GARANTIE, OBLIGATION OU CONDITION NI NACCROT DUNE QUELCONQUE FAON LA PORTE DE LA PRSENTE GARANTIE. SI LE LOGICIEL DEVAIT SAVRER DFECTUEUX, VOUS ASSUMEREZ LINTGRALIT DU COT DE TOUS LES SERVICES, RPARATIONS OU CORRECTIONS NCESSAIRES. COMME CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS NE PERMETTENT PAS LEXCLUSION DES GARANTIES TACITES, CES EXCLUSIONS POURRAIENT NE PAS SAPPLIQUER VOUS. LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILIT SONY ET CHACUN DES FOURNISSEURS TIERS (aux fins de la prsente Section, SONY et chacun des FOURNISSEURS TIERS sont collectivement nomms SONY ) NASSUMENT AUCUNE RESPONSABILIT POUR TOUT DOMMAGE ACCESSOIRE OU INDIRECT LI LA VIOLATION DE TOUTE GARANTIE EXPRESSE OU TACITE, TOUT MANQUEMENT CONTRACTUEL, TOUTE NGLIGENCE, TOUTE RESPONSABILIT STRICTE OU AU TITRE DE TOUTE AUTRE THORIE JURIDIQUE RELATIVE AU LOGICIEL, Y COMPRIS, MAIS NON DE FAON LIMITATIVE, TOUT DOMMAGE DCOULANT DE LA PERTE DE PROFITS, LA PERTE DE REVENUS, LA PERTE DE DONNES, LA PERTE DUTILISATION DU LOGICIEL OU DE TOUT MATRIEL ASSOCI, DE TOUT TEMPS DARRT ET TEMPS DE LUTILISATEUR, MME EN CAS DE CONNAISSANCE PRALABLE DE LA POSSIBILIT DUN TEL DOMMAGE. DANS TOUS LES CAS, LA RESPONSABILIT GLOBALE DE TOUT UN CHACUN EN VERTU DE TOUTE DISPOSITION DU PRSENT CLUF SE LIMITERA AU MONTANT EFFECTIVEMENT PAY POUR LE PRODUIT. COMME CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS NE PERMETTENT PAS LEXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES ACCESSOIRES OU INDIRECTS, LEXCLUSION OU LA 60FR LIMITATION CI-DESSUS POURRAIENT NE PAS SAPPLIQUER VOUS. FONCTIONNALIT DE MISE JOUR AUTOMATIQUE De temps autre, SONY ou les FOURNISSEURS TIERS peuvent automatiquement mettre jour ou autrement modifier le LOGICIEL, y compris, mais non de faon limitative, aux fins de lamlioration des fonctions de scurit, de la correction derreurs et de lamlioration des fonctions, lorsque vous interagissez avec les serveurs de SONY ou de tiers, ou autrement. Ces mises jour ou modifications peuvent supprimer ou changer la nature des fonctionnalits ou dautres aspects du LOGICIEL, y compris, mais non de faon limitative, des fonctions sur lesquelles vous pourriez compter. Vous reconnaissez et acceptez que ces activits puissent tre ralises lentire discrtion de SONY et que SONY puisse conditionner la poursuite de lutilisation du LOGICIEL votre installation ou acceptation complte de telles mises jour ou modifications. Toute mise jour/modification sera considre comme faisant partie du LOGICIEL et en constituera une partie aux fins du prsent CLUF. En acceptant le prsent CLUF, vous acceptez de telles mises jour/modifications. INTGRALIT DU CONTRAT, RENONCIATION, DIVISIBILIT Le prsent CLUF et les politiques en matire de respect de la vie prive de SONY, chacun dans leur version amende et modifie priodiquement, constituent lintgralit du contrat intervenu entre vous et SONY relativement au LOGICIEL. Le fait que SONY nexerce pas ou ne fasse pas valoir un droit ou une disposition du prsent CLUF ne constitue pas une renonciation ce droit ou cette disposition. Si une clause quelconque HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 61 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM du prsent CLUF est dclare non valable, illgale ou inapplicable, cette disposition sera applique dans toute la mesure permise afin de prserver lintention du prsent CLUF et les autres clauses demeureront pleinement en vigueur. DROIT APPLICABLE ET JURIDICTION COMPTENTE La Convention des Nations Unies sur les contrats de vente internationale de marchandises ne sapplique pas au prsent CLUF. Le prsent CLUF est rgi par le droit japonais, sans considration des dispositions en matire de conflits des lois. Tout litige dcoulant du prsent CLUF est soumis la comptence exclusive du tribunal de district de Tokyo, au Japon, et les parties aux prsentes acceptent la comptence et la juridiction de ce tribunal. RECOURS QUITABLES Nonobstant toute disposition contraire du prsent CLUF, vous reconnaissez et acceptez que toute violation ou tout non-respect du prsent CLUF de votre fait causera un prjudice irrparable SONY, pour lequel un ddommagement financier serait inadquat, et vous acceptez que SONY obtienne toute mesure injonctive ou rparation que SONY juge ncessaire ou approprie dans ces circonstances. SONY peut galement exercer tout recours juridique ou technique pour prvenir la violation du prsent CLUF et/ou pour le faire appliquer, y compris, mais non de faon limitative, la rsiliation immdiate de votre utilisation du LOGICIEL si SONY estime, son entire discrtion, que vous contrevenez ou entendez contrevenir au prsent CLUF. Ces recours viennent sajouter aux autres recours dont SONY peut se prvaloir en droit, en quit ou en vertu dun contrat. RSILIATION Sans prjudice aucun de ses autres droits, SONY peut rsilier le prsent CLUF si vous contrevenez lune de ses dispositions quelconques. En cas dune telle rsiliation, vous devez cesser toute utilisation du LOGICIEL et dtruire toute copie de celui-ci. MODIFICATION SONY SE RSERVE LE DROIT DE MODIFIER TOUTE DISPOSITION DU PRSENT CLUF SON ENTIRE DISCRTION EN PUBLIANT UN AVIS DINFORMATION SUR UN SITE WEB DSIGN PAR SONY, PAR UNE NOTIFICATION LECTRONIQUE ENVOYE UNE ADRESSE COURRIEL QUE VOUS AVEZ FOURNIE, SUR REMISE DUN AVIS DANS LE CADRE DE LA PROCDURE VOUS PERMETTANT DOBTENIR DES MISES NIVEAU/MISES JOUR OU PAR TOUT AUTRE MOYEN JURIDIQUEMENT RECONNU. Si vous nacceptez pas la modification, vous devez communiquer avec SONY dans les meilleurs dlais pour obtenir des instructions. Toute poursuite de lutilisation du LOGICIEL aprs la date dentre en vigueur dun tel avis sera considre comme lacceptation de votre part dtre li par cette modification. TIERS BNFICIAIRES Chaque FOURNISSEUR TIERS constitue un tiers bnficiaire exprs des dispositions prvues du prsent CLUF, ayant le droit de faire appliquer chacune de ces dispositions relativement son LOGICIEL. Si vous avez des questions concernant le prsent CLUF, vous pouvez communiquer avec SONY par crit ladresse applicable indique pour chaque zone ou pays. Droits dauteur 2018 Sony Electronics Inc. Tous droits rservs. 61FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 62 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Prcautions Scurit Si un objet ou du liquide venait pntrer lintrieur du systme, dbranchez le systme et faites-le vrifier par une personne qualifie avant de le remettre en marche. Ne montez pas sur la barre de haut-
parleurs ou le caisson de graves, car cela pourrait entraner une chute et des blessures ou endommager le systme. Sources dalimentation Avant de mettre en marche le systme, vrifiez que la tension de fonctionnement est identique celle de votre source dalimentation locale. La tension de fonctionnement est indique sur la plaque signaltique situe sur la partie infrieure de la barre de haut-parleurs. Dconnectez le systme de la prise murale si vous prvoyez de ne pas lutiliser pendant une priode prolonge. Pour dconnecter le cordon dalimentation CA, saisissez la fiche; ne tirez jamais sur le cordon. Pour des raisons de scurit, lune des broches de la fiche est plus large que lautre et sinsre dans la prise murale dans un seul sens. Si vous ne parvenez pas insrer la fiche compltement dans la prise, contactez votre dtaillant. Le cordon dalimentation CA ne doit tre remplac que dans un centre de service agr. Accumulation de chaleur Si le systme produit de la chaleur pendant le fonctionnement, il ne sagit pas dun problme de fonctionnement. En cas dutilisation continue de ce systme un volume lev, la temprature du systme augmente considrablement au niveau des parties arrire et infrieure. Pour viter de vous brler, ne touchez pas le systme. 62FR Installation Ninstallez pas le systme proximit de sources de chaleur ou dans un endroit expos la lumire directe du soleil, une poussire excessive ou des chocs mcaniques. Ne placez aucun objet larrire de la barre de haut-parleurs et du caisson de graves qui pourrait bloquer les ouvertures daration et causer des problmes de fonctionnement. Ne placez pas dobjets mtalliques autres quun tlviseur proximit du systme. Les fonctions sans fil peuvent tre instables. Si le systme est utilis conjointement avec un tlviseur, un magntoscope ou un magntophone, des parasites peuvent se produire et la qualit de limage peut tre rduite. En pareil cas, loignez le systme du tlviseur, du magntoscope ou du magntophone. Faites attention lorsque vous placez le systme sur une surface spcialement traite (cire, huile, polie, etc.), car des taches ou une dcoloration de la surface peuvent apparatre. vitez de vous blesser sur les coins de la barre de haut-parleurs et du caisson de graves. Laissez un espace dau moins 3 cm sous la barre de haut-parleurs lorsque vous la suspendez un mur. Les enceintes de ce systme ne sont pas munies dun blindage magntique. Ne placez pas de cartes magntiques sur le systme ou proximit de celui-ci. Manipulation du caisson de graves Ne placez pas votre main dans la fente du caisson de graves lorsque vous le soulevez. Cela pourrait endommager le circuit dattaque du haut-parleur. Lorsque vous soulevez le caisson de graves, tenez-le par le dessous. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 63 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Fonctionnement Avant de raccorder dautres appareils, assurez-vous dteindre et de dbrancher le systme. Si lcran du tlviseur situ proximit prsente des irrgularits de couleurs Des irrgularits de couleurs peuvent apparatre sur certains types de tlviseurs. En cas dirrgularits de couleurs... teignez le tlviseur, puis rallumez-le aprs 15 30 minutes. En cas dirrgularits de couleurs persistantes... loignez davantage le systme du tlviseur. Nettoyage Nettoyez le systme avec un chiffon doux et sec. Nutilisez pas de tampons abrasifs, de poudre rcurer ou de solvants tels que de lalcool ou du benzne. Si vous avez des questions ou si vous rencontrez un problme avec votre systme, veuillez consulter votre dtaillant Sony le plus proche. Droits dauteur et marques de commerce Ce systme intgre les technologies Dolby*
Digital et DTS** Digital Surround System.
* Fabriqu sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Vision et le symbole double-D sont des marques dposes de Dolby Laboratories.
**Pour les brevets DTS, voir https://
patents.dts.com. Fabriqu sous licence de DTS, Inc. DTS, le symbole, DTS et le symbole ensemble, DTS:X, Virtual:X, le logo DTS:X et le logo DTS Virtual:X sont des marques dposes ou des marques commerciales de DTS, Inc. aux tats-Unis et/ou dans dautres des pays. DTS, Inc. Tous les droits rservs. Le terme et les logos BLUETOOTH sont des marques dposes appartenant Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et tout usage de ces marques par Sony Corporation sinscrit dans le cadre dune licence. Les autres marques commerciales et noms de marques appartiennent leurs propritaires respectifs. Les termes HDMI et HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, de mme que le logo HDMI sont des marques commerciales ou des marques dposes de HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. aux tats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Le logo BRAVIA est une marque commerciale de Sony Corporation. PlayStation est une marque dpose ou une marque commerciale de Sony Interactive Entertainment Inc. Technologie de codage audio et brevets MPEG Layer-3 sous licence Fraunhofer IIS et Thomson. Windows Media est une marque dpose ou une marque commerciale de Microsoft Corporation aux tats-Unis et/ou dans 63FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 64 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM dautres pays. Ce produit est protg par des droits de proprit intellectuelle de Microsoft Corporation. Il est interdit dutiliser ou de distribuer cette technologie hors de ce produit sans disposer dune licence approprie de Microsoft ou dune filiale de Microsoft autorise. TRILUMINOS et le logo TRILUMINOS sont des marques dposes de Sony Corporation. Toutes les autres marques commerciales sont la proprit de leurs dtenteurs respectifs. 64FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 65 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Index Buttons AUDIO 26 DIMMER 41 DISPLAY 33 IMMERSIVE AE 30 NIGHT 32 VOICE 32 A A/V Sync 38 ARC 10, 35 Attente automatique 40 Audio Return Channel 10, 35 B BLUETOOTH AAC 40 Attente 40 Jumelage 27 Rglage 40 BRAVIA Sync 36 BT.2020 55 C Connexion (Consultez Connexion cble ou Connexion sans fil dans Index) Connexion cble Appareils AV 19 Tlviseur 19 Tlviseur et appareils 4K 22 Connexion sans fil Appareils BLUETOOTH 27 Caisson de graves 16 Tlviseur 19 Contrle audio du systme 34 Contrle des dialogues DTS 38 Contrle pour HDMI 34 D Drc Audio 38 E eARC 10, 35, 39 Enhanced Audio Return Channel 10, 35, 39 F Format Audio 8, 53 Vido 8, 54 Format audio 8, 53 Format vido 8, 54 H HDCP 55 HDMI Format de signal 23 Rglage 39 HDR 55 I IMMERSIVE AE 30 Installation 14 IR-Repeater 17 L Lecture laide dune touche 35 Logiciel Mise jour 40 Version 37, 40 Luminosit Affichage du panneau avant 41 Tmoins 41 M Mise en arrt du systme 34 Mode nuit 32 Mode sonore 31 Mode voix 32 Moteur ambiophonique vertical 30, 38 P Plage de dialogue 32 65FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\02CaFR-HTG700UC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 66 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM PROTECT 49 R Rglages Ambiophonique 30 Audio 38 BLUETOOTH 40 Enceinte 37 tat actuel 33 HDMI 39 Luminosit 41 Menu 37 Rinitialisation 50 Systme 40 Rglages actuels 33 Rglages audio 38 Rglages denceinte 37 Rglages systme 40 Rinitialisation 50 S Slection de mode sonore 36 Slection de scne 36 Son diffus en multiplex 26 Standby Through 35 T Tlcommande 12 66FR HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) 010COV.book Page 67 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\020REG.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 2 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Registro del propietario Los nmeros de modelo y serie estn ubicados en la parte inferior de la barra parlante. Registre los nmeros de serie en el espacio proporcionado a continuacin. Indquelos siempre que llame a su distribuidor Sony con relacin a este producto. N. de modelo HT-G700 N. de serie ADVERTENCIA Para reducir el riesgo de incendios o electrocucin, no exponga el sistema a la lluvia ni a la humedad. El sistema no estar desconectado de la fuente de alimentacin de ca mientras est conectado a la toma de pared, aunque el sistema se haya apagado. Para reducir el riesgo de incendio, no cubra la abertura de ventilacin del sistema con peridicos, paos, cortinas, etc. No exponga el sistema a fuentes de llamas vivas (velas encendidas, por ejemplo). Para reducir el riesgo de incendio o descarga elctrica, no exponga el sistema a goteos ni salpicaduras de lquidos. No coloque objetos llenos de lquido, como vasos, sobre el sistema. Ya que el enchufe principal se utiliza para desconectar el sistema de la red elctrica, conctelo a una salida de CA de fcil acceso. Si nota alguna anomala en el sistema, desconecte el enchufe principal de la salida de CA de inmediato. 2ES No site el sistema en un espacio cerrado, como una estantera o un armario empotrado. PRECAUCIN Riesgo de explosin si la batera se reemplaza por un tipo de batera incorrecto. No exponga las bateras ni los dispositivos con batera a un calor excesivo, como la luz directa del sol o fuego. No coloque este producto cerca de productos sanitarios. Este producto (incluidos sus accesorios) contiene imanes que pueden interferir con marcapasos, vlvulas de derivacin programables para tratamientos para la hidrocefalia u otros productos sanitarios. No coloque el dispositivo cerca de personas que usen tales dispositivos mdicos. Consulte con su mdico antes de usar este producto si usa un dispositivo mdico tal. Solo para ser usado en interiores. Para la barra parlante La placa de identificacin se encuentra en la parte inferior de la barra parlante. Para clientes de los EE. UU. NOTA:
Este sistema ha sido sometido a pruebas y se ha determinado que cumple con los lmites requeridos por los aparatos digitales de la clase B, en cumplimiento con la Seccin 15 de las regulaciones de la FCC. Estas especificaciones han sido diseadas para proporcionar una proteccin razonable contra interferencias perjudiciales en una instalacin residencial. Este sistema genera, utiliza y puede emitir energa de radiofrecuencia y, de no ser instalado y utilizado de acuerdo con las instrucciones podra ocasionar HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\020REG.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 3 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM ES interferencias perjudiciales en las comunicaciones de radio. No obstante, no se garantiza que no ocurra ninguna interferencia en una instalacin particular. Si el sistema causa interferencia en la recepcin de radio o televisin, que puede determinarse al apagarlo y encenderlo, se recomienda que el usuario intente corregir la interferencia mediante una o ms de las siguientes medidas:
Cambie la orientacin o ubicacin de la antena de recepcin. Aumente la separacin entre el sistema y el receptor. Conecte el sistema en una toma de circuito distinta a la que est conectado el receptor. Consulte con su distribuidor o con un tcnico especializado en radio/
televisin para solicitar asistencia. Es preciso utilizar cables y conectores correctamente blindados y conectados a tierra para la conexin a anfitriones y/
o perifricos con el fin de cumplir los lmites de emisiones de la FCC. Si tiene alguna pregunta sobre esta barra de sonido:
Visite: www.sony.com/support Contacto: Sony Customer Information Service Center al 1-800-222-
SONY (7669). Escriba a: Sony Customer Information Service Center 12451 Gateway Blvd., Fort Myers, FL 33913 Declaracin de Conformidad del proveedor Marca comercial: SONY N. de modelo: HT-G700 Divisin a cargo: Sony Electronics Inc. Direccin: 16535 Via Esprillo, San Diego, CA 92127 USA N. de telfono: 858-942-2230 Este dispositivo cumple con las disposiciones de la Seccin 15 de la FCC. Su funcionamiento est sujeto a las siguientes condiciones: (1) este dispositivo no debe ocasionar interferencias; y (2) Este dispositivo debe ser capaz de aceptar cualquier tipo de interferencia, incluidas las interferencias que puedan ocasionar un funcionamiento no deseado del equipo. PRECAUCIN Queda notificado que ante cualquier cambio o modificacin que no haya sido aprobado expresamente en este manual se podra anular su autorizacin para utilizar este sistema. Este sistema no debe colocarse ni utilizarse junto con otras antenas o transmisores. Este sistema cumple con los lmites de exposicin a la radiacin de la FCC definidos para un ambiente no controlado y cumple con los lineamientos de exposicin a radiofrecuencia (RF) de la FCC. Este sistema se debe instalar y operar manteniendo el emisor a una distancia de al menos 20 cm del cuerpo de la persona. Para los clientes en Canad Utilice conectores y cables debidamente protegidos y con conexin a tierra para conectar a computadoras del host o dispositivos perifricos. Este sistema contiene transmisores o receptores exentos de licencia que cumplen con las Especificaciones Estndar de Radio (RSS, por sus siglas en ingls) del Centro de Innovacin, Ciencia y Desarrollo Econmico de Canad. Su funcionamiento est sujeto a las siguientes condiciones:
3ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\020REG.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 4 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM
(1) Este sistema no debe ocasionar interferencias; y
(2) Este sistema debe ser capaz de aceptar cualquier tipo de interferencia, incluidas las interferencias que puedan ocasionar un funcionamiento no deseado del sistema. Este sistema cumple con los lmites de exposicin a la radiacin de ISED definidos para un entorno no controlado y cumple con la RSS-102 de las normas de exposicin a radiofrecuencia (RF) del ISED. El sistema se debe instalar y operar manteniendo el emisor a una distancia de al menos 20cm o ms del cuerpo de la persona. 4ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\010COVTOC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 5 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM ndice Acerca de este Manual de instrucciones ...........................6 Qu viene en la caja? ................... 7 Qu puede hacer con el sistema ....................................8 Gua para partes y controles .........9 Instalacin del sistema Instalacin de la barra parlante y el subwoofer Gua de inicio
(documento aparte) Montaje de la barra parlante en una pared ..................................... 14 Cmo conectar el subwoofer ...... 16 Cuando el control remoto del TV no funciona .......................17 Cmo conectar a un TV o dispositivo AV Cmo conectar a un TV o dispositivo AV con el cable HDMI Gua de inicio
(documento aparte) Cmo conectar el TV Sony con la funcin BLUETOOTH de forma inalmbrica ............................ 18 Cmo conectar un TV 4K y dispositivos 4K .......................21 Cmo escuchar msica/
sonido Cmo escuchar el TV u otros dispositivos ...........................24 Cmo ajustar el volumen ............ 25 Disfrute de un sonido de transmisin multiplex
(AUDIO) ..................................26 Cmo escuchar msica/sonido con la funcin BLUETOOTH ........ 27 Cmo ajustar la calidad del sonido Cmo disfrutar de una experiencia envolvente
(IMMERSIVE AE) .....................30 Disfrute del efecto de sonido a la medida de las fuentes (modo sonido) ................................... 31 Cmo hacer que los dilogos sean ms claros (VOICE) ................ 32 Cmo disfrutar de un sonido claro con volumen bajo a medianoche (NIGHT) ............. 32 Cmo comprobar el ajuste de sonido actual (DISPLAY) ........ 33 Uso de la funcin Control para HDMI Uso de la funcin Control para HDMI ......................................34 Cmo usar la funcin BRAVIA Sync .......................................36 Cmo cambiar la configuracin Cmo usar el men de configuracin ........................ 37 Cmo cambiar el brillo de la pantalla del panel frontal y los indicadores (DIMMER) ..... 41 Ahorro de energa en el modo en espera ....................................42 Solucin de problemas Solucin de problemas ...............43 Cmo restaurar el sistema ..........50 Informacin adicional Especificaciones .......................... 51 Formatos de entrada de audio admitidos .............................. 53 5ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\010COVTOC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 6 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Formatos de HDMI video admitidos .............................. 54 Comunicacin por BLUETOOTH .......................... 56 ACUERDO DE LICENCIA DE USUARIO FINAL ......................57 Precauciones ............................... 62 ndice ........................................... 65 Acerca de este Manual de instrucciones Las instrucciones incluidas en este manual de instrucciones describen las funciones del control remoto. Algunas de las ilustraciones se presentan a modo de esquemas conceptuales, por lo que es posible que presenten diferencias respecto de los productos reales. Los ajustes predeterminados estn subrayados en la descripcin de cada funcin. Los caracteres entre corchetes [ ]
aparecen en la pantalla del panel frontal. 6ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 7 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Qu viene en la caja?
Barra parlante (1) Cable de alimentacin de ca (2) Subwoofer (1) PLANTILLA PARA MONTAJE EN PARED
(1) Control remoto (1)/
Batera R03 (tamao AAA) (2) Gua de inicio Cable HDMI (compatible con la misma especificacin para cable HDMI de alta velocidad de primera calidad con Ethernet) (1) Manual de instrucciones (este documento) 7ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 8 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Qu puede hacer con el sistema El sistema admite formatos de audio basado en objetos como Dolby Atmos y DTS:X, as como formatos de video HDR como HDR10, HLG, y Dolby Vision. Cmo escuchar el TV u otros dispositivos (pgina 24) Reproductor Blu-ray Disc, decodificador de cable, decodificador satelital, etc. Conexin bsica: consulte la Gua de inicio (documento aparte). Otras conexiones: consulte Cmo conectar a un TV o dispositivo AV (pgina 18). Uso de la funcin Control para HDMI (pgina 34) Cmo usar la funcin BRAVIA Sync (pgina 36) Cmo conectar el TV Sony con la funcin BLUETOOTH de forma inalmbrica
(pgina 18) Cmo escuchar msica/
sonido con la funcin BLUETOOTH (pgina 27) Cmo conectar el subwoofer
(pgina 16) 8ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 9 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Gua para partes y controles Los detalles se omiten de las ilustraciones. Barra parlante (unidad principal) Parte frontal Botn (alimentacin) Enciende el sistema o lo ajusta en el modo en espera. Botn
(seleccin de entrada) Selecciona la entrada para la reproduccin del sistema. Botn BLUETOOTH (pgina 27) Botones +/ (volumen) Indicador de BLUETOOTH Se enciende en azul: se ha establecido la conexin con BLUETOOTH. Parpadea lentamente en azul varias veces: intenta conectarse a BLUETOOTH. Parpadea repetidamente dos veces en azul: durante el estado de modo de espera del emparejamiento. Pantalla del panel frontal Sensor del control remoto Apunte el control remoto al sensor de control remoto para operar el sistema. 9ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 10 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Parte trasera ms detalles de eARC, consulte
[EARC] (pgina 39). Para conocer los formatos de audios admitidos, consulte Formatos de entrada de audio admitidos
(pgina 53). Para obtener especificaciones y notas sobre conexiones, consulte Formatos de HDMI video admitidos
(pgina 54). Entrada de ca IR repeater (pgina 17) Transmite la seal remota del control remoto del TV a el TV. Toma TV IN (OPT) Toma HDMI IN Para obtener especificaciones y notas sobre conexiones, consulte Formatos de HDMI video admitidos (pgina 54). Puerto UPDATE (pgina 40) Conecte la memoria USB para actualizar el sistema. Toma HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) Conecte un TV que tenga un toma de entrada HDMI con un cable HDMI. El sistema es compatible con eARC y ARC. ARC es la funcin que enva el sonido de la TV a un dispositivo AV como el sistema de la toma HDMI de la TV. eARC es una extensin de ARC y permite la transmisin del audio del objeto y el contenido del LPCM multicanal que no se puede transmitir con ARC. Para obtener 10ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 11 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Subwoofer Indicador de alimentacin Parpadea lentamente en mbar:
el subwoofer est intentando conectarse al sistema mediante conexin manual./Se est actualizando el software. Parpadea rpidamente en mbar:
el subwoofer est en espera de emparejamiento mediante conexin manual. Se enciende en mbar: el subwoofer est conectado al sistema mediante conexin manual. Parpadea lentamente en verde: el subwoofer est intentando conectarse al sistema. Se enciende en verde: el subwoofer est conectado al sistema. Se enciende en color rojo: el subwoofer est en modo de espera. Se apaga: el subwoofer est apagado. Botn (alimentacin) Enciende o apaga el subwoofer. Botn LINK (pgina 16) Entrada de ca 11ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 12 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Control remoto INPUT (pgina 24) Selecciona la fuente de reproduccin. Cada vez que pulsa INPUT, la entrada seleccionada aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal en el siguiente orden:
[TV] [HDMI] [BT]
IMMERSIVE AE (pgina 30) Activa/desactiva la funcin de sonido envolvente vertical. AUTO SOUND (pgina 31) CINEMA (pgina 31)
(volumen) +*/ (pgina 25) Ajusta el volumen. SW (volumen del subwoofer)
+/ (pgina 25) Ajusta el volumen del subwoofer. MENU (pgina 37) Ingresa/sale del modo de men de configuracin.
/ (pgina 37) Selecciona el elemento del men de configuracin. ENTER (pgina 37) Acepta la seleccin. BACK (pgina 37) Vuelve a la pantalla anterior. VOICE (pgina 32)
(encendido) Enciende el sistema o lo ajusta en el modo en espera. DISPLAY (pgina 33) Muestra los ajustes del modo de sonido, IMMERSIVE AE, el modo de voz, el modo nocturno y la informacin de transmisin actual. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) 12ES C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\030PAC.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 13 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM STANDARD (pgina 31) MUSIC (pgina 31)
(silencio) Suspende el sonido temporalmente. DIMMER (pgina 41) AUDIO* (pgina 26) NIGHT (pgina 32)
* Los botones AUDIO y + tienen un punto tctil. selo como gua durante su operacin. Acerca del reemplazo de bateras del control remoto Cuando el sistema no responda al operar con el control remoto, reemplace las dos bateras con nuevas bateras. Use bateras de manganeso R03
(tamao AAA) como reemplazo. 13ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 14 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Instalacin del sistema Instalacin de la barra parlante y el subwoofer Consulte la Gua de inicio (documento aparte). Montaje de la barra parlante en una pared Puede montar la barra parlante en la pared. Notas Prepare tornillos (no suministrados) que sean apropiados para el material y la resistencia de la pared. Como las paredes de paneles de yeso son muy frgiles, coloque los tornillos de forma segura en la viga de la pared. Instale los altavoces de forma horizontal con los tornillos roscados en una seccin plana y continua de la pared. Haga que un distribuidor o contratista licenciado de Sony realice la instalacin y preste mucha atencin a la seguridad durante la instalacin. Sony no se responsabiliza por accidentes o daos causados por una instalacin inadecuada, una pared de poca resistencia, una instalacin incorrecta de los tornillos, un desastre natural, etc. 14ES 1 Prepare dos tornillos (no suministrados) que sean apropiados para los orificios de montaje en pared en la parte trasera de la barra parlante. 4 mm
(3/16 pulgadas) Ms de 30 mm (1 3/16 pulgadas) 5 mm
(7/32 pulgadas) 9 mm
(3/8 pulgadas) Orificio en la parte trasera de la barra parlante 2 Adhiera la PLANTILLA PARA MONTAJE EN PARED
(suministrado) en una pared. Centro del TV Cinta adhesiva, etc. PLANTILLA PARA MONTAJE EN PARED 1 Alinee la LNEA CENTRAL TELEVISOR () de la PLANTILLA PARA MONTAJE EN PARED con la lnea central de su TV. 2 Alinee la LNEA INFERIOR TELEVISOR () de la PLANTILLA PARA MONTAJE EN PARED con la parte inferior de su TV, luego adhiera la PLANTILLA PARA MONTAJE EN PARED en una HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 15 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM pared con una cinta adhesiva de uso comercial, etc. 3 Ajuste los tornillos en las marcas
() de la LNEA DE TORNILLOS () de la PLANTILLA PARA MONTAJE EN PARED como se muestra en la ilustracin a continuacin. 368,5 mm
(14 1/2 pulgadas) 368,5 mm
(14 1/2 pulgadas) 5 Cuelgue la barra parlante en los tornillos. Alinee los orificios en la parte trasera de la barra parlante con los tornillos, luego cuelgue la barra parlante en los dos tornillos. Tornillos Marcas
() 10,5 mm a 11,5 mm
(aprox. 7/16 pulgadas) 4 Quitar la PLANTILLA PARA MONTAJE EN PARED. Notas Al adherir la PLANTILLA PARA MONTAJE EN PARED, debe estar completamente alisada. Instale la barra parlante a unos 70 mm
(2 7/8 pulgadas) o ms del TV. 15ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 16 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo conectar el subwoofer Cmo conectar el subwoofer automticamente El subwoofer se conecta al sistema automticamente al encenderlos. Si desea ms informacin, consulte la conexin del subwoofer en la Gua de inicio (documento aparte). Cmo conectar el subwoofer manualmente Si no puede conectar el subwoofer al sistema o utiliza mltiples productos inalmbricos y desea especificar la conexin inalmbrica para enlazar el subwoofer al sistema, realice la conexin manualmente. LINK Indicador de alimentacin
/
MENU ENTER 1 Presione MENU.
[SPEAKER] aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. 2 Pulse / para seleccionar
[SPEAKER] y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. 3 Pulse / para seleccionar [LINK]
y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. 4 Pulse / para seleccionar
[START] y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER.
[LINK] parpadea en la pantalla del panel frontal. Para cancelar el enlace manual, seleccione [CANCEL]. 5 Pulse LINK en el subwoofer. Comienza el enlace manual. El indicador de alimentacin del subwoofer parpadea en mbar. 6 Cuando aparezca [DONE] en la pantalla del panel frontal, pulse MENU. Se establece el enlace y el indicador de encendido del subwoofer se ilumina en mbar. 16ES Nota Si aparece [ERROR] en la pantalla del panel frontal, no se ha establecido la conexin con el subwoofer. Vuelva a realizar el procedimiento de conexin manual. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\040PRE.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 17 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cuando el control remoto del TV no funciona Si la barra parlante obstruye el sensor de control remoto del TV, es posible que el control remoto del TV no funcione. En ese caso, habilite la funcin IR repeater del sistema. Puede controlar el TV con su control remoto enviando la seal remota desde la parte trasera de la barra parlante. comando directo del control remoto y el comando a travs de la barra parlante. Incluso si [IR REPEATER] est ajustado en
[ON], dependiendo del TV es posible que esta funcin no funcione. Adems, es posible que tampoco funcionen los controles remotos de otros dispositivos, como aires acondicionados. En tal caso, cambie la posicin en que est instalado el TV o el sistema.
/
MENU ENTER 1 Presione MENU.
[SPEAKER] aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. 2 Pulse / para seleccionar
[SYSTEM] y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. 3 Pulse / para seleccionar [IR REPEATER] y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. 4 Seleccione [ON]. Notas Asegrese de verificar que el control remoto del TV no pueda controlar el TV y, a continuacin, ajuste [IR REPEATER] a
[ON]. Si est ajustado en [ON] cuando el control remoto puede controlar el TV, es posible que no se logre una operacin correcta debido a la interferencia entre el 17ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 18 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo conectar a un TV o dispositivo AV Cmo conectar a un TV o dispositivo AV con el cable HDMI Para conectar a TV 4K o dispositivos 4K Consulte Cmo conectar un TV 4K y dispositivos 4K (pgina 21). Para conectar a una TV compatible con eARC Para la conexin, consulte la Gua de inicio (documento aparte). Para las configuraciones, consulte [EARC]
(pgina 39). Para conectar a un TV distinto del anterior, consulte la Gua de inicio
(documento aparte). Cmo conectar el TV Sony con la funcin BLUETOOTH de forma inalmbrica Al usar el TV* Sony con la funcin BLUETOOTH, puede escuchar el sonido del TV o el dispositivo conectado al TV conectando el sistema y el TV de forma inalmbrica.
* El TV debe ser compatible con A2DP
(Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) del perfil BLUETOOTH. Reproductor Blu-ray Disc, decodificador de cable, decodificador satelital, etc. Cmo escuchar el sonido del TV conectando el sistema y el TV de forma inalmbrica Para conectar el sistema y el TV de forma inalmbrica, debe realizar el emparejamiento del sistema y el TV con la funcin BLUETOOTH. El emparejamiento es el proceso requerido para registrar por adelantado mutuamente la informacin en los dispositivos BLUETOOTH a conectarse de forma inalmbrica. 18ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 19 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM INPUT Botn BLUETOOTH 1 Encienda el TV. 2 Encienda el sistema. 3 Mantenga pulsado simultneamente el botn BLUETOOTH de la barra parlante e INPUT en el control remoto durante 5 segundos. El sistema ingresa en el modo de emparejamiento, [PAIRING]
aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal y el indicador BLUETOOTH parpadea dos veces repetidamente. 4 En el TV, busque el sistema realizando una operacin de emparejamiento. La lista de los dispositivos BLUETOOTH que se buscan aparece en la pantalla del TV. Para que el mtodo de operacin empareje el dispositivo BLUETOOTH con el TV, consulte el Manual de instrucciones del TV. 5 Seleccione HT-G700 en la lista de la pantalla del TV para emparejar el sistema y el TV. 6 Asegrese de que el indicador BLUETOOTH de la barra parlante est encendido en azul y aparezca
[TV-BT] en la pantalla del panel frontal. Se ha establecido una conexin entre el sistema y el TV. 7 Seleccione el programa o la entrada del dispositivo con el control remoto del TV. El sonido de la imagen que se visualiza en la pantalla del TV sale del sistema. 8 Ajuste el volumen del sistema con el control remoto del TV. Al presionar el botn silenciar del control remoto del TV, el sonido se silencia de forma temporal. 19ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 20 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Notas Si el sonido del TV no se emite desde el sistema, presione INPUT para seleccionar la entrada TV y verifique el estado de la pantalla del panel frontal y de los indicadores en la barra parlante.
[TV-BT] aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. El sistema y el TV estn conectados y el sonido del TV se emite desde el sistema. El indicador BLUETOOTH parpadea dos veces repetidamente y [PAIRING]
aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal:
realice el emparejamiento del TV.
[TV] aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal: realice los pasos desde el comienzo. Al conectar el sistema y el TV con el cable HDMI (suministrado), se cancela la conexin BLUETOOTH. Para conectar el sistema y el TV con la funcin BLUETOOTH nuevamente, desconecte el cable HDMI, luego realice la operacin de conexin desde el comienzo. Cuando el sistema est conectado al TV mediante la funcin BLUETOOTH y [AUTO SOUND] est seleccionado como el modo de sonido, se selecciona [STANDARD]
como modo de sonido. Cmo escuchar el sonido del TV emparejado Puede encender o apagar el sistema, ajustar el volumen, y silenciar el sonido con el control remoto del TV al conectar el TV al sistema de forma inalmbrica. 1 Encienda el TV con el control remoto del TV. El sistema se enciende al entrelazarse con la alimentacin del TV, y el sonido del TV sale del sistema. 2 Seleccione el programa o la entrada del dispositivo con el control remoto del TV. El sonido de la imagen que se visualiza en la pantalla del TV sale del sistema. 3 Ajuste el volumen del sistema con el control remoto del TV. Al presionar el botn silenciar del control remoto del TV, el sonido se silencia de forma temporal. Nota Si selecciona una entrada distinta a la del TV en el control remoto suministrado con el sistema, el sonido del TV no sale del sistema. Para emitir el sonido del TV, presione INPUT para seleccionar la entrada TV. Consejo Al apagar el TV, tambin se apaga el sistema al enlazarse con la alimentacin del TV. 20ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 21 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo conectar un TV 4K y dispositivos 4K Todas las tomas HDMI del sistema admiten el formato de video en 4K, HDCP2.2 y HDCP2.3 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 2.2 y 2.3). Para ver el contenido de video en 4K, conecte el televisor 4K y los dispositivos 4K al sistema a travs de una toma HDMI compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3 en cada dispositivo. Solo podr ver contenido del video en 4K mediante la conexin a la toma HDMI compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3. Toma HDMI compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3 TV Toma HDMI compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3 Reproductor Blu-ray Disc, decodificador de cable, decodificador satelital, etc. Cable HDMI (suministrado) Cable HDMI (no suministrado) Utilice un cable HDMI compatible con el formato de vdeo 4K que desea ver. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte Formatos de HDMI video admitidos (pgina 54). Cable ptico digital (no suministrado) 1 Compruebe qu toma HDMI IN de su TV es compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3. Consulte el Manual de instrucciones del TV. 21ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 22 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM 2 Conecte la toma HDMI IN compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3 en el TV y la toma HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) del sistema con el cable HDMI (suministrado). Si la toma HDMI IN del TV compatible con HDCP2.2o HDCP2.3 admite eARC o ARC, la conexin del TV est completa. Vaya al paso 4. 3 Si la toma HDMI IN compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3 del TV no admite eARC o ARC, conecte la toma de salida digital ptica del TV y la toma TV IN (OPT) del sistema con un cable ptico digital (no suministrado). Al conectar el TV y el sistema nicamente por medio de un cable HDMI (suministrado), el sistema no reproduce el sonido del TV. Conecte un cable ptico digital (no suministrado). Se complet la conexin del TV. 4 Conecte la toma HDMI OUT compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3 del dispositivo 4K y la toma HDMI IN del sistema con el cable HDMI (no suministrado). Consulte el Manual de instrucciones del dispositivo 4K para comprobar que la toma HDMI OUT del dispositivo 4K es compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3. Se complet la conexin del dispositivo 4K. 5 Encienda el TV. 6 Encienda el sistema. Consejo Es posible ver contenido en 4K por medio de un dispositivo compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3 incluso en el caso de que los dispositivos conectados tengan distintas versiones (p. ej.: Un TV compatible con HDCP2.2 y un dispositivo 4K compatible con HDCP2.3). 22ES Cmo configurar el formato de la seal HDMI para ver contenido de video en 4K Para ver el contenido de video en 4K, seleccione la configuracin adecuada para el TV 4K y el dispositivo 4K conectados. 1 Presione MENU.
[SPEAKER] aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. 2 Pulse / para seleccionar [HDMI]
y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. 3 Pulse / para seleccionar
[FORMAT] y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. 4 Pulse / repetidamente para seleccionar el ajuste que desea.
[ENHANCED]: seleccinelo cuando tanto el TV como los dispositivos conectados admitan formatos de video que requieren un elevado ancho de banda, como 4K 60p 4:4:4, etc.
[STANDARD]: seleccinelo cuando el TV y los dispositivos conectados admitan formatos de video reproducidos por ancho de banda estndar. Para obtener informacin sobre la relacin de las opciones de configuracin, las seales de formato de video compatibles y los cables HDMI a utilizar, consulte Formatos de HDMI video admitidos (pgina 54). Notas Dependiendo del TV, puede ser necesario configurar el TV para la salida por HDMI. Consulte el Manual de instrucciones del TV. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\050CON.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 23 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cuando la imagen no se pueda ver despus de configurar [FORMAT] en
[ENHANCED], ajstela en [STANDARD]. 23ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 24 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo escuchar msica/sonido Cmo escuchar el TV u otros dispositivos Puede seleccionar el dispositivo conectado y reproducir el sonido de dicho dispositivo. INPUT Pantalla del panel frontal
[TV]
Seleccione el sonido del TV que est conectado a la toma TV IN (OPT) o HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) del sistema. Puede ajustar la toma de entrada de reproduccin en [HDMI] - [TV AUDIO]
del men de configuracin (pgina 39).
[HDMI]
Seleccione el sonido del dispositivo conectado a la toma HDMI IN del sistema.
[BT]
Selecciona el sonido del dispositivo que est conectado al sistema mediante la funcin BLUETOOTH. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte Cmo escuchar msica/sonido con la funcin BLUETOOTH (pgina 27). 2 Ajuste el volumen (pgina 25). Consejo Tambin puede seleccionar la entrada si pulsa en la barra parlante. 1 Pulse INPUT para seleccionar la entrada que desea reproducir. Cada vez que pulsa INPUT, la entrada seleccionada aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal en el siguiente orden:
[TV] [HDMI] [BT]
24ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 25 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo ajustar el volumen SW +/ no funciona cuando el subwoofer no est conectado.
+/
SW +/
Para ajustar el volumen del sistema Pulse +/. El nivel de volumen aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. Para ajustar el volumen del subwoofer Pulse SW (volumen del subwoofer)
+/. El nivel de volumen aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. El subwoofer est diseado para reproducir los sonidos graves o de baja frecuencia. Notas Cuando la fuente de entrada no contiene demasiados sonidos graves, tales como programas de TV, es posible que el sonido grave del subwoofer sea difcil de escuchar. 25ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 26 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Disfrute de un sonido de transmisin multiplex
(AUDIO) Puede disfrutar de un sonido de transmisin multiplex cuando el sistema recibe una seal de transmisin multiplex Dolby Digital. toma HDMI IN con el cable HDMI (no suministrado). Si la toma HDMI IN del TV no es compatible con eARC ni ARC (pgina 35), conecte el TV a la toma TV IN (OPT) con un cable ptico digital (no suministrado) para recibir una seal Dolby Digital. AUDIO no funciona con se conecta un TV u otro dispositivo al sistema con la funcin BLUETOOTH. AUDIO 1 Presione AUDIO varias veces para seleccionar la seal de audio deseada. Pantalla del panel frontal
[MAIN]
[SUB]
[M/S]
Funcin Se emitir el sonido del idioma principal. Se emitir el sonido del subidioma. Se emitirn sonidos combinados del idioma principal y del subidioma. Notas Para recibir una seal Dolby Digital, debe conectar el TV compatible con eARC o ARC (pgina 35) a la toma HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) con el cable HDMI
(suministrado) u otros dispositivos a la 26ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 27 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo escuchar msica/
sonido con la funcin BLUETOOTH Puede escuchar msica si conecta el sistema y un dispositivo mvil con la funcin BLUETOOTH. Cmo escuchar msica emparejando el dispositivo mvil que se conecta por primera vez Para usar la funcin BLUETOOTH, primero debe realizar el emparejamiento del sistema y el dispositivo mvil. Botn BLUETOOTH 1 Mantenga pulsado el botn BLUETOOTH de la barra parlante durante 2 segundos. El sistema ingresa en el modo de emparejamiento, [PAIRING]
aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal y el indicador BLUETOOTH parpadea dos veces repetidamente. 2 En el dispositivo mvil, busque el sistema realizando la operacin de emparejamiento. La lista de los dispositivos BLUETOOTH que se buscan aparece en la pantalla del dispositivo mvil. Para que el mtodo de operacin empareje el dispositivo BLUETOOTH con el dispositivo mvil, consulte el Manual de instrucciones del dispositivo mvil. 3 Seleccione HT-G700 en la lista de la pantalla del dispositivo mvil para emparejar el sistema y el dispositivo mvil. Si se necesita una clave de acceso, escriba 0000. 4 Asegrese de que el indicador BLUETOOTH de la barra parlante est encendido en azul. Se ha establecido una conexin entre el sistema y el dispositivo mvil. 5 Inicie la reproduccin de audio con la aplicacin de msica en el dispositivo mvil conectado. El sonido se emite desde el sistema. 6 Ajuste el volumen (pgina 25). 27ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 28 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Para comprobar el estado de conexin de la funcin BLUETOOTH Estado Estado de modo de espera durante el emparejamiento Intenta realizarse la conexin La conexin ha sido establecida Indicador de BLUETOOTH Parpadea repetidamente dos veces en azul. Parpadea lenta y repetidamente en azul Se enciende en azul 28ES Nota Es posible emparejar la siguiente cantidad de dispositivos BLUETOOTH. Dispositivos mviles: 9 TV Sony con la funcin BLUETOOTH: 1 Si se empareja un nuevo dispositivo luego de haber emparejado la cantidad de dispositivos que se indica arriba, se reemplaza el primer dispositivo emparejado con el dispositivo entrante. Consejos Si no hay un dispositivo mvil emparejado (por ejemplo:
inmediatamente despus de la compra del sistema), el sistema entra en modo emparejamiento simplemente al cambiar la entrada a entrada de BT. Realice el emparejamiento para el segundo y subsiguientes dispositivos mviles. Cmo escuchar msica desde el dispositivo emparejado INPUT 1 Active la funcin BLUETOOTH del dispositivo mvil. 2 Pulse INPUT varias veces para seleccionar [BT]. El sistema se vuelve a conectar automticamente al dispositivo HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\060LST.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 29 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM mvil al que estuvo recientemente conectado. 3 Asegrese de que el indicador BLUETOOTH de la barra parlante est encendido en azul. Se ha establecido una conexin entre el sistema y el dispositivo mvil. 4 Inicie la reproduccin de audio con la aplicacin de msica en el dispositivo mvil conectado. El sonido se emite desde el sistema. 5 Ajuste el volumen (pgina 25). Para desconectar el dispositivo mvil Realice cualquiera de los siguientes procedimientos. Inhabilite la funcin BLUETOOTH en el dispositivo mvil. Configure [BT] - [POWER] en [OFF]
(pgina 40). Apague el sistema o el dispositivo mvil. Consejo Cuando la conexin no est establecida, seleccione HT-G700 en el dispositivo mvil. 29ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 30 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo ajustar la calidad del sonido Cmo disfrutar de una experiencia envolvente
(IMMERSIVE AE) Puede sentirse inmerso en el sonido no solo en direccin horizontal sino tambin vertical con el motor envolvente vertical* de manera efectiva para los modos de sonido (pgina 31). Esta funcin tambin funciona con la seal del canal 2.0 como un programa de TV.
* El motor envolvente vertical es una tecnologa de procesamiento de campos de sonido digital desarrollada por Sony que produce el campo de sonido en la direccin vertical de forma virtual, adems de un campo de sonido en direccin horizontal, a travs de los altavoces delanteros y sin usar los altavoces superiores. No necesita instalar altavoces en el techo y puede disfrutar del sonido con gran presencia, independientemente de la altura del techo. Adems, la funcin casi no se ve afectada por la forma de la habitacin, debido a que no usa el sonido reflejado de una pared y permite la reproduccin de sonido envolvente mejorado. IMMERSIVE AE 1 Pulse IMMERSIVE AE para activar o desactivar la funcin. Pantalla del panel frontal
[IAE.ON]
[IAE.OFF]
Funcin Activa la funcin de sonido envolvente vertical. Desactiva la funcin de sonido envolvente vertical. Notas El efecto envolvente desde todas las direcciones difiere segn la fuente de sonido. Es posible que haya una demora entre el sonido y la imagen, segn la fuente de sonido. Si el TV tiene una funcin que retrasa la imagen, sela para ajustar. La funcin IMMERSIVE AE est disponible nicamente cuando la opcin [AUDIO] -
[EFFECT] se ajusta en [SOUND MODE ON]
(pgina 38). 30ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 31 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Disfrute del efecto de sonido a la medida de las fuentes (modo sonido) Puede disfrutar fcilmente de los efectos de sonido pre programados que estn hechos a la medida para diferentes tipos de fuentes de sonido. Botn CINEMA MUSIC Funcin
[CINEMA] aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. Se siente sumergido por el sonido que viaja detrs de usted, envolviendo todo su cuerpo. Este modo es adecuado para mirar pelculas.
[MUSIC] aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. La intensidad y el lustre del sonido se expresan en detalle. Este modo es adecuado para disfrutar de msica de una forma que lo emocionar. Notas La funcin del modo de sonido se desactiva cuando la opcin [AUDIO] -
[EFFECT] se ajusta en una opcin distinta de [SOUND MODE ON] (pgina 38). Es posible que haya una demora entre el sonido y la imagen, segn la fuente de sonido. Si el TV tiene una funcin que retrasa la imagen, sela para ajustar. 31ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) STANDARD AUTO SOUND MUSIC CINEMA 1 Pulse uno de los botones de seleccin del modo de sonido
(AUTO SOUND, STANDARD, CINEMA, MUSIC) para seleccionarlo. Botn AUTO SOUND [AUTO SOUND]
Funcin aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. Se selecciona automticamente el modo de sonido apropiado entre STANDARD, CINEMA y MUSIC.
[STANDARD] aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. Puede escuchar con claridad el sonido de un programa de TV. STANDARD C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 32 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo hacer que los dilogos sean ms claros
(VOICE) Cmo disfrutar de un sonido claro con volumen bajo a medianoche
(NIGHT) VOICE 1 Pulse VOICE para activar o desactivar la funcin. Pantalla del panel frontal
[Vo.ON]
[Vo.OFF]
Funcin El dilogo se escucha fcilmente mejorando el rango de dilogo. Desactiva la funcin de modo de voz. NIGHT 1 Pulse NIGHT para activar o desactivar la funcin. Pantalla del panel frontal
[N.ON]
[N.OFF]
Funcin El sonido se emite a un volumen bajo con una prdida mnima de la precisin y la claridad del dilogo. Desactiva la funcin del modo nocturno. Nota Al apagar el sistema, esta configuracin se establece en [N.OFF] de forma automtica. 32ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\070SOU.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 33 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Informacin de transmisin Si pulsa la configuracin actual cambia en orden inverso. Cmo comprobar el ajuste de sonido actual
(DISPLAY) Puede comprobar el ajuste actual del modo de sonido, IMMERSIVE AE, modo de voz, modo nocturno e informacin de transmisin actual. DISPLAY
/
1 Presione DISPLAY. El ajuste actual aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. 2 Pulse varias veces para seleccionar el elemento que desea. La configuracin actual que se muestra cambia en el siguiente orden. Modo de sonido (pgina 31) IMMERSIVE AE (pgina 30) Modo de voz (pgina 32) Modo nocturno (pgina 32) 33ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\080HDM.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 34 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Uso de la funcin Control para HDMI Uso de la funcin Control para HDMI Conectar un dispositivo, como un TV o un reproductor Blu-ray Disc, compatible con la funcin Control para HDMI* con un cable HDMI le permite operar el dispositivo fcilmente por medio del control remoto del TV. Las siguientes funciones se pueden usar con la funcin Control para HDMI. Funcin de apagado del sistema Funcin de control de audio del sistema eARC/ARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel/Audio Return Channel) Funcin One-Touch Play Ajustes HDMI ahorro de energa en Modo de espera Nota Es posible que estas funciones puedan utilizarse en dispositivos que no hayan sido fabricados por Sony, pero no se garantiza su funcionamiento.
* El control para HDMI es una norma usada por CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) para permitir que los dispositivos HDMI
(interfaz multimedia de alta definicin) se controlen entre s. Preparacin para el uso de la funcin de control para HDMI Configure [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] en [ON] (pgina 39). El ajuste predeterminado est [ON]. 34ES Active los ajustes de la funcin Control para HDMI en el TV y otros dispositivos conectados al sistema. Consejo Si activa la funcin Control para HDMI
(BRAVIA sync) cuando usa un TV fabricado por Sony, tambin se activa la funcin Control para HDMI del sistema de forma automtica. Funcin de apagado del sistema Al apagar el TV, el sistema se apagar automticamente. Nota Es posible que el dispositivo conectado no se pueda apagar dependiendo del estado del dispositivo. Funcin de control de audio del sistema Si enciende el sistema mientras mira TV, el sonido del TV saldr por los altavoces del sistema. El volumen del sistema se puede ajustar usando el control remoto del TV. Al encender su TV, el sistema se enciende automticamente y el sonido del TV sale de los altavoces del sistema. Las operaciones tambin se pueden realizar con el men del TV. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el Manual de instrucciones de su TV. Notas Dependiendo del TV, es posible que se muestre en la pantalla del TV el nivel de volumen del sistema. El nmero de volumen que se muestra en el TV puede diferir del nmero en la pantalla del panel frontal del sistema. Dependiendo de los ajustes del TV, es posible que no est disponible la funcin de control de audio del sistema. Para HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\080HDM.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 35 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM obtener ms detalles, consulte el Manual de instrucciones de su TV. Segn el TV, si el sonido sali por los altavoces del TV la ltima vez que mir TV, el sistema no enciende an si el TV est encendido, debido al enlace con la alimentacin del TV, incluso si se enciende el TV. que el sistema no se encienda y el sonido y la imagen se emitan por el TV; aun si se reproduce el contenido del dispositivo
(pgina 39). Dependiendo del modelo de TV, es posible que la primera parte del contenido que se est reproduciendo no se reproduzca correctamente. eARC/ARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel/Audio Return Channel) Ajustes HDMI de ahorro de energa en Modo de espera hasta El modo de espera hasta HDMI es una funcin que le permite disfrutar el sonido y la imagen de un dispositivo conectado sin encender el sistema. Es posible reducir el consumo de energa en espera del sistema si ajusta
[HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] en
[AUTO] (pgina 39). El ajuste predeterminado est [AUTO]. Nota Si la imagen de un dispositivo conectado al sistema no se muestra en el TV, ajuste
[HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] en [ON]. Si conecta un TV no fabricado por Sony, le recomendamos que seleccione este ajuste. Si el sistema est conectado a la toma HDMI IN de un TV compatible con eARC o ARC, puede escuchar el sonido del TV desde los altavoces del sistema sin conectar un cable ptico digital. En el sistema, ajuste [HDMI] - [EARC] en
[ON] (pgina 39). El ajuste predeterminado est [ON]. Notas Habilite la funcin eARC o ARC del TV. Para obtener ms informacin, consulte el Manual de instrucciones del TV. Si el TV no es compatible con eARC o ARC, se debe conectar un cable ptico digital
(no suministrado) (consulte la Gua de inicio suministrada). Funcin de reproduccin de un toque Cuando reproduce contenido en un dispositivo (reproductor de Blu-ray Disc, PlayStation4, etc.) conectado al sistema, el sistema y el TV se encienden automticamente, la entrada del sistema cambia a la entrada HDMI y el sonido se emite desde los altavoces del sistema. Notas Si [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] se ajusta en [ON] o [AUTO] y el sonido del TV se emiti desde los altavoces del TV la ltima vez que mir televisin, es posible 35ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\080HDM.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 36 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo usar la funcin BRAVIA Sync Adems de la funcin Control para HDMI, puede usar la funcin BRAVIA sync, como las funciones modo de sonido/seleccin de escena. Nota Estas funciones estn patentadas por Sony. Esta funcin no puede funcionar con productos que no hayan sido fabricados por Sony. FuncinSound mode/
seleccin de escena El campo de sonido del sistema cambia automticamente segn los ajustes de la funcin de seleccin de escena o modo de sonido del TV. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el Manual de instrucciones de su TV. Coloque el modo de sonido en [AUTO SOUND] (pgina 31). 36ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 37 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Cmo cambiar la configuracin Cmo usar el men de configuracin En el men de configuracin es posible ajustar los siguientes elementos. Los ajustes se conservan incluso si se desconecta el cable de alimentacin de ca. 1 Pulse MENU para ingresar en el modo de men de configuracin. Los elementos del men de configuracin aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. 2 Pulse / varias veces para seleccionar el elemento y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. Puede seleccionar los siguientes elementos.
[SPEAKER] (Configuracin de altavoces) (pgina 37)
[AUDIO] (Configuracin de audio) (pgina 38)
[HDMI] (Configuracin HDMI) (pgina 39)
[BT] (Configuracin BLUETOOTH) (pgina 40)
[SYSTEM] (Configuracin del sistema) (pgina 40)
[RESET] (Restauracin del sistema) (pgina 40)
[UPDATE] (Actualizacin del sistema) (pgina 40) 3 Pulse / repetidamente para seleccionar el ajuste y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. Para regresar al nivel superior, pulse BACK. 4 Pulse MENU para salir del modo de men de configuracin. Elementos del men de configuracin Elementos
[SPEAKER]
(Configuracin de altavoces)
[LINK]
(Modo de enlace)
[SUBWOOFER INFO]
(Informacin de la versin del subwoofer) Funcin
[START]: realiza la conexin manual del subwoofer del sistema. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte Cmo conectar el subwoofer (pgina 16). Para cancelar la conexin manual, pulse BACK.
[CANCEL]: vuelve al nivel superior [LINK]. Muestra la informacin de la versin del subwoofer.
[LATEST]: la versin del subwoofer es la ms reciente.
[PLEASE UPDATE]: la versin del subwoofer no es la ms reciente.
[NOT CONNECTED]: el subwoofer no est conectado al sistema. 37ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 38 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Elementos
[AUDIO]
(Configuracin de audio)
[DRC]
(Audio DRC)
[SYNC]
(A/V Sync)
[DIALOG]
(Control de DTS dialog)
[EFFECT]
(Efecto de sonido) Funcin Puede comprimir el rango dinmico de la pista de sonido.
[AUTO]: comprime automticamente el sonido codificado en Dolby TrueHD.
[ON]: reproduce la pista de sonido en formato Dolby y DTS con el tipo de rango dinmico con que la cre el ingeniero de grabacin.
[OFF]: sin compresin del rango dinmico. Cuando el sonido no coincide con las imgenes en la pantalla del TV, puede ajustar la demora entre la imagen y el sonido. Es posible ajustar entre 0 y 120 ms en incrementos de 40 ms. El ajuste predeterminado est [0ms]. Nota Esta funcin nicamente est disponible cuando se selecciona la entrada HDMI. Al ajustar el volumen del dilogo, puede escuchar fcilmente el dilogo, ya que se destaca del ruido ambiental. Esta funcin funciona mientras se reproduce contenido que es compatible con la funcin de control de dilogo DTS:X. Puede ajustar de 0 dB a 6 dB en incrementos de 1 dB. El ajuste predeterminado est [0dB]. Puede seleccionar los efectos de sonido, incluido el modo de sonido.
[SOUND MODE ON]: el motor de sonido envolvente vertical mejora los canales de sonido envolvente y vertical para crear un efecto inmersivo y envolvente virtual como el modo de sonido (pgina 31) y sonido envolvente vertical
(pgina 30).
[DOLBY SPEAKER VIRTUALIZER]: Dolby Speaker Virtualizer mejora los canales de sonido envolvente y vertical para crear un efecto inmersivo y envolvente virtual. Desactiva los efectos de sonido para el formato DTS.
[DTS VITRUAL:X]: la funcin DTS Virtual:X est activada. La tecnologa DTS Virtual:X del sistema le hace sentir que est en el medio de una sala con varios parlantes. Desactiva los efectos de sonido para el formato Dolby.
[NO EFFECT]: Deshabilita los efectos de sonido. 38ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 39 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Elementos
[HDMI]
(Configuracin HDMI)
[CONTROL FOR HDMI]
[STANDBY THROUGH]
[TV AUDIO]
[EARC]
[FORMAT]
(Formato de seal HDMI) Funcin
[ON]: la funcin Control para HDMI est activada. Los dispositivos conectados con un cable HDMI se pueden controlar entre s.
[OFF]: desactivada Esta funcin est disponible cuando establece [CONTROL FOR HDMI] en [ON].
[AUTO]: las seales se emiten de la toma HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) del sistema cuando est encendido el TV mientras el sistema no est encendido. Se puede reducir an ms el consumo de energa del sistema en espera que cuando se selecciona [ON] al apagar el TV conectado.
[ON]: las seales siempre se emiten de la toma HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) del sistema cuando el sistema no est encendido. Si conecta un TV que no sea fabricado por Sony, le recomendamos que seleccione este ajuste.
[OFF]: las seales no se emiten desde la toma HDMI OUT
(TV eARC/ARC) del sistema cuando el sistema no est encendido. Encienda el sistema para disfrutar el contenido de TV de un dispositivo conectado al sistema. El consumo de energa en modo de espera del sistema se puede reducir ms que cuando est ajustado en [ON]. Puede configurar la toma de entrada para la reproduccin del TV.
[AUTO]: reproduce prioritariamente el sonido de la toma HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) cuando el TV est conectado en las tomas HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) y TV IN (OPT).
[OPTICAL]: reproduce el sonido de la toma TV IN (OPT) de la entrada TV. Es posible transferir las seales del contenido de audio de objeto, como Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD y DTS:X o contenido LPCM multicanal con un cable HDMI si se conecta el sistema a un TV compatible con eARC.
[ON]: Activa la funcin eARC. Utilice este ajuste cuando el sistema est conectado a un TV compatible con eARC.
[OFF]: utilice este ajuste cuando el sistema no est conectado a un TV compatible con eARC. Nota Cuando [EARC] est configurado en [ON], confirme el ajuste eARC del TV conectado. Para obtener ms informacin, consulte el Manual de instrucciones del TV. Puede seleccionar el formato de la seal HDMI para la seal de entrada. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte Cmo configurar el formato de la seal HDMI para ver contenido de video en 4K (pgina 22). 39ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 40 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Elementos
[BT]
(Configuracin BLUETOOTH)
[POWER]
(Alimentacin BLUETOOTH)
[STANDBY]
[AAC CODEC]
[SYSTEM]
(Configuracin del sistema)
[IR REPEATER]
[AUTO STANDBY]
[VERSION]
(Informacin de la versin)
[ALL RESET]
[START]
[RESET]
(Restauracin del sistema)
[UPDATE]
(Actualizacin del sistema) Funcin Es posible activar o desactivar la funcin BLUETOOTH.
[ON]: activa la funcin BLUETOOTH.
[OFF]: desactiva la funcin BLUETOOTH. Nota Con la funcin BLUETOOTH desactivada, puede saltear la seal BLUETOOTH y seleccionar el tipo de entrada deseada presionando INPUT. Cuando el sistema tenga almacenada informacin de emparejamiento, puede activar el modo de espera BLUETOOTH para encender el sistema y escuchar msica de un dispositivo BLUETOOTH, incluso cundo el sistema est en el modo de espera.
[ON]: modo de espera BLUETOOTH activado.
[OFF]: modo de espera BLUETOOTH desactivado. Nota El modo en espera BLUETOOTH consume ms energa. Podr disfrutar sonido de alta calidad si AAC est habilitado y el dispositivo admite AAC.
[ON]: Activa el codec AAC.
[OFF]: Desactiva el codec AAC.
[ON]: las seales remotas para el TV se envan desde la parte trasera de la barra parlante.
[OFF]: desactiva esta funcin. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte Cuando el control remoto del TV no funciona (pgina 17).
[ON]: activa la funcin de espera automtica. Cuando no se opera el sistema durante alrededor de 20 minutos, el sistema ingresa automticamente en el modo de espera.
[OFF]: desactivado. La informacin de la versin actual del firmware del sistema aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. Puede restaurar la configuracin del sistema a sus ajustes de fbrica. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte Cmo restaurar el sistema (pgina 50). Despus de conectar una memoria USB con el archivo de actualizacin de software al sistema, puede comenzar la actualizacin. Cuando exista una actualizacin del sistema disponible, le notificaremos en el siguiente sitio web:
https://www.sony.com/am/support Notas Antes de realizar la actualizacin, asegrese de que el subwoofer est encendido y conectado al sistema. Mantenga pulsado y el botn BLUETOOTH en la barra parlante durante 7 segundos para actualizar el software del sistema.
[CANCEL]
Cancela la actualizacin de software. 40ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 41 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM En este caso, el brillo de la pantalla del panel frontal se ajusta en [DARK]. Cmo cambiar el brillo de la pantalla del panel frontal y los indicadores
(DIMMER) Puede modificar el brillo de lo siguiente. Pantalla del panel frontal Indicador de BLUETOOTH Indicador de encendido del subwoofer DIMMER 1 Pulse DIMMER varias veces para seleccionar el ajuste que desea. Pantalla del panel frontal
[BRIGHT]
[DARK]
[OFF]
Funcin La pantalla del panel frontal y el indicador BLUETOOTH se iluminan con ms brillo. La pantalla del panel frontal y el indicador BLUETOOTH se iluminan con menos brillo. Se apaga la pantalla del panel frontal. Nota Cuando selecciona [OFF], la pantalla del panel frontal se apaga. Se enciende automticamente cuando pulsa cualquier botn y vuelve a apagarse si no opera el sistema durante unos 10 segundos. No obstante, en algunos casos, es posible que la pantalla del panel frontal no se apague. 41ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\090SET.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 42 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Ahorro de energa en el modo en espera Verifique que ya ha realizado los siguientes ajustes:
[SYSTEM] - [AUTO STANDBY] est ajustado en [OFF] (pgina 40). (El ajuste predeterminado es [OFF].)
[BT] - [STANDBY] est ajustado en
[OFF] (pgina 40). (El ajuste predeterminado es [ON].) 42ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 43 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Solucin de problemas Solucin de problemas Si el no funciona correctamente, pruebe lo siguiente. 1 Busque la causa y solucione el problema con la informacin de esta seccin. 2 Restaure el sistema. Todos los ajustes del sistema vuelven a su estado inicial. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte Cmo restaurar el sistema (pgina 50). Si persiste alguno de los problemas, consulte al distribuidor Sony ms cercano. Cuando realice la solicitud de reparacin, asegrese de llevar tanto la barra parlante como el subwoofer, aun cuando parezca que uno solo tiene el problema. Alimentacin El sistema no se enciende. Compruebe que el cable de alimentacin de CA est conectado firmemente. Desconecte el cable de alimentacin de CA del tomacorriente de pared y luego vuelva a conectarlo despus de varios minutos. El sistema se apaga automticamente. Est activada la funcin de modo de espera automtico. Configure
[SYSTEM] - [AUTO STANDBY] en [OFF]
(pgina 40). El sistema no se enciende an si el TV est encendido. Configure [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] en [ON] (pgina 39). Es necesario que el TV sea compatible con la funcin de control para HDMI. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el Manual de instrucciones de su TV. Compruebe los ajustes del altavoz del TV. El sistema enciende la funcin sincronizacin con los ajustes del altavoz del TV. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el Manual de instrucciones de su TV. Segn el TV, si el sonido sali por los altavoces del TV la vez anterior, el sistema no enciende an si el TV est encendido, debido al enlace con la alimentacin del TV, incluso si se enciende el TV. El sistema se apaga cuando el TV se apaga. Compruebe los ajustes [HDMI] -
[CONTROL FOR HDMI] (pgina 39). Cuando la funcin Control para HDMI se encuentra activada y la entrada del sistema es TV o HDMI, el sistema se apaga automticamente al apagar el TV. El sistema no se enciende an si el TV est apagado. Compruebe los ajustes [HDMI] -
[CONTROL FOR HDMI] (pgina 39). Para apagar el sistema automticamente junto con el TV, active la funcin Control para HDMI. Esta opcin funciona nicamente si la entrada del sistema es TV o HDMI. El sistema no se apaga automticamente cuando la entrada seleccionada es BLUETOOTH. Es necesario que el TV sea compatible con la funcin de control para HDMI. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el Manual de instrucciones de su TV. El sistema no puede apagarse. Puede que el sistema est en modo demo. Para cancelar el modo demo, reinicie el sistema. Mantenga pulsado 43ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 44 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM
(encendido) y (volumen) en la barra parlante durante ms de 5 segundos (pgina 50). Imagen No hay imagen o la imagen no se proyecta correctamente. Seleccione la entrada apropiada
(pgina 24). Cuando no haya ninguna imagen al seleccionar la entrada de TV, seleccione el canal de TV que desea a travs del control remoto del TV. Cuando no haya ninguna imagen al seleccionar la entrada HDMI, presione el botn de reproduccin del dispositivo conectado. Desconecte al cable HDMI, luego vuelva a conectarlo. Asegrese de que el cable est insertado firmemente. Cuando no haya imagen del dispositivo conectado o la imagen del dispositivo conectado no se emita correctamente, ajuste [HDMI] -
[FORMAT] en [STANDARD]
(pgina 39). Algunas imgenes de dispositivos antiguos pueden no mostrarse correctamente si [HDMI] -
[FORMAT] est ajustado en
[ENHANCED]. Si al conectar el dispositivo con el cable HDMI, no aparece ninguna imagen, asegrese de que el dispositivo est conectado a la toma HDMI IN y que el TV est conectado a la toma HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC). El sistema est conectado a un dispositivo de entrada que no cumple con la HDCP (Proteccin de contenido digital de elevado ancho de banda). En este caso, compruebe las especificaciones del dispositivo conectado. No aparece el contenido 3D por la toma HDMI IN en la pantalla del TV. Dependiendo del TV o del dispositivo de vdeo, es posible que no aparezca 44ES el contenido 3D. Verifique el formato de vdeo HDMI (pgina 54). No aparece el contenido de video 4K por la toma HDMI IN en la pantalla del TV. Dependiendo del TV o del dispositivo de vdeo, es posible que no aparezca el contenido de video 4K. Compruebe la capacidad y la configuracin de vdeo de su TV y su dispositivo de vdeo. Es posible que la imagen no se visualice correctamente si [HDMI] -
[FORMAT] est ajustado en
[ENHANCED]. En este caso, cambie la configuracin a [STANDARD]
(pgina 39). Utilice un cable HDMI de alta velocidad de primera calidad con Ethernet que soporta 18 Gbps o cable HDMI de alta velocidad con Ethernet
(pgina 54). Si el sistema est conectado a una toma HDMI que no es compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3, aparece [ERROR:
TV DOES NOT SUPPORT HDCP2.2 OR 2.3] en la pantalla del panel frontal. Conecte a una toma HDMI compatible con HDCP2.2 o HDCP2.3 del dispositivo 4K o el TV 4K. No aparece una imagen en toda la pantalla del TV. La relacin de aspecto en medios est fija. La imagen y el sonido del dispositivo conectado al sistema no salen por el TV cuando el sistema no est encendido. Configure [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] en [AUTO] u [ON]
(pgina 39). Encienda el sistema, y luego cambie la entrada a la del dispositivo que se est reproduciendo. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 45 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Los contenidos en HDR no pueden visualizarse con un elevado rango dinmico. Verifique la configuracin del TV y el dispositivo conectado. Para obtener detalles, consulte el manual de instrucciones de su TV y del dispositivo conectado. Algunos dispositivos pueden convertir contenidos en HDR a SDR si el ancho de banda no es suficiente. En ese caso, ajuste [HDMI] -
[FORMAT] en [ENHANCED]
(pgina 39) si el TV y el dispositivo conectado admiten un ancho de banda de hasta 18 Gbps. Cuando seleccione [ENHANCED], asegrese de utilizar un cable HDMI de alta velocidad de primera calidad con Ethernet que admita 18 Gbps
(pgina 54). Sonido El sistema no se puede conectar a un TV con la funcin BLUETOOTH. Al conectar el sistema y el TV con el cable HDMI (suministrado), se cancela la conexin BLUETOOTH. Desconecte el cable HDMI, luego realice la operacin de conexin desde el principio (pgina 18). No se reproduce el sonido del TV en el sistema. Compruebe el tipo y conexin del cable HDMI o el cable ptico digital que est conectado al sistema y el TV
(consulte la Gua de inicio suministrada). Desconecte los cables que estn conectados entre el TV y el sistema y vuelva a conectarlos firmemente. Desconecte los cables de alimentacin de CA del TV y del sistema de la salida de CA, luego conctelos nuevamente. Cuando el sistema y el TV estn conectados mediante un cable HDMI, verifique lo siguiente. La toma HDMI del TV conectado est etiquetada con eARC o ARC. La funcin de control para HDMI del TV esta activada. Se activa la funcin eARC o ARC del TV.
[HDMI] - [EARC] est ajustado en
[ON] (pgina 39).
[HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] est ajustado en [ON] (pgina 39). Si su TV no es compatible con eARC, ajuste [HDMI] - [EARC] en [OFF]
(pgina 39). Si su TV no es compatible con eARC ni ARC, se debe conectar un cable ptico digital (no suministrado)
(consulte la Gua de inicio suministrada). Si el TV no es compatible con eARC ni ARC, el sonido del TV no se emitir por el sistema aun si el sistema est conectado a la toma HDMI IN del TV. Presione INPUT varias veces para seleccionar la entrada del TV
(pgina 24). Aumente el volumen en el sistema o cancele el modo de silencio. Si el sonido del decodificador de cable/satelital conectado al TV no se emite, conecte el dispositivo a una toma HDMI IN del sistema y cambie la entrada del sistema a HDMI (consulte la Gua de inicio suministrada). Dependiendo del orden en el que enciende el TV y el sistema, es posible que el sistema se silencie y que
[MUTED] aparezca en la pantalla del panel frontal. Si esto ocurre, primero encienda el TV y luego el sistema. Ajuste la configuracin de los altavoces del TV (BRAVIA) en Sistema de audio. Consulte el Manual de instrucciones de su TV que indica cmo configurarlo. 45ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 46 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM La imagen y el sonido del dispositivo conectado al sistema no salen por el TV cuando el sistema no est encendido. Configure [HDMI] - [STANDBY THROUGH] en [AUTO] u [ON]
(pgina 39). Encienda el sistema, y luego cambie la entrada a la del dispositivo que se est reproduciendo. El sonido se reproduce tanto en el sistema como en el TV. Silencie el sonido del sistema o del TV. El sonido proveniente del sistema no est al mismo volumen que el del TV, incluso al ajustar ambos niveles en el mismo valor. Si la funcin Control para HDMI se encuentra activada, es probable que el nivel de volumen del sistema aparezca en el TV como el volumen del TV. El volumen del sonido proveniente del sistema de sonido y el TV son distintos, incluso si ambos estn ajustados en el mismo valor. El volumen del sonido proveniente del sistema y el TV son distintos dependiendo de las caractersticas de procesamiento de cada uno de estos dispositivos, pero esto no implica que estn funcionando mal. El sonido se interrumpe al mirar un programa de TV o algn contenido en un disco Blu-ray, etc. Revise los ajustes del modo de sonido (pgina 31). Si el modo de sonido est configurado como [AUTO SOUND], es posible que el sonido se interrumpa mientras el modo de sonido cambia de forma automtica de acuerdo con la informacin del programa que se est reproduciendo. Si no desea cambiar el modo de sonido de forma automtica, elija una opcin de configuracin del modo de sonido que no sea [AUTO SOUND]. 46ES El sonido del TV que se emite desde el sistema se retrasa con respecto a la imagen. Ajuste [AUDIO] - [SYNC] en [0ms] si est ajustado en el rango de 40 ms a 120 ms (pgina 38). Es posible que haya una demora entre el sonido y la imagen, segn la fuente de sonido. Si el TV tiene una funcin que retrasa la imagen, sela para ajustar. El dispositivo que est conectado al sistema no reproduce ningn sonido o reproduce sonidos a muy bajo nivel. Presione + en el control remoto y consulte el nivel de volumen
(pgina 12). Presione o + en el control remoto o cancele la funcin de silencio (pgina 12). Asegrese de que la fuente de entrada est seleccionada correctamente. Intente con otras fuentes de entrada presionando varias veces el botn INPUT
(pgina 24). Compruebe que todos los cables del sistema y el dispositivo conectado estn insertados firmemente. Cuando reproduce contenido compatible con la tecnologa de proteccin de derechos de autor
(HDCP), es posible que el sonido no salga por el sistema. Configure [HDMI] - [FORMAT] en
[STANDARD] (pgina 22). No se puede obtener el efecto envolvente. Segn la seal de entrada y la configuracin del modo de sonido, puede que el procesamiento del sonido envolvente no funcione de forma efectiva. El efecto envolvente puede ser leve segn el programa o el disco. Para reproducir audio multicanal, compruebe la configuracin de salida de audio digital del dispositivo HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 47 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM conectado al sistema. Para obtener detalles, consulte el Manual de instrucciones suministrado con el dispositivo conectado. Subwoofer El subwoofer no emite sonido o solo se escucha un nivel muy bajo de sonido. Asegrese de que el indicador de encendido del subwoofer est encendido en verde o mbar. Si el indicador de alimentacin del subwoofer no se enciende, intente lo siguiente:
Asegrese de que el cable de alimentacin de CA del subwoofer est conectado correctamente. Presione (alimentacin) del subwoofer para conectar la alimentacin. Si el indicador de alimentacin del subwoofer parpadea suavemente en verde o mbar, o se enciende en rojo, intente lo siguiente:
Mueva el subwoofer a una ubicacin cercana a la barra parlante para que el indicador de encendido del subwoofer se encienda en verde o mbar. Siga los pasos de Cmo conectar el subwoofer (pgina 16). Si el indicador de alimentacin del subwoofer parpadea en rojo, presione (alimentacin) en el subwoofer para desconectar la alimentacin y verifique si los orificios de ventilacin del subwoofer estn bloqueados. El subwoofer est diseado para reproducir los sonidos graves o de baja frecuencia. Si las fuentes de entrada que contienen muy pocos componentes de sonidos graves (por ejemplo, una transmisin de TV), el sonido del subwoofer puede ser difcil de or. Reproduzca el tema musical de muestra que viene con el dispositivo siguiendo los pasos ms abajo y asegrese de que el sonido provenga del subwoofer. Mantenga pulsado en la barra parlante durante 5 segundos. Se reproduce el tema musical de muestra que viene con el dispositivo. Presione nuevamente
. Se detiene la reproduccin del tema musical de muestra incorporado al dispositivo y el sistema regresa al estado anterior. Presione SW + en el control remoto para aumentar el volumen del subwoofer (pgina 12). Coloque el modo de noche en apagado (pgina 32). El sonido salta o tiene ruidos. Si hay un dispositivo cerca que genere ondas electromagnticas, como una LAN inalmbrica o un horno microondas en uso, coloque el sistema lejos de estos. Si hay un obstculo entre la barra parlante y el subwoofer, muvalo o qutelo. No cubra la parte superior de la barra parlante con objetos metlicos como el marco del televisor o similares ya que las funciones inalmbricas pueden volverse inestables. Coloque la barra parlante y el subwoofer lo ms cerca posible uno de otro. Cambie la frecuencia de LAN inalmbrica de cualquier enrutador LAN inalmbrico o PC a un rango de 5 GHz. Cambie la conexin de red del TV o el reproductor Blu-ray Disc de inalmbrica a cableada. 47ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 48 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Conexin del dispositivo USB El dispositivo USB no es reconocido. Intente lo siguiente:
Apague el sistema. Extraiga y vuelva a conectar el dispositivo USB. Encienda el sistema. Asegrese de que el dispositivo USB est conectado firmemente al puerto UPDATE. Verifique si el dispositivo USB o un cable est daado. Los archivos almacenados en la memoria USB no se reproducen. El puerto USB del sistema es solo para actualizaciones de software
(pgina 40). El sistema no admite la reproduccin USB. Conexin del dispositivo mvil No se puede hacer el emparejamiento. Coloque el sistema y el dispositivo BLUETOOTH ms cerca el uno del otro. Asegrese de que este sistema no est recibiendo interferencia de un dispositivo de LAN inalmbrica, cualquier otro dispositivo inalmbrico de 2,4 GHz o un horno microondas. Si hay un dispositivo que genera radiacin electromagntica cerca, aljelo del sistema. No se puede completar la conexin BLUETOOTH. Asegrese de que el indicador BLUETOOTH de la barra parlante est encendido (pgina 27). Asegrese de que el dispositivo BLUETOOTH con el que se est conectando est encendido y que la funcin BLUETOOTH est habilitada. Coloque el sistema y el dispositivo BLUETOOTH ms cerca el uno del otro. Vuelva a emparejar el sistema y el dispositivo BLUETOOTH. Es posible que primero deba cancelar el emparejamiento con este sistema mediante el dispositivo BLUETOOTH. Es posible que se elimine la informacin de emparejamiento. Realice nuevamente la operacin de emparejamiento (pgina 27). El sistema no emite el sonido del dispositivo mvil BLUETOOTH conectado. Asegrese de que el indicador BLUETOOTH de la barra parlante est encendido (pgina 27). Coloque el sistema y el dispositivo BLUETOOTH ms cerca el uno del otro. Si hay un dispositivo que genera radiacin electromagntica, como un dispositivo LAN inalmbrica, cualquier otro dispositivo BLUETOOTH o un horno microondas cerca, aljelo de este sistema. Quite cualquier obstculo entre el sistema y el dispositivo BLUETOOTH o aleje el sistema del obstculo. Vuelva a colocar el dispositivo BLUETOOTH. Cambie la frecuencia de LAN inalmbrica de cualquier enrutador LAN inalmbrico o PC a un rango de 5 GHz. Aumente el volumen en el dispositivo BLUETOOTH. Control remoto El control remoto del sistema no funciona. Apunte el control remoto al sensor de control remoto de la barra parlante
(pgina 12). Quite los obstculos que estn entre el control remoto y el sistema. 48ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 49 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Reemplace ambas bateras del control remoto por unas nuevas si estuvieran gastadas. Asegrese de estar presionando el botn correcto del control remoto. El control remoto del TV no funciona. El problema podra solucionarse si ajusta [SYSTEM] - [IR REPEATER] en
[ON] (pgina 40). Actualizacin de software No es posible actualizar el software. Utilice la memoria USB donde esta almacenado el archivo de actualizacin de software para actualizarlo (pgina 40). Otros La funcin de control para HDMI no funciona correctamente. Compruebe la conexin con el sistema (consulte la Gua de inicio suministrada). Habilite la funcin de control para HDMI del TV. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el Manual de instrucciones de su TV. Espere un momento y vuelva a intentarlo. Si desenchufa el sistema, puede demorar un poco antes de que las operaciones se puedan realizar. Espere 15 segundos o ms e intntelo nuevamente. Asegrese de que los dispositivos conectados al sistema admitan la funcin Control para HDMI. Habilite la funcin Control para HDMI en los dispositivos conectados al sistema. Para ms detalles, consulte el Manual de instrucciones de su dispositivo. El tipo y la cantidad de dispositivos que se pueden controlar con la funcin de control para HDMI estn restringidos por la norma HDMI CEC de esta forma:
Dispositivos de grabacin
(Grabadora de Blu-ray Disc, grabadora de DVD, etc.): hasta 3 dispositivos Dispositivos de reproduccin
(Grabadora de Blu-ray Disc, grabadora de DVD, etc.): hasta 3 dispositivos Dispositivos relacionados con sintonizadores: hasta 4 dispositivos Sistema de audio (receptor/
auriculares): hasta 1 dispositivo
(usado por este sistema)
[PROTECT] parpadea en la pantalla del panel frontal y el sistema se apaga. Desconecte el cable de alimentacin de CA y asegrese de que no haya nada obstruyendo los orificios de ventilacin del sistema. Los sensores del TV no funcionan correctamente. El sistema puede estar bloqueando algunos sensores (como el sensor de brillo), el receptor del control remoto del TV, el emisor de gafas 3D
(transmisin infrarroja) de un TV 3D que admite el sistema de gafas 3D infrarrojas o la comunicacin inalmbrica. Aleje el sistema del TV dentro de un rango que permita que esas partes funcionen correctamente. Para obtener informacin sobre la ubicacin de los sensores y el receptor del control remoto, consulte Manual de instrucciones suministrado con el TV. Las funciones inalmbricas (funcin BLUETOOTH o el subwoofer) son inestables. No coloque objetos metlicos que no sea un TV alrededor del sistema. 49ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\100TBS.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 50 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM De repente, se reproduce msica con la que no est familiarizado. Es posible que se haya reproducido la en la barra de sonido para msica de muestra preinstalada. Pulse detener la reproduccin. El sistema no funciona correctamente. Puede que el sistema est en modo demo. Para cancelar el modo demo, reinicie el sistema. Mantenga pulsado
(encendido) y (volumen) en la barra parlante durante ms de 5 segundos (pgina 50). Cmo restaurar el sistema Si el sistema no funciona correctamente, restaure el sistema de la siguiente manera:
1 Presione MENU.
[SPEAKER] aparece en la pantalla del panel frontal. 2 Pulse / para seleccionar [RESET]
y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. 3 Pulse / para seleccionar [ALL RESET] y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. 4 Pulse / para seleccionar
[START] y, a continuacin, pulse ENTER. Las configuraciones vuelven a su estado inicial. Para cancelar la restauracin Seleccione [CANCEL] en el paso 4. Si no puede ejecutar el proceso de restauracin desde el men de configuracin Mantenga pulsado (encendido) y
(volumen) en la barra parlante durante ms de 5 segundos. Las configuraciones vuelven a su estado inicial. Nota Al restaurar el sistema, se puede perder el enlace con el subwoofer. En este caso, realice lo siguiente: Cmo conectar el subwoofer (pgina 16) HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) 50ES C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 51 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Informacin adicional Especificaciones Barra parlante (SA-G700) Seccin del amplificador Modelos de EE. UU.:
POTENCIA DE SALIDA Y DISTORSIN ARMNICA TOTAL:
(FTC) Frontal IZQ + Frontal DER:
Con cargas de 4 ohms, ambos canales impulsados, de 200 Hz - 20.000 Hz;
potencia nominal de 35 W RMS mnimo por canal, no ms del 1% de distorsin armnica total de 250 mW para la salida nominal. POTENCIA DE SALIDA (referencia) altavoz delantero IZQ/delantero DER/
central: 100 W (por canal a 4 ohms, 1 kHz) Modelos canadienses:
POTENCIA DE SALIDA (nominal) Frontal IZQ + Frontal DER: 60 W + 60 W
(a 4 ohms, 1 kHz, 1% THD) POTENCIA DE SALIDA (referencia) altavoz delantero IZQ/delantero DER/
central: 100 W (por canal a 4 ohms, 1 kHz) Entradas HDMI IN*
TV IN (OPT) Salidas HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC)*
* Las tomas HDMI IN y HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) admiten los protocolos HDCP2.2 y HDCP2.3. Los protocolos HDCP2.2 y HDCP2.3 son una nueva tecnologa mejorada de proteccin de derechos de autor que se utiliza para proteger contenido, como pelculas 4K. Seccin HDMI Conector tipo A (19 terminales) Seccin BLUETOOTH Sistema de comunicacin Especificacin de BLUETOOTH versin 4.2 Salida Especificacin de BLUETOOTH potencia clase 1 Rango de comunicacin mximo Campo visual de aprox. 30 m1) Cantidad mxima de dispositivos para registrar 10 dispositivos Banda de frecuencia Banda de 2,4 GHz (2,4000 GHz -
2,4835 GHz) Mtodo de modulacin FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum) Perfiles compatibles con BLUETOOTH2) A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) Codecs compatibles3) SBC4), AAC5) Rango de transmisin (A2DP) 20 Hz - 20.000 Hz (frecuencia de muestreo 32 kHz, 44,1 kHz, 48 kHz) 1) El rango real variar dependiendo de los factores como obstculos entre los dispositivos, campos magnticos alrededor de un horno de microondas, electricidad esttica, uso de telfonos inalmbricos, sensibilidad de recepcin, sistema operativo, aplicaciones de software, etc. 2) Los perfiles BLUETOOTH estndar indican el propsito de la comunicacin de BLUETOOTH entre dispositivos. 3) Codec: compresin de seal de audio y formato de conversin 4) Abreviatura de Codec de subbandas 5) Abreviatura de codificacin avanzada de audio Seccin del bloque de altavoces delantero IZQ/delantero DER/central Sistema de altavoces sistema de 3 altavoces, suspensin acstica Altavoz 45 mm 100 mm tipo cono 51ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 52 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Generalidades Requisitos de energa 120 V CA, 60 Hz Consumo de energa Activado: 45 W Modo de espera: 0,5 W o menos
(modo de ahorro de energa)
(Cuando [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] y [BT] - [STANDBY] estn ajustados en [OFF]) Modo de espera: 2 W o menos*
(Cuando [HDMI] - [CONTROL FOR HDMI] y [BT] - [STANDBY] estn ajustados en [ON])
* Cuando no detecte una conexin HDMI ni tampoco guarde un historial de emparejamientoBLUETOOTH, el sistema ingresa automticamente en el modo Ahorro de energa. Dimensiones* (aprox.) (ancho/alto/
profundidad) 980 mm 64 mm 108 mm
* No incluye la parte saliente Peso (aprox.) 3,5 kg Subwoofer (SA-WG700) POTENCIA DE SALIDA (referencia) 100 W (a 4 ohms, 100 Hz) Sistema de altavoces Sistema de altavoces del subwoofer, reflector de bajos Altavoz 160 mm, tipo cono Requisitos de energa 120 V CA, 60 Hz Consumo de energa Encendido: 20 W Modo de espera: 0,5 W o menos Dimensiones* (aprox.) (ancho/alto/
profundidad) 192 mm 387 mm 406 mm
* No incluye la parte saliente Peso (aprox.) XX kg Seccin de transmisin/
recepcin inalmbrica Banda de frecuencia 2,4 GHz (2,404 GHz - 2,476 GHz) Mtodo de modulacin GFSK El diseo y las especificaciones estn sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso. 52ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 53 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Formatos de entrada de audio admitidos Este sistema soporta los siguientes formatos de audio. Formato LPCM 2ch LPCM 5.1ch LPCM 7.1ch Dolby Digital Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD Dolby Atmos - Dolby Digital Plus DTS DTS-ES Discrete 6.1, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 DTS 96/24 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD LBR DTS:X
: formato compatible.
: formato no compatible. Funcin
[HDMI]
[TV]
(eARC)
[TV]
(ARC)
[TV]
(OPT) Nota La toma HDMI IN no acepta formatos de audio que contengan proteccin contra copia tal como Super Audio CD o DVD-Audio. 53ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 54 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Formatos de HDMI video admitidos Este sistema soporta los siguientes formatos de video:
Resolucin Tasa del cuadro 3D Espacio de color Profundidad del color Ajuste [HDMI] -
[FORMAT]
4K 4096 2160p 3840 2160p 4K 4096 2160p 3840 2160p 1920 1080p 1920 1080i 1280 720p 720 480p 720 576p 640 480p 50/59,94/60 Hz 23,98/24/25/29,97/30 Hz 50/59,94/60 Hz 23,98/24/25/29,97/30 Hz 25/29,97/30/50/
59,94/60 Hz 23,98/24 Hz 50/59,94/60 Hz 50/59,94/60 Hz 23,98/24/29,97/30 Hz 59,94/60 Hz 50 Hz 59,94/60 Hz
[ENHANCED]1) RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 YCbCr 4:2:0 RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:0 RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 8 bit 8/10/12 bit 10/12 bit 10/12 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8/10/12 bit
[STANDARD]2) RGB 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 8/10/12 bit RGB 4:4:4
: Compatible con seal 3D en formato Side-by-Side (Half)
: Compatible con seal 3D en formato Frame packing y Over-Under (Top-and-Bottom) 1) Utilice de un cable HDMI de alta velocidad de primera calidad con Ethernet que soporta 18 Gbps. 2) Utilice un cable HDMI de alta velocidad de primera calidad con Ethernet o un cable HDMI de alta velocidad Sony con Ethernet con el logotipo que indica el tipo de cable. Notas sobre la toma HDMI y las conexiones HDMI Utilice un cable autorizado para HDMI. No se recomienda el uso de un cable de conversin HDMI-DVI. El dispositivo conectado puede anular las seales de audio (frecuencia de muestreo, longitud de bits, etc.) transmitidas desde una toma HDMI. El sonido puede interrumpirse si se cambia la frecuencia de muestreo o la cantidad de canales de seales de salida de audio del dispositivo de reproduccin. Cuando se selecciona la entrada TV, las seales de video que pasan a travs de la toma HDMI IN salen por la toma HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC). Este sistema es compatible con TRILUMINOS. 54ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 55 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Las tomas HDMI IN y HDMI OUT (TV eARC/ARC) admiten un ancho de banda de hasta 18 Gbps, HDCP2.2 y HDCP2.31), amplios espacios de color BT.20202) y una conexin de contenidos HDR (High Dynamic Range)3). Al conectarse a un TV con una resolucin distinta a la del sistema, el sistema puede reiniciarse para restablecer la configuracin de salida de imagen. 1) HDCP2.2 y HDCP2.3 son una tecnologa de proteccin de derechos de autor recientemente mejorada para proteger contenido como pelculas 4K. 2) El espacio de color BT.2020 es un nuevo estndar de color ms amplio definido por sistemas de televisin de ultra alta definicin. 3) HDR es un formato de video emergente que puede mostrar un rango ms amplio de niveles de brillo. El sistema es compatible con HDR10, HLG (Hybrid Log Gamma) y Dolby Vision. 55ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 56 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Comunicacin por BLUETOOTH Los dispositivos BLUETOOTH deben utilizarse dentro de aproximadamente 10 metros (33 pies) (distancia sin obstrucciones) uno del otro. El rango de comunicacin efectiva se puede reducir en las siguientes condiciones. Cuando una persona, objeto metlico, pared u otra obstruccin est entre los dispositivos con una conexin BLUETOOTH Ubicaciones donde est instalada una LAN inalmbrica Alrededor de hornos de microondas que estn en uso Ubicaciones donde hay otras ondas electromagnticas Los dispositivos BLUETOOTH y las LAN inalmbricas (IEEE 802.11 b/g/n) utilizan la misma banda de frecuencia (2,4 GHz). Cuando utilice su dispositivo BLUETOOTH cerca de un dispositivo con capacidad de LAN inalmbrica, es posible que ocurra interferencia electromagntica. Esto podra ocasionar tasas de transferencia de datos bajas, ruido o incapacidad para conectarse. Si esto llegara a suceder, intente los siguientes remedios:
Use este sistema al menos a 10 metros
(33 pies) retirado del dispositivo de LAN inalmbrica. Apague la energa al dispositivo de la LAN inalmbrica cuando utilice su dispositivo BLUETOOTH dentro de los 10 metros (33 pies). Instale este sistema y el dispositivo BLUETOOTH tan cerca uno del otro como sea posible. La transmisin de las ondas de radio de este sistema puede interferir con la operacin de algunos dispositivos mdicos. Puesto que esta interferencia puede ocasionar fallas, siempre apague la energa de este sistema y del dispositivo BLUETOOTH en las siguientes ubicaciones:
56ES En hospitales, trenes, aeronaves, gasolineras y en cualquier lugar donde haya gases inflamables Cerca de puertas automticas o alarmas de incendio Este sistema soporta funciones de seguridad que cumplen con la especificacin BLUETOOTH para garantizar una conexin segura durante la comunicacin utilizando tecnologa BLUETOOTH. Sin embargo, esta seguridad puede ser insuficiente dependiendo del contenido de configuracin y de otros factores, por lo que siempre tenga cuidado cuando realice comunicaciones utilizando tecnologa BLUETOOTH. Sony no puede ser responsabilizado de ninguna manera por daos u otras prdidas que resulten por las fugas de informacin durante la comunicacin utilizando tecnologa BLUETOOTH. La comunicacin BLUETOOTH no est necesariamente garantizada con todos los dispositivos BLUETOOTH que tengan el mismo perfil que este sistema. Los dispositivos BLUETOOTH conectados con este sistema deben cumplir con la especificacin BLUETOOTH recomendada por Bluetooth SIG, Inc., y deben estar certificados para cumplimiento. Sin embargo, incluso cuando un dispositivo cumple con la especificacin BLUETOOTH, puede haber casos donde las caractersticas o especificaciones del dispositivo BLUETOOTH hagan imposible la conexin o conlleven a diferentes mtodos de control, visualizacin o funcionamiento. Es posible que ocurra ruido o que el audio se corte dependiendo del dispositivo BLUETOOTH conectado con este sistema, el entorno de las comunicaciones o las condiciones circundantes. Si tiene preguntas o problemas relacionados con su sistema, consulte a su distribuidor Sony ms cercano. HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 57 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM ACUERDO DE LICENCIA DE USUARIO FINAL IMPORTANTE:
ANTES DE UTILIZAR EL SOFTWARE, LEA ATENTAMENTE ESTE ACUERDO DE LICENCIA DE USUARIO FINAL (EULA). SI UTILIZA EL SOFTWARE, ACEPTA LAS CONDICIONES DE ESTE EULA. SI NO ACEPTA LAS CONDICIONES DEL PRESENTE EULA, NO PODR UTILIZAR EL SOFTWARE. Este EULA es un acuerdo legal entre usted y Sony Electronics Inc. (SONY). El presente EULA rige sus derechos y obligaciones en relacin con el software SONY de SONY y/o sus licenciantes externos (incluidos los afiliados de SONY) y sus respectivos afiliados (en conjunto, PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS), junto con cualquier actualizacin/
mejora suministrada por SONY, cualquier documentacin impresa, en lnea o por otro medio electrnico para dicho software y los archivos de datos creados mediante el uso de dicho software (en conjunto, el SOFTWARE). Independientemente de lo anterior, cualquier parte del SOFTWARE que tenga un acuerdo de licencia de usuario final separado (incluidas, entre otras, Licencia Pblica General GNU y Licencia Pblica General Reducida/para Bibliotecas) se regir por los acuerdos de licencia de usuario final separados correspondientes en lugar de las condiciones de este EULA en el alcance que lo requiera dicho acuerdo de licencia de usuario final separado
(SOFTWARE EXCLUIDO). LICENCIA DE SOFTWARE El SOFTWARE no se vende, se otorga una licencia. El SOFTWARE est protegido por las leyes de derecho de autor y otras leyes y tratados internacionales sobre propiedad intelectual. DERECHOS DE AUTOR Todos los derechos del SOFTWARE
(incluidos, entre otros, imgenes, fotografas, animaciones, videos, audio, msica, texto y applets incorporados al SOFTWARE ) son propiedad de SONY o de uno o ms de sus PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS. OTORGAMIENTO DE LICENCIA SONY le otorga una licencia limitada para usar el SOFTWARE nicamente en relacin con el dispositivo compatible
(DISPOSITIVO) y solo para su uso individual y no comercial. SONY y los PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS se reservan expresamente todos los derechos e intereses (incluidos, entre otros, todos los derechos de propiedad intelectual) sobre el SOFTWARE que no otorgue especficamente este EULA. REQUISITOS Y LIMITACIONES Se prohbe copiar, publicar, adaptar, redistribuir, intentar extraer el cdigo fuente, modificar, aplicar ingeniera inversa, descompilar o desarmar el SOFTWARE, total o parcialmente, y crear trabajo derivado a partir del SOFTWARE a menos que el SOFTWARE facilite intencionalmente dicho trabajo derivado. Se prohbe modificar o alterar cualquier funcionalidad de gestin de derechos digitales del SOFTWARE. Se prohbe anular, modificar, destruir o eludir cualquiera de las funciones o protecciones del SOFTWARE o cualquier mecanismo que est vinculado operativamente al SOFTWARE. Se prohbe separar cualquier componente individual del SOFTWARE para utilizarlo en ms de un DISPOSITIVO a menos que SONY lo autorice expresamente. Se prohbe eliminar, alterar, cubrir o mutilar cualquier marca comercial o avisos del SOFTWARE. Se prohbe 57ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 58 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM compartir, distribuir, rentar, alquilar, otorgar sublicencias, ceder, transferir o vender el SOFTWARE. El software, los servicios de red o los productos distintos del SOFTWARE de los que dependa el rendimiento del SOFTWARE, podrn interrumpirse o discontinuarse a discrecin de los proveedores
(proveedores de programas informticos, proveedores de servicios o SONY). Ni SONY ni dichos proveedores garantizar que el SOFTWARE, los servicios de red, el contenido u otros productos seguirn estando disponibles o funcionarn sin interrupcin o modificacin. USO DEL SOFTWARE CON MATERIAL PROTEGIDO POR DERECHOS DE AUTOR Podr utilizar el SOFTWARE para ver, almacenar, procesar y/o utilizar contenido creado por usted o terceros. Dicho contenido puede estar protegido por derechos de autor y otras leyes y/o acuerdos de propiedad intelectual. Usted acuerda utilizar el SOFTWARE nicamente en cumplimiento de las leyes y acuerdos que se apliquen a dicho contenido. Usted acuerda y presta su consentimiento a que SONY pueda tomar las medidas correspondientes para proteger los derechos de autor del contenido almacenado, procesado o utilizado con el SOFTWARE. Dichas medidas incluyen, entre otras, contar la frecuencia de las copias de seguridad y restauracin mediante determinadas funciones del SOFTWARE, rechazar la solicitud de restauracin de datos o rescindir el presente EULA en caso de uso ilegtimo del SOFTWARE. SERVICIO DE CONTENIDO TENGA PRESENTE, TAMBIN, QUE EL SOFTWARE PUEDE ESTAR DISEADO PARA UTILIZARLO CON CONTENIDO DISPONIBLE EN UNO O MS SERVICIOS DE CONTENIDO (SERVICIO DE 58ES CONTENIDO). EL USO DEL SERVICIO Y EL CONTENIDO EST SUJETO A LAS CONDICIONES DE SERVICIO DE DICHO SERVICIO DE CONTENIDO. SI NO ACEPTA DICHAS CONDICIONES, EL USO DEL SOFTWARE PUEDE SER LIMITADO. Usted presta su consentimiento y acuerda que determinado contenido y servicios disponibles mediante el SOFTWARE pueden estar prestados por terceros sobre los que SONY no tiene ningn control. EL USO DEL SERVICIO DE CONTENIDO REQUIERE UNA CONEXIN A INTERNET. EL SERVICIO DE CONTENIDO PODR DISCONTINUARSE EN CUALQUIER MOMENTO. CONECTIVIDAD A INTERNET Y SERVICIOS DE TERCEROS Usted presta su consentimiento y acuerda que el acceso a determinadas funciones del SOFTWARE puede requerir una conexin a Internet de la que usted es exclusivamente responsable. Adems, usted es el responsable exclusivo del pago de cualquier tarifa de terceros asociada con la conexin a Internet, incluidas, entre otros, al proveedor de servicios de Internet o los cargos por tiempo de aire. El funcionamiento del SOFTWARE puede estar limitado o restringido en funcin de la capacidad, ancho de banda o limitaciones tcnicas de su conexin y servicio de Internet. La prestacin, calidad y seguridad de dicha conectividad de Internet es responsabilidad exclusiva del proveedor de dicho servicio. EXPORTACIN Y OTRAS REGLAMENTACIONES Usted acuerda cumplir con todas las restricciones y reglamentaciones sobre exportacin y reexportacin correspondientes al rea o pas en el que reside y no transferir ni autorizar a transferir, el SOFTWARE a pases HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 59 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM prohibidos o en infraccin de dichas restricciones o reglamentaciones. ACTIVIDADES DE ALTO RIESGO El SOFTWARE no es tolerante a las fallas y no ha sido diseado ni fabricado para uso o reventa como equipo de control en lnea en entornos peligrosos que requieren un rendimiento a prueba de fallos, como la operacin de instalaciones nucleares, sistemas de aeronavegacin o comunicacin, control de trfico areo, maquinas de soporte de vida directo o sistemas de armamentos, en los cuales la falla del SOFTWARE podra ocasionar muertes, lesiones personales, lesiones fsicas graves o daos al medioambiente
(ACTIVIDADES DE ALTO RIESGO). SONY, todos sus PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS y sus respectivos afiliados especficamente renuncian a cualquier garanta, obligacin o condicin de aptitud, expresa o implcita, en ACTIVIDADES DE ALTO RIESGO. EXCLUSIN DE LA GARANTA DEL SOFTWARE Usted presta su consentimiento y acuerda que utilizar el SOFTWARE a su propio riesgo y que ser responsable por el uso del SOFTWARE. El SOFTWARE se suministra TAL CUAL, sin ninguna garanta, obligacin ni condicin de ningn tipo. SONY Y TODOS SUS PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS (a los fines de esta seccin, SONY y todos sus PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS se denominarn, en conjunto, SONY) EXPRESAMENTE RENUNCIAN A TODAS LAS GARANTAS, OBLIGACIONES O CONDICIONES, EXPRESAS O IMPLCITAS INCLUIDAS, ENTRE OTRAS, LAS GARANTAS IMPLCITAS DE COMERCIABILIDAD, NO INFRACCIN Y APTITUD PARA UN FIN DETERMINADO. SONY NO GARANTIZA NI REALIZA NINGUNA DECLARACIN DE
(A) QUE LAS FUNCIONES INCLUIDAS EN EL SOFTWARE SATISFARN SUS REQUISITOS NI QUE SERN ACTUALIZADAS, (B) QUE EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL SOFTWARE SER CORRECTO Y SIN ERRORES NI QUE SE CORREGIRN LOS DEFECTOS, (C) QUE EL SOFTWARE NO DAAR OTRO SOFTWARE, HARDWARE NI DATOS, (D) QUE EL SOFTWARE, LOS SERVICIOS DE RED (INCLUIDA INTERNET) NI LOS PRODUCTOS (DISTINTOS DEL SOFTWARE) DE LOS CUALES DEPENDE EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL SOFTWARE, CONTINUARN ESTANDO DISPONIBLES, SIN INTERRUPCIONES NI MODIFICACIONES, Y (E) EN RELACIN CON EL USO O LOS RESULTADOS DEL USO DEL SOFTWARE EN TRMINOS DE CORRECCIN, PRECISIN, CONFIABILIDAD O CUALQUIER OTRA CONDICIN. NINGUNA INFORMACIN NI ASESORAMIENTO, VERBAL O POR ESCRITO, SUMINISTRADOS POR SONY O UN REPRESENTANTE AUTORIZADO DE SONY, CREAR NINGUNA GARANTA, OBLIGACIN NI CONDICIN NI DE NINGUNA MANERA AUMENTAR EL ALCANCE DE ESTA GARANTA. SI EL SOFTWARE TUVIERA ALGN DEFECTO, USTED ASUMIR EL COSTO TOTAL DE TODOS LOS SERVICIOS, REPARACIONES O CORRECCIONES. ALGUNAS JURISDICCIONES NO PERMITEN LA EXCLUSIN DE GARANTAS IMPLCITAS;
ES POSIBLE QUE ESTAS EXCLUSIONES NO SE APLIQUEN A SU CASO. LIMITACIN DE RESPONSABILIDAD SONY Y TODOS LOS PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS (a los fines de esta seccin, SONY y todos los PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS se denominarn, en conjunto SONY) NO SERN RESPONSABLES POR NINGN DAO INCIDENTAL O EMERGENTE, POR INCUMPLIMIENTO DE CUALQUIER GARANTA EXPRESA O IMPLCITA, 59ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 60 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM INCUMPLIMIENTO DE CONTRATO, NEGLIGENCIA, RESPONSABILIDAD ESTRICTA NI SEGN NINGUNA OTRA TEORA LEGAL RELACIONADA CON EL SOFTWARE, INCLUIDOS, ENTRE OTROS, LOS DAOS QUE SURJAN DE LUCRO CESANTE, PRDIDA DE INGRESOS, PRDIDA DE DATOS, PRDIDA DEL USO DEL SOFTWARE O DEL HARDWARE ASOCIADO, TIEMPO DE INACTIVIDAD Y TIEMPO DEL USUARIO, INCLUSO SI TENAN CONOCIMIENTO ACERCA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE DICHOS DAOS. EN CUALQUIER CASO, LA RESPONSABILIDAD TOTAL SEGN CUALQUIER CLUSULA DE ESTE EULA SE LIMITAR AL MONTO REALMENTE PAGADO POR EL PRODUCTO. ALGUNAS JURISDICCIONES NO PERMITEN LA EXCLUSIN O LIMITACIN POR DAOS INCIDENTALES O EMERGENTES; ES POSIBLE QUE LA EXCLUSIN ANTERIOR NO SE APLIQUE A SU CASO. FUNCIN DE ACTUALIZACIN AUTOMTICA Eventualmente, SONY o los PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS podrn actualizar automticamente o modificar de cualquier otra forma el SOFTWARE incluidos, entre otros, por motivos de mejora de las funciones de seguridad, correccin de errores y mejora de funciones, en el momento en que usted interacte con los servidos de SONY o de terceros, o en cualquier otro momento. Dichas actualizaciones o modificaciones podrn borrar o cambiar la naturaleza de las funciones u otros aspectos del SOFTWARE incluidas, entre otras, funciones con las que espera contar. Usted presta su consentimiento y acuerda que dichas actividades podrn ocurrir a entera discrecin de SONY y que SONY podr supeditar el uso continuado del SOFTWARE a la completa instalacin y aceptacin de dichas actualizaciones o modificaciones. Dichas actualizaciones/
60ES modificaciones se considerarn y formarn parte del SOFTWARE a los fines del presente EULA. Al aceptar este EULA, usted acepta dichas actualizaciones/modificaciones. TOTALIDAD DEL ACUERDO, RENUNCIA Y DIVISIBILIDAD Este EULA y la poltica de proteccin de datos de SONY, y sus eventuales enmiendas y modificaciones, en conjunto constituyen el acuerdo total entre usted y SONY en relacin con el SOFTWARE. El no ejercicio o la no exigencia de cualquier derecho o clusula del presente EULA por parte de SONY no se interpretar como una renuncia a dicho derecho o clusula. Si cualquier parte del presente EULA fuera nula, ilegal o inexigible, dicha clusula se exigir en el mximo alcance permitido para mantener la intencin del presente EULA y el resto seguir vigente y exigible. DERECHO APLICABLE Y JURISDICCIN No se aplicar al presente EULA el Convencin de las Naciones Unidas sobre Contratos para Venta Internacional de Mercaderas. Este EULA se regir por las leyes de Japn, independientemente de cualquier conflicto de derecho. Cualquier litigio que surja de este EULA se someter a la jurisdiccin exclusiva del Distrito Judicial de Tokio en Japn y las partes por el presente acuerdan la jurisdiccin de dichos tribunales. RECURSOS DE EQUIDAD Independientemente de cualquier disposicin del presente EULA en contrario, usted reconoce y acepta que cualquier infraccin o incumplimiento de este EULA por su parte perjudicar irreparablemente a SONY, en cuyo caso la aplicacin de daos pecuniarios sera inadecuada y presta su consentimiento HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 61 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM expreso y tendr derecho a exigir todas las clusulas de este EULA con respecto al SOFTWARE de dicha proveedor. Si tiene alguna consulta en relacin con este EULA, comunquese con SONY por escrito a la direccin de contacto de SONY que corresponde a su rea o pas. Copyright 2018 Sony Electronics Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. a que SONY obtenga la medida cautelar o de equidad que SONY considere necesaria o adecuada en dichas circunstancias. SONY, adems, podr tomar cualquier medida legal o tcnica para impedir la infraccin y/o exigir este EULA incluidas, entre otras, cancelar inmediatamente su uso del SOFTWARE, si SONY considera, a su entera discrecin, que ha infringido o intenta infringir el presente EULA. Estos recursos son adicionales a otros recursos legales, de equidad o contractuales que pueda tener SONY. RESCISIN Sin perjuicio de cualquier otro derecho, SONY podr rescindir este EULA si usted no cumple con alguna de sus condiciones. En caso de rescisin, deber dejar de utilizar el SOFTWARE y destruir todas sus copias. ENMIENDA SONY SE RESERVA EL DERECHO DE ENMENDAR CUALQUIERA DE LAS CLUSULAS DE ESTE EULA A SU ENTERA DISCRECIN, MEDIANTE LA PUBLICACIN DE UN AVISO EN EL SITIO WEB DESIGNADO POR SONY, MEDIANTE NOTIFICACIN POR CORREO ELECTRNICO A LA DIRECCIN QUE USTED HAYA SUMINISTRADO, MEDIANTE AVISO COMO PARTE DEL PROCESO DE ACTUALIZACIN/MEJORA O MEDIANTE CUALQUIER OTRO MEDIO RECONOCIDO LEGALMENTE. Si no presta su consentimiento a dicha enmienda, deber comunicarse rpidamente con SONY para recibir instrucciones. Si contina utilizando el SOFTWARE despus de la fecha de vigencia de dicha notificacin, se considerar que ha aceptado estar obligado por dicha enmienda. BENEFICIARIOS EXTERNOS Cada uno de los PROVEEDORES EXTERNOS es un beneficiario externo 61ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 62 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Precauciones Sobre seguridad Si algn objeto slido o lquido cae dentro del sistema, desenchufe el sistema y haga que sea revisado por personal certificado antes de volverlo a poner en funcionamiento. No se pare sobre la barra parlante ni el subwoofer, ya que se puede caer y lastimarse o provocar daos en el sistema. En fuentes elctricas Antes de operar el sistema, verifique que el voltaje de operacin sea idntico al suministro de energa local. La tensin de operacin se indica en la placa de identificacin que se encuentra en la parte inferior de la barra parlante. Si no va a utilizar el sistema durante mucho tiempo, asegrese de desconectar el sistema del tomacorriente de pared. Para desconectar el cable de alimentacin de CA, agarre el enchufe;
nunca jale del cable. Por razones de seguridad, una hoja del enchufe es ms ancha que la otra, y solo se conectar al tomacorriente de pared en una sola posicin. Si no puede insertar el enchufe totalmente en el tomacorriente, pngase en contacto con su distribuidor. El cable de alimentacin de CA debe cambiarse solo en una tienda de servicio calificada. Acumulacin de calor Aunque el sistema se calienta durante la operacin, esto no es una falla. Si utiliza este sistema constantemente con volumen alto, la temperatura de las partes trasera e inferior del sistema se incrementar considerablemente. Para no quemarse, no toque el sistema. Sobre la ubicacin No coloque el sistema cerca de fuentes de calor o en un lugar expuesto a la luz directa del sol, polvo excesivo o golpes mecnicos. No coloque nada en la parte trasera de la barra parlante ni del subwoofer ya que podra bloquear los orificios de ventilacin y provocar fallas. No coloque objetos metlicos que no sea un TV alrededor del sistema. Las funciones inalmbricas pueden ser inestables. Si el sistema se usa en combinacin con un TV, una videograbadora o una pletina, es posible que se produzcan ruidos y que la calidad de la imagen se vea afectada. En tal caso, coloque el sistema lejos del TV, la videograbadora o la pletina. Tenga cuidado al colocar el sistema en una superficie que haya recibido algn tratamiento especial (encerado, engrasado, pulido, etc.), ya que es posible que la superficie se manche o decolore. Asegrese de evitar posibles lesiones provocadas por las puntas de la barra parlante y el subwoofer. Mantenga un espacio de 3 cm o ms debajo de la barra parlante cuando la cuelgue en una pared. Los altavoces de este sistema no tienen el tipo de proteccin magntica. No coloque tarjetas magnticas en el sistema o cerca de l. Manipulacin del subwoofer No coloque la mano en la abertura del subwoofer cuando lo levante. Podra daar el controlador del altavoz. Cuando lo levante, sostngalo de la parte inferior. Sobre el funcionamiento Antes de conectar otros dispositivos, asegrese de apagar o desenchufar el sistema. 62ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 63 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Casos de irregularidad de color en una pantalla de TV cercana Es posible que se observen irregularidades de color en ciertos tipos de TV. Si se observa irregularidad de color... Apague el TV y luego vuelva a encenderlo despus de 15 a 30 minutos. Si se vuelve a observar irregularidad de color... Coloque el sistema lejos del TV. Sobre la limpieza Limpie el sistema con un pao suave y seco. No utilice ningn tipo de esponja abrasiva, polvo quitagrasa ni solvente como alcohol o bencina. Si tiene preguntas o problemas relacionados con su sistema, consulte a su distribuidor Sony ms cercano. Derechos de autor y marcas comerciales registradas Este sistema incorpora Dolby* Digital y DTS** Digital Surround System.
* Fabricado con la autorizacin de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Vision y el smbolo de doble D son marcas comerciales de Dolby Laboratories.
**Para las patentes DTS, consulte https://
patents.dts.com. Fabricado bajo licencia de DTS, Inc. DTS, el Smbolo, DTS y el Smbolo juntos, DTS:X, Virtual:X, el logotipo DTS:X y el logotipo de DTS Virtual:X son marcas comerciales registradas o marcas comerciales de DTS, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y/u otros pases. DTS, Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. La marca de palabra BLUETOOTH y sus logotipos son marcas comerciales registradas propiedad de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. y todo uso que Sony Corporation haga de dichas marcas est sujeto a una licencia. Otras marcas registradas y nombres comerciales son propiedad de sus respectivos propietarios. Los trminos HDMI y HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, y el logotipo de HDMI son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y otros pases. El logotipo de BRAVIA es una marca comercial de Sony Corporation. PlayStation es una marca registrada o una marca registrada de Sony Interactive Entertainment Inc. Tecnologa de codificacin de audio MPEG Layer-3 y patentes con licencia de Fraunhofer IIS y Thomson. Windows Media es una marca comercial registrada o marca registrada de Microsoft 63ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\110OTH.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 64 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM Corporation en los Estados Unidos y/o en otros pases. Este producto est protegido por ciertos derechos de propiedad intelectual de Microsoft Corporation. El uso o distribucin de dicha tecnologa fuera de este producto est prohibido sin una licencia de Microsoft o de una subsidiaria autorizada de Microsoft. TRILUMINOS y el logotipo de TRILUMINOS son marcas comerciales registradas de Sony Corporation. Todas las otras marcas comerciales son marcas comerciales de sus respectivos propietarios. 64ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 65 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM ndice Buttons AUDIO 26 DIMMER 41 DISPLAY 33 IMMERSIVE AE 30 NIGHT 32 VOICE 32 A A/V Sync 38 Apagado del sistema 34 ARC 10, 35 Audio DRC 38 Audio Return Channel 10, 35 B BLUETOOTH AAC 40 configuracin 40 emparejamiento 27 modo de espera 40 BRAVIA sync 36 Brillo indicadores 41 pantalla del panel frontal 41 BT.2020 55 C Conexin (Consulte conexin con cables o conexin inalmbrica en el ndice) Conexin con cables dispositivos AV 18 TV 18 TV y dispositivos 4K 21 Conexin inalmbrica dispositivos BLUETOOTH 27 subwoofer 16 TV 18 Configuracin altavoz 37 audio 38 BLUETOOTH 40 brillo 41 estado actual 33 HDMI 39 men 37 restauracin 50 sistema 40 sonido envolvente 30 Configuracin actual 33 Configuracin de altavoces 37 Configuracin de audio 38 Configuracin del sistema 40 Control de audio del sistema 34 Control de DTS dialog 38 Control para HDMI 34 Control remoto 12 E eARC 10, 35, 39 Enhanced Audio Return Channel 10, 35, 39 F Formato audio 8, 53 video 8, 54 Formato de audio 8, 53 Formato de video 8, 54 H HDCP 55 HDMI configuracin 39 formato de seal 22 HDR 55 I IMMERSIVE AE 30 Instalacin 14 IR repeater 17 65ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 66 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM M Modo de espera automtico 40 Modo de espera hasta 35 Modo de voz 32 Modo nocturno 32 Motor envolvente vertical 30, 38 P PROTECT 49 R Rango de dilogo 32 Reproduccin de un toque 35 Restaurar 50 S Seleccin de escena 36 Seleccin del modo de sonido 36 Software actualizacin 40 versin 37, 40 Sonido de transmisin multiplex 26 Sound Mode 31 66ES HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage:
Right 010COV.book Page 67 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM HT-G700 HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1) 5-013-058-11(1) C:\Works\FY20HT_models\SB1\IM\USCaFRLaES\5013058111\5013058111\
5013058111HTG700UC2\03LaES-HTG700UC2\120COVIX.fm masterpage: Left 010COV.book Page 68 Wednesday, November 13, 2019 11:19 PM HT-G700 5-013-058-11(1)
1 | HT-G700-Active Speaker System-Int Photo---Part 01 | Internal Photos | 3.51 MiB |
AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 7 General Appearance of the EUT Figure 8 Inside of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 4 of 12 AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 9 Inside of the EUT Figure 10 Inside of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 5 of 12 AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 11 Inside of the EUT Figure 12 Inside of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 6 of 12 AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 13 Inside of the EUT Figure 14 Inside of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 7 of 12 AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 15 Inside of the EUT Figure 16 Inside of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 8 of 12
1 | HT-G700-Active Speaker System-Int Photo---Part 02 | Internal Photos | 2.97 MiB |
AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 17 Inside of the EUT Figure 18 Inside of the EUT General 2.4GHz wireless Antenna W2.4 Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 9 of 12 AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 19 Inside of the EUT Figure 20 Inside of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 10 of 12 AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 21 Inside of the EUT BT Antenna Figure 22 Inside of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 11 of 12 AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 23 Inside of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 12 of 12
1 | HT-G700-Active Speaker System-Ext Photo | External Photos | 305.77 KiB |
AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B. Photo of the EUT Figure 1 General Appearance of the EUT Figure 2 General Appearance of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 1 of 12 AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 3 General Appearance of the EUT Figure 4 General Appearance of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 2 of 12 AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Figure 5 General Appearance of the EUT Figure 6 General Appearance of the EUT Audix Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Appendix B Page 3 of 12
1 | SA-G700 UC2-BAR- Label Rev01 1120 | ID Label/Location Info | 121.69 KiB |
hed kOe retrace at peer need CVE CT Nanas GaSe Fa Aer ra Pea ata) [ol] acai aaaiaest A PaCS Tem Cale]
Rene eget THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. fA Teche ca eee nr PEELE amb ace mee Hie a d a f) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND Me eS ea andes 13046635 Aiea oa Uae gs Ta ea tel a LISTED [een ra ped bring the MADE IN CHINA/
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Esqgaqq | entire system set tothe service staton.| p MADE,IN CHING, [ARES
1 | HT-G700 Autorization letter Kobayashi 1119 | Cover Letter(s) | 323.51 KiB |
SONY Sony Corporation 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-0075, Japan Tel +81-50-31416214 FAX +81-50-3750-6540 Authorization Letter To whom it may concern;
| hereby authorize the person below Mr. Takeshi Kobayashi Sony Corporation to sign the following documents on my behalf.
- FCC Form 731 with Grantee code AK8
- Confidentiality request letter
- Letter of Agency
- Any other application document that needs signature by Grantee for any FCC Part 15 applications by way of any third party agents. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Date: January 26, 2016 Place: Tokyo, Japan A yo Takata Senior Manager Sony Corporation
1 | HT-G700 FCC ID Authorization Letter BAR | Cover Letter(s) | 85.54 KiB |
SONY Sony Corporation 1-7-1 Konan Minato-Ku Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan AGENCY AUTHORIZATION LETTER FCC ID: AK8SAG700 Date: Nov.5th, 2019 To whom it may concern:
We, the undersigned, hereby authorize Audix Technology (ShenZhen) Co.,Ltd to act on our behalf, as our agent, in the following matters related to the FCC approval of our products: report submittal, related correspondence, the signing of all documents relating to these matters, and any other lawful activity necessary to obtain such certification. Any act carried out by Audix within the scope of this authorization shall have the same effects as our own. This authorization shall expire 6 months form original date. If you have any Questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. Thank you. Sincerely, Takeshi Kobayashi Product Safety Manager Product Compliance Section Quality Assurance Department Sony Video & Sound Products Inc. Tel: +81-050-3750-6543 Fax: +81-050-3750-6573 E-mail: TakeshiA.Kobayashi@jp.sony.com
1 | HT-G700 FCC ID Confidentiality Request Letter BAR | Cover Letter(s) | 77.98 KiB |
SONY Sony Corporation 1-7-1 Konan Minato-Ku Tokyo, 108-0075 Japa Date: Nov. 5th, 2019 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division FCC ID: AK8SAG700 Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, the Applicant hereby requests confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:
1. Block diagram 2. Schematics 3. Operation Description The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might to harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the grant for this application. Sincerely, Takeshi Kobayashi Product Safety Manager Product Compliance Section Quality Assurance Department Sony Video & Sound Products Inc. Tel: +81-050-3750-6543 Fax: +81-050-3750-6573 E-mail: TakeshiA.Kobayashi@jp.sony.com
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2019-11-24 | 2404 ~ 2476 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2019-11-24
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Sony Corporation
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0021926126
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
1-7-1 Konan Minato-ku
|
||||
1 |
1-7-1 Konan
|
|||||
1 |
Tokyo, N/A
|
|||||
1 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@acbcert.com
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
AK8
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
SAG700
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
R****** T****
|
||||
1 | Title |
Senior Manager
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
81-50********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
81-50********
|
||||
1 |
c******@jp.sony.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | Name |
S****** L******
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
No. 6, Kefeng Road, Science & Technology
|
||||
1 |
Shenzhen
|
|||||
1 |
China
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
86-75******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
86-75********
|
||||
1 |
s******@audix.com.cn
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | Name |
S**** Z********
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
No. 6, Kefeng Road, Science & Technology
|
||||
1 |
Shenzhen
|
|||||
1 |
China
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
86-75******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
86-75********
|
||||
1 |
s******@audix.com.cn
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Sound Bar | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | Output power listed is conducted. RF exposure compliance is addressed for 1.1310 and 2.1091 MPE limits - this filing complies with KDB 447498 and is approved for mobile/fixed operation. Installers and end-users must be provided with transmitter installation and operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi- transmitter product procedures. Grantee must provide installation and operating instructions for complying with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures and RF exposure compliance. | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
AUDIX Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | Name |
A****** P****
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
86-75******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
86-75********
|
||||
1 |
a******@audix.com.cn
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2404.00000000 | 2476.00000000 | 0.0034430 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC